idc_1600servicemanual901-0005-026v1.0jun0607

Manual Number: 901-0005-026 v1.0 • June 6, 2007 • PN: 902-0017-001 v1.0

SYSTEM MODELS:X3C, X4C, AND X3G

1600 SERIES SERVICE MANUAL

This page is intentionally left blank.

iii

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-001 v2.0 • June 6, 2007

Important Notice

This equipment must be installed and serviced in accordance with the procedures described in this product integration manual.Only those individuals trained by Imaging Dynamics Company are authorized to perform installation and service procedures on this equipment.Authorized service personnel are responsible to ensure that all test equipment used during installation and service of this equipment are properly calibrated and the test equipment calibration records are properly maintained.Imaging Dynamics Company accepts no responsibility for damages arising from failure to follow the integration procedures, installation/service done by unqualified individuals or the use of improperly maintained test equipment.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

v

Copyrights and TrademarksCopyright © 2007 Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd. All Rights Reserved.IDC X3C, IDC X4C, IDC X3G, and IDC 1600 Series are copyrights of IDC. IDC MagellanTM is a registered trademark and the IDC logo is a trademark of Imaging Dynamics Company, Ltd. All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders and are used only for reference where specifically needed without any intent to infringe.All patient information used in this manual is fictitious. The information does not refer to any persons either living or deceased.Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd. (IDC) assumes no responsibility for the use or suitability of software or other equipment not provided by IDC or its affiliated companies. Although IDC strives to ensure the accuracy of the provided instructions, neither IDC nor its affiliated companies accepts any liability or damages for omissions contained in this manual. This document does not imply a legal contract. Readers assume responsibility for the use and interpretation of the information contained herein.All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, in any form or by any means without permission in writing from Imaging Dynamics Company Ltd.

IDC Corporate AddressImaging Dynamics Company Ltd.151, 2340 Pegasus Way N.E.Calgary, Alberta, Canada T2E 8M5Telephone: 403.251.9939, Fax: 403.251.1771www.imagingdynamics.com

IDC European Address

IDC Europe B.V.Victorialaan 15, 5213 JG 's-Hertogenbosch The Netherlands Tel: +31(0)73 751.1742 Fax: +31(0)73 751.1744

IDC Asian AddressIDC Beijing Rep. OfficeRoom 1007A China Resource No. 8 Jianguomenwai Bei AvenueBeijing 100005, ChinaTel: 00 86 10 85192196Fax: 00 86 10 85192198

EC REP


vi

IDC Customer ServiceOriginal documentation was written in English.For Local Service please call your local dealer:

IDC Dealer Technical SupportCall toll-free:

or e-mail: [email protected]

Dealer Name

Dealer Phone Number

IDC Help Desk 1.866.975.6737 (1.866.XPLORER)

After Hours (holidays and after 5pm MST, Monday through Friday)

1.877.275.9399


TABLE OF CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Who Should Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Standards Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Indications for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Regulatory Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1600 Component Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61600 Radiographic Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Detector Head Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

X3C Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11X4C Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11X3G Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Power Distribution (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13HV Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14X-ray Tube and Collimator Asseembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Lock-out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17High Voltage Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Radiation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Monitoring of Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Scintillator Safety for the X3C and X4C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19


viii

Patient Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Environmental Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Reporting Serious Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Avoiding Serious Incidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Legal Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Reporting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Advisory Labels and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Automatic Exposure Control Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27IDC Magellan 3 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Indications For Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration. . . . 1-29

Pre-Installation Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Equipment Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Environment Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Site Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Storage and Shipping Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Safe Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Generator Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71600 Site Planning Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

1600 Weights and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Facility Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

1600 Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Site Preparation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Room Dimension Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Data Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Ordering information:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

1600 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Service Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Equipment Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6


ix

Radiation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Scintillator Safety for X3C and X4C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Quick Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

1600 Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Unpacking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Unpacking the Column and Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Equipment Verification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Unpacking the Compact Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Pre-installation Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Stand Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Stand Control Box Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

To Install the Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Generator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Generator Cabinet Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Generator Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Power Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Compact Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Generator Final Installation and Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

HV Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Cable Fastening and Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

X-Ray Tube Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32High Voltage Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Stator Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Fans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34GND and/or Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Virtual Console (PC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Door Interlock Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Warning Light Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Collimator Lamp and System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36ION Chambers (AEC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39To Wire the Stand and Control Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44To Cable the Stand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46Detector Head Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

Routing the Detector Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48Preparing to Install the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Installing and Connecting the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64Power Distribution Module (PDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Understanding the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66Installing the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66

Cabling the Detector Head and PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68


x

Connecting the Detector Head and PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69Connecting the PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69Connecting the Detector Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69

Computer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77Powering up the 1600 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78Trigger Board Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79

Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79Checking the Trigger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80

Checking Movements and Installing the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81Leveling Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83

1600 Configuration and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Configuration and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Configuration and Calibration Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Configuration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7CalibrationTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Configuration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10General Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Configuration Step by Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height of the Room . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Configuration of C13 - Chest Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Configuration of C14 - Under-table Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Configuration of C15 - Table Height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Configuration of C16 - Detector Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Configuration of C17 - Detector Width Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Configuration of C18 - Detector Width Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Configuration of C19 - Optional Third SID Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Configuration of C21 - Safety Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Configuration of C22 - Chest SID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Configuration of C31 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position . . . 4-14Configuration of C32 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position . . . 4-15Configuration of C33 - Mid Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . . . . 4-15Configuration of C4.0 and C5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle for Detector. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle for Detector . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Common Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Undertable Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Chest Configuration Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Calibration Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19General Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Calibration Step by Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position. . . . . . 4-20Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position . . . . . 4-20Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height in Horizontal Position. . . . . . 4-20Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle CCW (-30°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle (0°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21


xi

Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle (90°). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle CW (120°) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID (100 cm / 39 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID (180 cm / 70.86 in) . . . . . . . . . 4-22Calibration of P41 - Minimum Detector Angle (-45°) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle (+20°) . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Adjustment Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Balance Test of the C-arm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

C-arm Balance in Horizontal Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25To Align of X-ray Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Alignment of Light Field with X-ray Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Perpendicularity Adjustment of X-ray Beam with Image Receptor. 4-31

Generator Configuration and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1

Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Installation Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Initial Configuration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Configuration and Test Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Self-running Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Filament and Anode Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Filament Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Focal Spots Configuration and Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Generator Service Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10GSM Program Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Customized Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Extended Memory Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Extended Memory Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory. . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

X-Ray Tube Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18X-Ray Tube Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Digital mA Loop Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Auto-Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Generator Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Detector Calibration And Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Adjustments on the LCD Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Half Value Layer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6


xii

Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Example Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Detector Head Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Device Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11

Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Procedure for Determining Gain and Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12Table of Gain Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Procedure for Measuring Exposure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16To Measure the Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16

Dark Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19Configuring Dark Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

Flat Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24Configuring Flat Field Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

Running the f# Wizard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Geometric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29 Cropping ROI Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Artefact Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

Artefact Removal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30AEC Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

CPI Generator – AEC Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Detector Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33

The AEC Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Equipment Needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Assignment of Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33Balancing of the AEC Ion Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34AEC Calibration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34

Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Equipment Needed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Assignment of Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41Balancing the Ion Chambers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41To Perform the AEC Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

System Acceptance Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Acceptance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Acceptance Testing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Start-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Physical Inspection/Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Gain and Offset, Flat Field and Dark Field Corrections . . . . . . . . . . 7-4


xiii

Exposure Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Dark Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Uniformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Response Linearity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Readout Linearity Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Geometric Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12High-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Noise/Low-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Procedure for Measuring Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Procedure for Measuring Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Reference Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

Detector Head Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Magellan 3 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Detector Head and PDM Power Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Storage Commitment Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Send Queue (Storage SCU) Request for Storage Verification . . . . . . 8-6

Scenario #1–Successful, Immediate Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Scenario #2–Successful, Delayed Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Scenario #3–Failed, Immediate Response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Scenario #4–Failed, Delayed Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

AutoDeleting Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Starting the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Magellan 3 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Using the Help Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Connecting to the Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Sedecal Generator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12CPI Generator Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

The Configuration Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16

To Add a New Security Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Modifying a Security Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

Configuring the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19To Create a New User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Modifying the User List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

To Change Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Detector Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Generator and Imaging Station Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Configuring the X-ray Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24Adding or Removing a Non-DR Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28


xiv

Setting up the Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Naming the Imaging Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Configuring the Detector Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Configuring the TECC/PDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30

Detector Selector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Disk Space Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

To Change the Disk Space Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34The Worklist Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36

Worklist Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Configuring the Worklist Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

To Change the Application Entity Title for the Worklist Manager . . 8-37To Add or Change a Worklist Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37To Remove a Worklist Provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39To Configure the Worklist Query Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40To Test the Connection to a Worklist Provider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

Managing the Scheduled Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Moving the Scheduled Study Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Resizing the Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

To Configure Other Settings in the Worklist Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45The Send Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46To Configure the Send Destination List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47Configuring Film Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53Configuring Sending Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

The Print Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57To Configure Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

To Change the AE Title for Magellan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59Choosing Active and Default Printers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59 Adding or Changing a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59Film Layout Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67

To Remove a Printer from the Printer List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69To Copy the Settings of a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70To Test the Printer’s Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71

Study/Image Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73To Configure Xporter FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73

Grid Detection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75To Enable Grid Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76

The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77To Open the Visual Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77

To Edit the Parameters in the Visual Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . 8-78The Parameter Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84

Managing the Anatomies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85To Add a New Anatomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86Modifying an Anatomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86To Modify the Activity or Details of an Anatomy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89

Managing the Projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89


xv

About Anatomy/Projection Pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92To Create or Remove a Anatomy/Projection Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92To Add a New Level to an Anatomy/Projection Pair. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-94To Copy Parameter Values from Other Anatomy/Projection Pairs. 8-96To Modify Parameter Details for Existing Anatomy/Projection Pairs8-98

Managing the Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102To Add an Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure . . 8-102Activating or Deactivating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103To Activate or Deactivate a Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-104To Delete Procedures and Import Procedures from a Worklist . . 8-104To Remove or Duplicate an Anatomy/Procedure Step. . . . . . . . . 8-105To Change the Order of Procedure Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105 To Create a New Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107

Import Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108Configuring the Arcoma CMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109

To Set the COM Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109To Configure AutoPosition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109To Test the AutoPosition # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110

Detector Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Failed Focus Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Resolution Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Typical Test Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Additional Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1Safety Warnings and Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Service Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Electrical Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Resetting the EEPROM (U27) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Unit Movements Blocked. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Inverters Factory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Anticrushing System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Bearings Gap Check Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Trigger Board Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Issue Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Resolution Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21


xvi

Materials and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Work Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Create an Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Saving Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Uncorrected Dark Noise Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Uncorrected X-ray Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Flat Field and Dark Field Corrected Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric Corrected X-ray Image . . . 10-24Uploading Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Record the Investigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Grid Detect Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Replacement of Height Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Replacement of Height Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Replacement of SID Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Replacement of Detector Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Replacement of Detector Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41

Replacement of Steel Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42

Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Subassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Replacement of the X-Ray Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45


xvii

Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45

Replacement of the Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47

Replacement of the High Voltage Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48

Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic) . . . . . 10-49Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Replacement of Limit Switches: Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Adjustment of the Inclinometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position . . . . . . 10-56Subassemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Software Update in Control PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Lock-out Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3Scanning for Volume Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4Running the Windows Disk Defragmenter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6Care and Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7

Preventative Maintenance Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9Scheduled Maintenance Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11

Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11


xviii

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11Stand Preventative Maintenance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11Optional 80 KW Generator Preventative Maintenance Procedure11-12

Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3

Material Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Placing an Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Order Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Warranty Parts Return Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4

Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Detector Head Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12

Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Product Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

IDC Support and Hours of Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1


INTRODUCTION

The following information is included:1.1 “Preface” 1.2 “Regulatory Information” 1.3 “1600 Component Details” 1.4 “Safety Precautions” 1.5 “Automatic Exposure Control Device” 1.6 “IDC Magellan 3 Software” 1.7 “Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration”


1 - 2 • Introduction •

Revision Information

Version Date Description

0.1 March 15, 2007 Module created using existing information.

1.0 June 6, 2007 First release.


Introduction • Preface • 1 - 3

1.1 Preface

1.1.1 Who Should Use This Manual

Service technicians may use this manual as a guide for pre-installation planning, installing, calibrating and daily servicing of the Imaging Dynamics' 1600 digital x-ray machine. The user must be aware of what system model they are using to correctly install and service the system.Users are required to retain all manuals shipped with this unit.

1.1.2 Manual Conventions

DANGER! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided will causeserious personal injury or death.

WARNING! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could causeserious personal injury, or catastrophic damage of equipment or data.

CAUTION! Advise of conditions or situations that if not heeded or avoided could causepersonal injury or damage to equipment or data.

NOTE: Alerts users of facts and conditions that are important to know but do not relate topossible injury or damage to equipment.


1 - 4 • Introduction • Regulatory Information

1.2 Regulatory Information

1.2.1 Standards Compliance

This system meets the following requirements

This system has been certified by:

Standard for Medical electrical systems:

Part 1-1: General requirements for safety

IEC 60601-1-1: 2000

CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1-1: 2002 (Second Edition)

Medical electrical systems:

Part 1-3: General Requirements For Radiation Protection In Diagnostic x-ray Equipment

IEC 60601-1-3: 1994 (First Edition)

Medical electric equipment:

Part 1-4: General requirements for safety: Programmable electrical medical systems

IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1: 1999

CAN/CSAC22.2 No. 60601-1-4: 2002 (First Edition)

Part 2: Particular requirements for the safety of associated equipment of x-ray equipment

IEC 60601-2-32: 1994, with regard to the risks of fire, shock and mechanical only.

The system complies with IEC 60601-1-2 (2001) for medical electrical equipment, including the electromagnetic emissions requirements of CISPR II, Group I, Class A as specified in IEC 60601-1-2 (2001)


Introduction • Regulatory Information • 1 - 5

1.2.2 Indications for Use

The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) requires the following statement to appear in this manual:

“The 1600 system is intended for use by a qualified/trained doctor or technologist on both adult and pediatric patients for taking diagnostic radiographic exposures of the skull, spinal column, chest, abdomen, extremities, and other body parts but not mammography. Applications can be performed with patient sitting, standing, or lying in the prone or supine positions.”

FDA 510(k) for the X4C 1600: K042041

FDA 510(k) for the X3C 1600: to be assigned by FDA

FDA 510(k) for the X3C Detector Head: K070079

• The 1600 digital radiography system is not to be used for mammography.• The 1600 digital radiography system should only be operated in conjunction with

specified medical x-ray equipment and by trained and licensed personnel.

WARNING! Only certified and properly trained, authorized personnel should bepermitted to take x-ray exposures. No practical design can incorporatecomplete protection for personnel who do not follow proper safetyprecautions.

WARNING! The appropriate x-ray imaging exposure parameters should be consistentwith established Federal and Provincial/State radiation protection practicesand medical imaging standards in your institution.

1.2.3 Regulatory Forms

It is the responsibility of the installer to complete and submit the FDA 2579 form and/or any other regional/provincial regulatory installation requirements applicable to the location. The copies of these documents shall be retained by the installer’s firm for the life time of the device.


1 - 6 • Introduction • 1600 Component Details

1.3 1600 Component Details

CAUTION! Some portions of the 1600 are very heavy and must be lifted with the specifiedequipment or with proper lifting techniques to prevent injury.

1.3.1 1600 Radiographic Stand

The following labels indicates relevant equipment and regulation information for the 1600. The type of label will depend on the type of Detector Head. See Figure and Figure 1-2.

Table 1-1 : Component Table

Component Name Manufacturer Model/Part Number Manuals

Radiographic Stand Sedecal X Plus LP

Detector Head rated 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 5.6 A

Digital Radiographic Detector Imaging Dynamics • X4C/740-0008-001• X3C/740-0008-009• X3G/740-0008-008

Power Distribution Module Imaging Dynamics 740-0007-005

HV Generator Sedecal Sedecal SHF 635 (64 kW) See Sedecal Manual

X-ray Tube Varian Rad 92 See Varian Manual

Collimator Ralco 302 L/A See Ralco Manual

Workstation Dell Precision 390 See Dell Reference Guide

1600 Administration Manual 901-0002-018

1600 Operator’s Manual 901-0001-018

1600 Service Manual 901-0005-026

1600 Site Planning Guide 901-0004-004


Introduction • 1600 Component Details • 1 - 7

Figure 1-1



Figure 1-2



The following product labels are located on the back of the 1600 column (Figure 1-3). For more information about these labels see Figure 1-4, “Sedecal X Plus” and Figure 1-5, “UL Classification” .

Figure 1-3

Figure 1-4 Sedecal X Plus

Sedecal Plus and UL Classification

Product Sedecal X Plus

Model No A8117-01

Voltage 208/230/240 v~, 1 ph.

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Input Power 1.5 kVa

Manufactured Date

Serial Number xxxxxx



Figure 1-5 UL Classification

Table 1-2 1600 Radiographic Stand Dimensional Specifications

Maximum SID 1800 mm.

Minimum SID 1000 mm.

Total vertical travel range 1290 mm.

Rotation of Swivel Arm +120°/ -30°

Rotation or Tube-Collimator Assembly ±180°

Rotation of Detector +20°/-45°

Medical Equipmentwith respect to Electric,

Shock, Fire and Mechanical Hazards

only in accordance with UL 60601-1<14 NN>



1.3.2 Detector Head Models

This manual contains information for three IDC Detector Heads: X3C, X4C, and X3G. Sections in the manual that are Detector Head specific can be identified by their appropriate headings. The user must be aware of what system model they are using to correctly install and service the system.

1.3.2.1 X3C Detector HeadThe following tables list the specifications of the X3C Detector Head. See Table 1-3 and Table 1-4 below.

1.3.2.2 X4C Detector HeadThe following tables list the specifications of the X4C Detector Head. See Table 1-5 and Table 1-6 below.

Table 1-3 Image Receptor Dimensional Specifications

Imaging area 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17 in)

Effective pixel pitch 144μm

Limiting spatial resolution 3.4 lp/mm

Nominal resolution 3.2 lp/mm

Scintillator Cesium Iodide

Grid (stationary) Optional 13:1 70 lines/cm

Photo-timer Optional 3-field ion chamber

Detector Head Weight including support frame

47.75 kg (105.25 lbs)

Table 1-4 CCD Camera Dimensional Specifications

Matrix 3072 x 3072

Pixels 9 million

Pixel size 12 x 12μm


Imaging area 43 x 43 cm (17 x 17 in)





1.3.2.3 X3G Detector HeadThe following tables list the specifications of the X3G Detector Head. See Table 1-7 and Table 1-8 below.


Scintillator Cesium Iodide

Grid (stationary) 13:1 70 lines/cm

Photo-timer 3-field ion chamber (AID)


Matrix 4000 x 4000

Pixels 16 million

Pixel size 9 x 9μm


Imaging area 43 cm x 43 cm (17 in x 17 in)




Scintillator Gadolinium Oxysulfide (GadOx)

Grid (stationary) Optional 13:1 70 lines/cm

Photo-timer Optional 3-field ion chamber

Detector Head Weight including support frame

47.75 kg (105.25 lbs)


Matrix 3072 x 3072

Pixels 9 million

Pixel size 12μm x 12μm




1.3.3 Power Distribution (PDM)

The following product labels are located on the Power Distribution Module (Figure 1-6).

Figure 1-6

• Figure 1-7 is located on the Power Distribution Module.

Figure 1-7

PDMLabel

WarrantyVoid Seal



• Figure 1-8 indicates the warranty is void if the seal is broken.

Figure 1-8

1.3.4 HV Generator

Table 1-9 X-Ray Generator Components

X-ray Generator with AEC capability

Universal Interface provided for Photo-timer

64 kW (80 kW optional) High Frequency Inverter Generator

Table 1-10 Range and Accuracy of Radiographic Parameters

Parameter Range Accuracy

kV From 40 kV to 125 kV or 150 kV in 1 kV steps

± (3 % + 1 kV)

mA From 10 mA to 800 mA through the following mA stations: 10, 12.5, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800

± (4 % + 1 mA)

mAs Product of mA x Time values from 0.1 mAs to 500 mAs

Product of mA x Time values from 0.1 mAs to 500 mAs



NOTE: Specified accuracy does not include test equipment accuracy.

1.3.5 X-ray Tube and Collimator Asseembly

The following product label is located on the back of the manual collimator (Figure 1-9). For more information about this label see Figure 1-10, “Ralco” .

Figure 1-9

Exposure Time From 1 millisecond to 10 seconds through the following Time stations:

Milliseconds: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 64, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 640, 800

Seconds: 1, 1.25, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3.2, 4, 5, 6.4, 8, 10

± (2 % + 0.1 ms)

Table 1-10 Range and Accuracy of Radiographic Parameters

Ralco Label



Figure 1-10 Ralco

Table 1-11 X-Ray Tube Crane Components

1.3.6 Workstation

X-ray Tube and Manual Collimator

Table 1-12 Acquisition Workstation Components

Microsoft Windows XP

Intel Pentium 4, 3.2 gig processor

AGP Video Card (DVI or VGA capable)

2 gigabyte of system RAM

2 x 120 GB Mirrored Hard Drives (minimum)

21” Colour (.22 dot pitch) Display, 1600 X 1200

Built in 10/100/1000 mbits/s NIC (network interface card)

RalcoBeam Limiting Device

Collimator

Type R 302L/A DHHS

S/N 170/5975

Min inherent filtration Al equivalent

X-ray rating up to 150 kVp

Supply 24 v AC/DC 6.5 A 50/60 HZ

Date of Manufacture: mm/yy

!


Introduction • Safety Precautions • 1 - 17

1.4 Safety PrecautionsAll personnel associated with x-radiation must become familiar with the safety and regulatory instructions within this manual, and its related component manuals. These instructions should be thoroughly read and understood before operating the equipment. X-ray equipment does not pose any danger when used properly. Ensure that all service and operating personnel are properly trained and understand the hazards of radiation. Those responsible for the system must understand the safety requirements for x-ray operation.

1.4.1 Lock-out Procedures

Emergency stop buttons shall not to be used during maintenance or servicing operations in place of required lock-out procedures. The equipment shall only be serviced by trained service personnel. Service personnel shall be knowledgeable of and follow their organizations required lock-out procedure. This procedure should state that the equipment shall not be serviced without locking the electrical disconnect in the open position.

1.4.2 High Voltage Safety

The 1600 system is a very complex and potentially dangerous device and should only be operated and serviced by trained professionals. Failure to follow the following service guidelines may expose operators, service personnel, and patients to severe risk.The complete system, including the generator, is capable of producing voltage levels near 150,000 volts. Proper care must be taken to prevent exposure to these voltages.Portions of the system pose a pinch or crush hazard. Proper precautions must be used to prevent injury. Such hazards are identified by universal symbols shown below.The following symbol (Figure 1-11) shown on a label indicates “Attention, consult accompanying documents – as applicable.”

Figure 1-11

Intermittent Use


1 - 18 • Introduction • Safety Precautions

1.4.3 Radiation Safety

WARNING! This x-ray unit may be dangerous to patient and operator unless safe exposureand operating instructions are observed.

The Detector Head produces no x-radiation. The unit produces digital medical images when coupled with specified medical x-ray equipment. All appropriate safety precautions should be taken when working with x-ray equipment.X-ray exposure may be damaging to health with some effects being cumulative and extending over months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation. Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less intensity than the primary beam.An effective protective measure is the use of lead shielding. To minimize dangerous exposure, use such items as lead screens, lead impregnated gloves, aprons, thyroid collars, etc. The lead screen should contain aminimum of 2.0 mm of lead or equivalent and personal protective devices (aprons, gloves, etc.) must contain a minimum of 0.25 mm of lead or equivalent. For confirmation of the local requirements at your site, please refer to your “Local Radiation Protection Rules” as provided by your Radiation Protection Advisor.Only certified and properly trained, authorized personnel should be permitted to take x-ray exposures. No practical design can incorporate complete protection for personnel who do not follow proper safety precautions.

1.4.4 Monitoring of Personnel

Radiation exposure should be measured to determine whether or not protectivemeasures are adequate. Monitoring may reveal inadequate or improper radiationprotection practices and potentially serious situations of radiation exposure.The most effective method of measuring radiation exposure may involve use of anexposure measuring instrument. Measurements should be taken in any locationwhere the operator or any portion of the body is exposed. Exposure must neverexceed the accepted tolerable dose.It is also a common practice to measure radiation exposure using personalradiation dosimeters. These instruments consist of x-ray sensitive film, thermoluminiscent material, and optically stimulated material enclosed within a holder that may be worn on the body. Although this instrument only measures the radiation in the body’s generalvicinity, it does provide a reasonable indication of radiation exposure.

1.4.5 Electrostatic Safety

Electronic components are static sensitive and easily damaged. Before handling, move to an anti-static area, wear anti-static wrist straps and preferably wear anti-static footwear.



1.4.6 Scintillator Safety for the X3C and X4C

WARNING! The scintillator used in the X3C and X4C units uses thallium doped cesiumiodide with a protective coating layer. It is not hazardous in its normal form.When handling the material, use lint free gloves, and treat it as you would adelicate glass lens. Do not touch nor attempt to clean the yellow surface. Ifthe detector head is dropped, check to see if the scintillator is broken. If thescintillator is broken or burned, hazardous dust or vapour may be formed.Use a protective mask and gloves before handling material and limitexposure to the minimum necessary to allow for bagging. Seal broken partsin a sturdy non-porous bag, label contents as containing thallium dopedcesium iodide, and contact Imaging Dynamics or local authorities fordirection regarding safe disposal.

1.4.7 Patient Safety

CAUTION! Do not allow operations or service personnel to pull themselves up from asitting or lying position with the patient handles or any part of the unit.

The patient environment refers to the space under, above, and around the patient table top. System components, such as the generator and computer workstation, must be installed outside the patient environment. See Table 1-13 and Figure 1-12 for patient environment dimensions.

Table 1-13

Radius around patient table 1.5 m (4.9 ft)

From floor beneath patient table to top of patient table 2.5 m (8.2 ft)



Figure 1-12

1.4.8 Environmental Safety

This equipment or system contains environmentally dangerous components and materials, such as PCB’s, electronic components, used dielectric oil, lead, and batteries. Once the life-cycle of the equipment or system comes to an end, becomes dangerous and need to be considered as harmful waste according to the international, domestic and local regulations. To minimize the risks involved in disposing of these waste products, please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer or an authorized waste management company for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

1.4.9 Reporting Serious Incidents

1.4.9.1 DefinitionSerious incidents involve failure of equipment causing serious injury, death, or potential for injury. Reporting serious incidents is a liability and regulatory requirement.

NOTE: When used in a safe and responsible manner, any equipment manufactured or sold asIDC equipment is the responsibility of IDC.



1.4.9.2 Avoiding Serious IncidentsMost serious incidents can be avoided with proper installation of heavy equipment, such as C-arms, tube mounts and collimators, used for positioning.

NOTE: Only certified and trained service personnel may install the system.

To avoid serious incidents and anticipate any potential equipment failures, regular maintenance should be performed as outlined in both the Operator’s Manual and Service Manual.Because serious incidents can include reoccuring equipment failures that may potentially cause an injury, equipment failures must be reported and handled immediately.

1.4.9.3 Legal ResponsibilityIDC’s primary responsibility is to ensure safety and well-being of patients, customers, and staff. Regulatory action may be required after IDC is informed of a serious incident and IDC has verified an equipment failure. Depending on the severity of the incident, regulatory authorities must be notified within 24 to 48 hours.

1.4.9.4 Reporting ProcedureImmediately report a serious incident by:1. Clearly and explicitly notifying your IDC contact. The IDC contact will notify his

manager and the IDC Quality Department.

2. Notify your manager. Your manager will spread awareness of the incident and ensure a proper response from senior staff.

3. Send an e-mail to the IDC Help Desk ([email protected]) and/or submit an entry into the IDC tracking system. Include the names and dates of people you have notified.

NOTE: It is the reporting service technician’s responsibility to ensure the proper peopleare notified of the serious incident.

1.4.9.5 RecordsSection 1.4.9, “Reporting Serious Incidents applies to:TECBUL-006-002 Reporting Serious Incidents



1.4.10 Advisory Labels and Symbols

The following labels and symbols are used on the systems.• Figure 1-13 indicates “Attention, consult accompanying documents - as applicable.”

Figure 1-13

• Figure 1-14 indicates there are no user serviceable parts on this medical device.

Figure 1-14

• Figure 1-15 indicates the collimator should not be open beyond 43 cm x 43 cm (17 in x 17 in).

Figure 1-15

• Figure 1-16 is the Hazardous Voltage label and indicates that there is hazardous voltage inside. Disconnect power before opening. Service by trained personnel only. Consult man-ual.

Figure 1-16

DO NOT OPEN COLLIMATOR ABOVE 43 cm x 43 cm(17 in x 17 in)



• Figure 1-17 is the Radiation Safety label and indicates that the x-ray unit may be dan-gerous to patient and operator unless safe exposure factors and operating instructions are observed.

Figure 1-17

• Figure 1-18 is the Electrostatic Sensitive Devices label and indicates that proper grounding techniques must be used to prevent damage to the equipment.

Figure 1-18

• Figure 1-19 is the Power supply Notice label and indicates to avoid equipment dam-age, set the transformer and/or power supply to proper voltage before powering.

Figure 1-19



• Figure 1-20 indicates that sitting is prohibited.

Figure 1-20

• Figure 1-21 indicates the equipment is Class I Type B equipment.

Figure 1-21

• Figure 1-22 indicates functional earth ground.

Figure 1-22

TYPE B



• Figure 1-23 indicates protective earth ground.

Figure 1-23

• Figure 1-24 indicates the neutral power supply conductor.

Figure 1-24

• Figure 1-25 indicates the AC power source.

Figure 1-25

• Figure 1-26 indicates Ionizing Radiation.

Figure 1-26



• Figure 1-27 indicates waste of electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed as unsorted municipal waste and must be collected separately. To minimize the risks involved in disposing of these waste products, please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer or an authorized waste management company for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment.

Figure 1-27

• Figure 1-28 indicates Dangerous Voltage.

Figure 1-28


Introduction • Automatic Exposure Control Device • 1 - 27

1.5 Automatic Exposure Control DeviceThe AEC (automatic exposure control) device used in the unit is a three-field ionization chamber device.The selection of the ionization cell location may vary for differing patient size or pathology, as it does with film-screen systems.

WARNING! The appropriate x-ray imaging exposure parameters should be consistentwith established Federal and Provincial/State radiation protection practicesand medical imaging standards in your institution.


1 - 28 • Introduction • IDC Magellan 3 Software

1.6 IDC Magellan 3 SoftwareIDC Magellan 3 is a software program that uses the latest digital imaging and processing techniques to acquire, store, retrieve, transmit, and print medical images for immediate review and disposition.

1.6.1 Indications For Use

The IDC Magellan 3 Application is an accessory to IDC units used for patients undergoing x-ray examinations.The IDC Magellan 3 Application is intended to acquire images from an IDC unit, display the images for viewing or reviewing, and transmit the images to a PACS (Picture Archiving and Communications System) for image archiving or to a DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine) compliant printer. It is intended for use by radiation technologists, physicians, and other medical personnel qualified to perform medical examinations.To avoid unintentional loss of data, it is recommended that the contents of the workstation's hard drive be backed up nightly. The amount of data on the system may vary from 5 GB to 160 GB; therefore, it is important to select an appropriate back-up medium. For facilities using a PACS, the PACS acts a back-up for image data; however, an appropriate back-up to tape or external hard-drive must be used for applications or configuration files. Facilities not using a PACS should back-up all data to a tape or external hard drive.


Introduction • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration • 1 - 29

1.7 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration

CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with thefunction of the 1600 and can, therefore, be safety hazards.

To prevent interference, surrounding equipment should comply with the standard IEC 60601-1-2.

X4C Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration The X4C is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the X4C should assure that it is used in such an environment.

X4C Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)

The X4C Digital Radiography Unit is intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms)

Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

Radiated Emissions

EN 55011/CISPR 11

Class A The X4C uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.

Harmonic Emissions

EN 61000-3-2

Class A The X4C is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-voltage.Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker

Emissions

EN 61000-3-3

Class A

Conducted Emissions

EN 55011/CISPR 11

Class A


The X4C Digital Radiography Unit is intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms)

Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level

ComplianceLevel Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

Electrostatic Discharge

EN 61000-4-2

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air

Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile.If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.


1 - 30 • Introduction • Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Manufacturer’s Declaration

Electrical Fast Transient/Burst

EN 61000-4-4

Level 3

±2 Declaration for power supply

±1 kV for I/O lines

Level 3

±2 kV for power supply


Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.

Surge

EN 61000-4-5

Level 2

±1 kV line-to-line

±2 kV line-to-ground

Level 2

±1 kV line-to-line



Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines.

EN 61000-4-11

Class 1 N/A

NOTE: Unit complies when used with an uninterruptible power supply.

Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the X4C requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the X4C be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or battery.

Power Frequency (50/60 Hz) Magnetic Field

EN 61000-4-8

3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.




Conducted RF

EN 61000-4-6

Radiated RF

EN 61000-4-3/EN 50204

Level 2

3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz

Level 2

3 V/ms 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Level 2


Level 2

3 V/ms 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the X4C, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter. Recommended separation distance:

d = 1.17

d = 0.35 80 MHz to 800 MHz

d = 0.7 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer, and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, ¹should be within range. ²Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1: 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.

NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affectedby absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

3Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X4C should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the X4C. 4Over a frequency range of 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.


p

p

p



X3C and X3G Guidance and Manufacturer’s DeclarationThe X3C and X3G are intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the user of the X3C or X3G should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Recommended Separation Distances Between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment and the X4C

The X4C is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the X4C can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the X4C as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.

Rated Maximum Output Power of Transmitter

[W]

Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter[m]

150 kHz to 80 MHz

d = 1.17

80 MHz to 800 MHz

d = 0.35

800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

d = 0.7 0.01 0.12 0.04 0.070.1 0.37 0.11 0.221 1.17 0.35 0.710 3.69 1.11 2.21100 11.67 3.5 7

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.

NOTE 3: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.


X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)The X3C are X3G Digital Radiography Unit are intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms).

Emission Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

Radiated Emissions

EN 55011/CISPR 11

Class A The X3C and X3G use RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment.

p p p



Harmonic Emissions

EN 61000-3-2

Class A The X3C and X3G are suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-voltage.

Voltage Fluctuations/Flicker Emissions

EN 61000-3-3

Class A

Conducted Emissions

EN 55011/CISPR 11

Class A

X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)The X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit are intended for use in radiographic rooms (x-ray rooms).

Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Level

ComplianceLevel

Electromagnetic Environment – Guidance

Electrostatic Discharge

EN 61000-4-2

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air

±6 kV contact

±8 kV air

Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile.If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.

Electrical Fast Transient/Burst

EN 61000-4-4

Level 3



Level 3




Surge

EN 61000-4-5

Level 2

±1 kV line-to-line


Level 2

±1 kV line-to-line



Voltage dips, short interruptions and voltage variations on power supply input lines.

EN 61000-4-11

Class 1 N/A

NOTE: Unit complies when used with an uninterruptible power supply.

Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the X3C or X3G require continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the X3C or X3G be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or battery.

Power Frequency (50/60 Hz) Magnetic Field

EN 61000-4-8

3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.

X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)



Conducted RF

EN 61000-4-6

and

Radiated RF

EN 61000-4-3/EN 50204

Level 2


and

Level 2

3 V/m 80 kHz to 2.5 GHz

Level 2


and

Level 2

3 V/m 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz

Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the X3C or X3G, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter. Recommended separation distance:

d = 1.17

d = 0.35 80 MHz to 800 MHz

d = 0.7 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer, and d is the recommended separation distance in metres (m).

Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, ¹should be within range. ²Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:

NOTE 1: 80 MHz and 800MHz, the higher frequency range applies.


3Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the X3C or X3G is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the X3C or X3G should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the X3C or X3G. 4Over a frequency range of 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.

X3C and X3G Digital Radiography Unit – Electromagnetic Emissions (Declaration)

p

p

p



Recommended Separation Distances Between Portable and Mobile RF Communications Equipment and the X3C and X3G

The X3C and X3G are intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the X3C and X3G can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the X3C and X3G as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.

Rated Maximum Output Power of Transmitter[W]

Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter [m]

150 kHz to 80 MHz

d = 1.17

80 MHz to 800 MHz

d = 0.35

800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

d = 0.7 0.01 0.12 0.04 0.070.1 0.37 0.11 0.221 1.17 0.35 0.710 3.69 1.11 2.21100 11.67 3.5 7

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where p is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.

NOTE 3: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency rangeapplies.

NOTE 4: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation isaffected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

p p p


PRE-INSTALLATION GUIDE

Included is the following2.1 “Safety Warnings and Notices” 2.2 “Environment Planning” 2.3 “Electrical Requirements” 2.4 “Mounting Requirements” 2.5 “1600 Site Planning Guide” 2.6 “Data Connections” 2.7 “Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements” 2.8 “Required Tools”


2 - 2 • Pre-Installation Guide •



0.1 February 28, 2007 Module created using existing information.



Pre-Installation Guide • Safety Warnings and Notices • 2 - 3

2.1 Safety Warnings and Notices

2.1.1 Electrical Safety

DANGER! According to MDD/93/42/CEE, this unit is equipped with EMC filters.Improper grounding may produce electrical shock to the user.

WARNING! Ensure the voltage switch at the back of the computer is set to the appropriatesetting prior to the connection of the equipment.

NOTE: All equipment supplied by IDC (excluding computer workstations) shall beelectrically hardwired at the customer site. The customer shall provide anelectrical disconnect that can be locked in the open position to allow theequipment to be safely locked out for servicing. Failure to provide a lockabledisconnect will prevent the equipment from being serviced and maintained in asafe fashion.

NOTE: Neutral is required for proper functioning of the unit.

2.1.2 Equipment Safety

WARNING! Before anchoring the unit, check that the wall and the anchoring system arestrong enough (750 lbs of pull force) to ensure a safe installation. Some non-brick walls may require additional anchorage installation.

NOTE: The Detector Head must sit for 24 hours in the room if there is a ±5.5°C (±10°F)difference in temperature from transporting or storaging. This must be done priorto turning on the unit. The Detector Head is shipped in its own crate and shouldremain crated until time of installation.

NOTE: The Detector Head is shipped separately in it’s own crate. To prevent accidentaldamage, the Detector Head should remain crated until the time of installation.

NOTE: To fully operate the 1600 unit, the room must have a ceiling height of at least274.32 cm (9 ft).


2 - 4 • Pre-Installation Guide • Environment Planning

2.2 Environment PlanningBefore installing the 1600 system, the site must meet specific environmental conditions as outlined below.

2.2.1 Site Inspection

Before installation• Verify the loading dock has proper equipment and storage space to receive the equipment.• Review any paperwork requirements for shipping and receiving.• Verify the presence of crate disposal facilities.• Verify all doorways, hallways, and elevators between the receiving dock and the x-ray

room can physically accommodate all the equipment and crates.• Verify the room meets the minimum size requirements.• Verify that the selected room has a floor of sufficient structural strength to support the

unit. Check local building codes for seismic or other conditions that may apply.

2.2.2 Temperature and Humidity

The 1600 is based upon CCD technology and must be operated in a stable temperature environment. The environment must be maintained within the limits specified in this section so the equipment does not exhibit image quality control problems or equipment failure.

2.2.2.1 Operating ConditionsThe 16001600 requires no additional air conditioning when installed in a modern commercial structure.The temperature range for the control system is 15–30°C (60–86°F).The operating humidity range is 0 to 70% non-condensing relative humidity.The 1600 emits approximately 850 BTU per hour (250 W) under maximum operating conditions.

NOTE: Neutral is required for proper functioning of the unit.

2.2.2.2 Storage and Shipping ConditionsThe proper storage and transportation temperature range for the equipment is limited to between -40°C and +50°C (-40°F and 122°F). The non-condensing relative humidity for the equipment must remain between 0 and 70% during storage and transportation.

The maximum continues heat dissipation 216 W (without air circulator)

The maximum continues heat dissipation 432 W (with air circulator)

Loading factors for leakage radiation 150 kV, 4.0 mA


Pre-Installation Guide • Environment Planning • 2 - 5

NOTE: The Detector Head is shipped separately in it’s own crate. To prevent accidentaldamage, the Detector Head should remain crated until the time of installation.


2.2.3 Safe Disposal

The 1600 does not contain any materials considered to be dangerous goods under U.S. Federal Transportation Regulations. The X3C and X4C, does however, contain a sealed Cesium Iodide Scintillator. Comply with local regulations to dispose of the system.


2 - 6 • Pre-Installation Guide • Electrical Requirements

2.3 Electrical RequirementsThe following electrical requirements are required before installation can be completed.

2.3.1 Stand

The 1600 tower requires the following dedicated power supplies:Line Voltage 240 VAC 2.5 kVaLine Frequency 50/60 Hz.Momentary (surge) current 4 A (240 VAC only)Standby current 3 A (240 VAC only)Signal and power cables exit the back of the tower through two conduits located at the base of the unit. One conduit that houses the incoming AC power cable is a 1” cable connector. The second connector allows for all signal cables for digital input and output.

FusesFuses are integrated with power supply modules.Camera Power Supply: F1 = 4 A/125 VACF3 = 4 A/125 VACF4/F6 = 2.5 A/250 VACTEC Power Supply: F1 = 1.5 A /50 VACThe main power cable for the 1600 must be permanently connected (hard wired) to the power source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.

2.3.2 Generator Power

Systems ordered with the 80 kW generator require a dedicated AC power supply. These units are ordered with a 480 VAC configuration.

Line Voltage 480 VAC +/- 10% Three phase

Line Frequency 50/60 Hz.

Momentary current 150 A

Standby current 3 A

2.3.3 Workstation

The image acquisition workstation can be powered from either a 100 - 120 V approx 11.4 A at 50 - 60 Hz or 200-240 V approx 6.1 A at 50 - 60 Hz. The UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) and power protection for the workstation are provided with the system only if the acquisition computer is purchased from Imaging Dynamics.


Pre-Installation Guide • Mounting Requirements • 2 - 7

2.4 Mounting RequirementsThe 1600 is anchored to the floor with drilled-in floor anchors and anchored to the wall with supportive backing (minimum of 1.5 inch of wood backing). This equipment is supplied with bolt holes for anchoring it to the floor and/or wall. Each installation shall be evaluated by a qualified engineer to ensure the type of anchoring system used complies with local codes and regulations. Imaging Dynamics Company, Ltd. (IDC) does not assume any responsibility for the anchoring system used to affix the equipment to the floor and/or wall regardless of its geographical location, floor/wall structure or anchoring technique used. However, IDC will supply critical information with this equipment such as the location of the centre of gravity and other critical dimensions required to perform the engineering analysis.The tower requires a level location that is free of dirt and contamination.The tower requires a minimum of 6 inches of rear clearance for service access.


2 - 8 • Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide

2.5 1600 Site Planning Guide

2.5.1 1600 Weights and Dimensions

2.5.2 Facility Requirements

All requirements in the Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements checklist must be complete. See Section 2.7, “Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements” Exceptions must be approved by IDC Service Management.

2.5.2.1 1600 Power Requirements

NOTE: All equipment supplied by IDC (excluding computer workstations) shall beelectrically hardwired at the customer site. The customer shall provide an electricaldisconnect that can be locked in the open position to allow the equipment to be safelylocked out for servicing. Failure to provide a lockable disconnect will prevent theequipment from being serviced and maintained in a safe fashion.

Table 2-1

Crate or Carton #

DimensionsL x W x H cm

(in)Contents

Container Weight kg

(lbs)

ContentWeight kg

(lbs)

1 236 x 87 x 109(93 x 35 x 43)

Sedecal x Plus LP System (includes the stand, mounting bracket, stand covers, collimator, high tension cables, display assembly)

481 kg(1060 lbs)

443 kg(976 lbs)

2 95 x 64 x 69(38 x 25 x 27)

Control Box 80 kg(176 lbs)

73 kg(161 lbs)

3

124 x 66 x 99(49 x 26 x 39)

or119 x 76 x 74(47 x 30 x 29)

Detector Head (weight and dimensions vary depending on crate construction)

101 kg(222 lbs)

or88 kg

(194 lbs)

75 kg(165 lbs)

4 122 x 82 x73(48 x 32 x 29)

Generator, HT Cables, Pedestal 136 kg(299 lbs)

113 kg(248 lbs)

5 119 x 60 x 79(47 x 24 x 31)

Skins, Grids, and Control Pad Bracket 53 kg(117 lbs)

44 kg(97 lbs)

6 121 x 60 x 76(48 x 24 x 30)

Computer, UPS, Grid Holder Kits, X-ray Tube, Accessories

87 kg(192 lbs)

78 kg(172 lbs)

7 (optional) 243 x 88 x 15(96 x 35 x 6)

Carbon Fibre Transparent Table (Sedecal) 43 kg(95 lbs)

34 kg(75 lbs)


Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide • 2 - 9


2.5.2.2 Site Preparation Requirements The unit must be installed in a dust-free environment. All site renovations and preparations, such as interior decorating, heating and plumbing must be completed before installation.

Table 2-2

Stand Power Box 240 VAC 50/60 Hz, 15 A

Detector Head Power Distribution Module

Jerome Power Supply:

• Input: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A • Output: 16 VDC, 5.0 A

Generator 480 VAC 3 phase 110 A (for standard 64 kW generators)

Technologist Workstation • 100/120 VAC 11.4 A at 50/60 Hz • 200/240 VAC 6.1 A at 50/60 Hz

Highspeed access via VPN or equivalent to facilitate remote technical support

VPN is required before installation begins.

100 Base-T Ethernet Service with Internet and Incoming and Outgoing Ftp Service


2 - 10 • Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide

2.5.3 Room Dimension Requirements

Figure 2-1

NOTE: To fully operate the 1600 unit, the room must have a ceiling height of at least 274.32cm (9 ft).

WARNING! Before anchoring the unit, check that the wall and the anchoring system arestrong enough (750 lbs of pull force) to ensure a safe installation. Some non-brick walls may require additional anchorage installation.

1 Generator and Control Box

2 Patient Room

3 Exam Room

4 Control Room

1

2

3

4

198 cm (78 in) 217 cm (85 in)420 cm (165 in)

130

cm (5

1 in

)28

6 cm

(113

in)


Pre-Installation Guide • 1600 Site Planning Guide • 2 - 11

Figure 2-2

45º 25º30º

30º

90º

40 cm (15.7 in)

224

cm (8

8 in

)12

9 cm

(50.

8 in

)

31 cm (+/- 2.5 cm)12 in (+/- 1 in)

70 c

m (2

7.5

in)

264.

5 cm

(104

in)

155

cm (6

1 in

)

125

cm (4

9 in

)

SID = 100 cm (39 in)SID = 180 cm (71 in)

245 cm (96.5 in)

Reference Axis

Reception Area


2 - 12 • Pre-Installation Guide • Data Connections

2.6 Data ConnectionsThe 1600 system is based upon a Windows XP operating system and uses DICOM 3.0 transport protocols for connection to external printing, storage, and viewing devices..The image acquisition station can be serviced through optional remote diagnostics capabilities. This feature requires a data link (Ethernet connection) for accessing the computer.Communication with the hospital network is accomplished through a 10/100/1000 mbit/s Ethernet network interface card (NIC) connected with a CAT 5 patch cable using a RJ-45 connector.The image acquisition computer is a standard mid-tower chassis configuration, approximately 43 cm high x 18 cm wide x 44 cm deep (17 in x 7 in x 17 in).

2.6.1 Computer

WARNING! Ensure the voltage switch at the back of the computer is set to the appropriatesetting prior to the connection of the equipment.

The 1600 is shipped with a computer that meets the following specifications:• Intel Pentium 4• 3.2 GHz processor• 2GB RAM minimum• 2 x 120 GB mirrored hard drives• AGP video card (DVI or VGA capable)• 21” colour flat panel screen with 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution.• 10/100/1000 mbit/s NIC (network interface card)• Windows XP operating system

It is recommended that a Dell Computer that has been certified to an IEC 60950 standard be connected for operation of the IDC equipment. Equivalent computers are acceptable provided they have been tested against the appropriate country specific IEC 60950 equivalent. It is recommended that a Liebert Powersure PSA be connected for operation of the computer system. An equivalent UPS is acceptable provided it has been tested against the appropriate country specific standards; e.g., UL 1778, CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 107.1, EN 50091-1-1.


Pre-Installation Guide • Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements • 2 - 13

2.7 Mandatory Site Preparation Requirements(Prior to installation commencement)

Interior Requirements _____ Walls painted or covered.

_____ Floors tiled or carpeted.

_____ Baseboards installed.

_____ Grid tiles on ceiling.

Electrical, Heating, and Plumbing Requirements _____ Lighting fixtures installed and operational.

_____ All electrical convenience, conduit, raceway, and junction boxes installed.

_____ Incoming mains power operational and available at the room disconnect.

_____ 115 VAC convenience outlets operational.

_____ All contractor supplied cables pulled and terminated.

_____ All plumbing installed and finished.

_____ All HVAC (heating, ventilating, and air conditioning) installed and operational as per specifications.

Structural and Architectural Requirements_____ All channels, pipes, beams, and/or other supporting devices should be level, parallel, and free of lateral or longitudinal movements.

_____ Computer floor, wood floor, casework, and bulkheads are installed and finished.

Environmental Requirements_____ A dust-free environment in and around the procedure room.

_____ Site is free of asbestos, dry wall dust, and other toxic substances.

_____ Radiation protection has been certified.

Communication Requirements_____ Network drop for IDC workstation.

_____ VPN access.

_____ Network operational with connection to PACS (send destinations) and printers as required.


2 - 14 • Pre-Installation Guide • Required Tools

2.8 Required Tools

Supplies: • Tie wraps • X-ray tube grease (Wacker P4, Dow Corning #4, or equivalent)• Masking tape• Alcohol cleaning agent

Equipment required for an IDC installation: • Standard hand tool kit (assorted screwdrivers, pliers, wrenches, wire cutters, measuring

tape, etc)• Steel ruler (18 inch or longer) • Metric and imperial allen keys• Four foot digital level (spirit level or inclinometer)• 1/2” Hammer drill• Digital Multimeter• Unfors Dose Meter

•Model: Mult-o-meter, Type 577L or equivalent• Cordless drill with assorted bits• Compressed air (non-residue)• Line pair target

•Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical: Part No. 07-538-1000• Copper/aluminum filters

•The purity required is: Copper 99.9% Aluminum 90.0%•Goodfellow:

•1 mm Copper: Part No. CU000747/35•0.5 mm Copper: Part No. CU000743/33•1 mm Aluminum: Part No. AL000700/11•0.5 mm Aluminum: Part No. AL000645/7

• Plastic Container with 23 cm water (collapsible water jug)• Low contrast phantom

•Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical: Part No. 07-649-1169• Genware software and a 9-pin female-female null modem cable (CPI generator only)• Flathead precision screwdriver• Appropriate wall and floor anchors (dependent on local code)• Certificate of Calibration for all test equipment brought on site• FDA-2579 form (USA only)


Pre-Installation Guide • Required Tools • 2 - 15

• Anti-static strap, Bystat BWS 3000 or equivalent

2.8.1 Ordering information:

1. Nuclear Associates/Fluke Biomedical

100 Voice Road Carle Place, NY 11514-0349 USA Tel: 1-888-466-8257 Website: http://www.flukebiomedical.com2. Goodfellow

237 Lancaster Ave. Suite 252 Devon Pennsylvania 19333-1594 Tel: 1-610-688-6131 Website: http://www.goodfellow.com/csp/active/gfHome.csp3. Unfors Instruments (US office)

123 Litchfield Road New Milford, CT 06776 Tel: 1-866-4UNFORS Website: http://www.unfors.com


1600 INSTALLATION

The following information is included:3.1 “Safety Warnings and Notices” 3.2 “Quick Installation Overview” 3.3 “1600 Installation Checklist” 3.4 “Unpacking” 3.5 “Pre-installation Check” 3.6 “Stand Installation” 3.7 “Stand Control Box Installation” 3.8 “Generator Installation” 3.9 “Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet” 3.10 “X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation” 3.11 “To Cable the Stand” 3.12 “Detector Head Installation” 3.13 “Power Distribution Module (PDM)” 3.14 “Cabling the Detector Head and PDM” 3.15 “Computer Installation” 3.16 “Powering up the 1600 System” 3.17 “Trigger Board Adjustments” 3.18 “Checking Movements and Installing the Covers” 3.19 “Leveling Checks”


3 - 2 • 1600 Installation •






1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices • 3 - 3


3.1.1 Service Personnel Safety

DANGER! Undertable and chest positioning are provided with automatic movement ofthe C-arm. Ensure there are no obstructions within range of the C-arm.

WARNING! Service must only be carried out by qualified, trained service personnel.Physical injury or damage to the equipment can result from untrainedpersonnel attempting maintenance without supervision.

WARNING! The installer is responsible for system installation and set up which willallow the operator to optimally use the system.

WARNING! Ensure the x-ray tube is placed into the appropriate working position with thereference axis (x-ray beam) directed towards the reception area.

WARNING! Ensure there are no objects on the C-arm and Detector Head surface beforepowering on the unit.

WARNING! Operators and/or patients may not be in the room if equipment covers areremoved for routine maintenance.

WARNING! Routine maintenance may not be performed on medical or non-medicalequipment by service personnel if the operator and/or patient is within theroom.

WARNING! At least four people are required to remove all heavy components from theshipping pallet.

CAUTION! Do not allow service personnel to pull themselves up from a sitting or lyingposition with the patient handles or any part of the unit.

NOTE: All mains supply cables are allowed to be changed only by service personneltrained by the supplier.

NOTE: The x-ray equipment, when installed shall permit the use of the focal spot to skindistances to be 45 cm or more in normal use.

3.1.2 Equipment Safety

WARNING! Although there are times when the camera stack will need to be removed, donot attempt to remove the camera, lens, or scintillator from the DetectorHead. Attempting to tamper with the camera, lens or scintillator will void thewarranty.


3 - 4 • 1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices

WARNING! Do not connect any Ion Chamber to the generator cabinet until you verify andadjust the high voltage to the values required. Other voltage could damage theIon Chambers.

WARNING! The computer system must be located at least 1.5 meters away from the digital x-ray detector.

WARNING! Do not supply the main power or turn on the Column/Stand Control Cabinet untilspecifically instructed in this document.

WARNING! Verify that inverter configurations are in accordance to the installationrequirements. If not, refer to the inverter documentation to modify theparameters.

CAUTION! The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate and easilydamaged. Handle them carefully. Ensure the pins are straight and the splits in thepins are open (parallel to sides).

CAUTION! Front LED Display can be damaged if not handled carefully.

NOTE: Power supply connections must be in compliance with Local Codes.

NOTE: Leave a working area around the equipment until installation is complete.

NOTE: Cables must be installed covered and should not be placed on the floor.

NOTE: Usually the Generator Cabinet is installed on the Control Box. If this is not the case,refer to the Generator Service Manual.

NOTE: Use caution when handling the Fibre Optic Cable.

NOTE: The Detector Head must sit for 24 hours in the room if there is a ±5.5°C (±10°F)difference in temperature from transporting or storaging. This must be done prior toturning on the unit. The Detector Head is shipped in its own crate and should remaincrated until time of installation.

NOTE: Ensure there are no cables in the imaging area.

NOTE: The Automatic Chest and Automatic Table buttons will require pressing and holding.

NOTE: Special care must be taken when handling and transporting of the Detector Head.Critical alignments and focusing may be disturbed if the unit is handled improperly.The detector head is very heavy; if positioning the Detector Head by hand, twoinstallers should support the head, while a third installer performs the connection.





WARNING! Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) are not to be used.

WARNING! Ensure any additional Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) orextension cords are not connected to the system.

WARNING! Connect items as specified in the following installation procedures. Do notconnect any extraneous items, except for testing equipment to the system.

WARNING! The main power cable must be permanently connected (hard-wired) to thepower source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.

WARNING! The Canadian Electrical Code require all external flexible cords to use hardusage cabling.

WARNING! Remaining energy may exist when the equipment is switched off. Alwayswait at least 15 seconds before working on the system.

WARNING! Ensure voltage switch is set to the appropriate setting prior to connection ofthe equipment.

WARNING! In generators equipped with LV-DRAC, the LV_DRAC output can be as highas 1000 Vrms. For safety reasons (to avoid electrical shocks), the StatorCable must be shielded and both ends of the shield must be connected to theground.

WARNING! Due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) problems, the IGBT’s heat sink isnot grounded. It is connected to the negative terminal of the input rectifier.To avoid electrical shock, be sure that the input line is disconnected and thecapacitor bank is properly discharged before manipulating in the LV-DRAC.

CAUTION! After complete installation or service, measure protective earth.

CAUTION! Incoming line voltage is present on Terminal Strip TS4.

CAUTION! Ensure that the Stator Wires are properly connected. Before making anyexposure, check that the anode rotates correctly.

NOTE: Use system parts as specified in installation instructions and parts list.

NOTE: The computer must have the supplied ground strap connected to a reliable earthpoint.


3 - 6 • 1600 Installation • Safety Warnings and Notices

3.1.4 Electrostatic Safety

CAUTION! Printed circuit boards contain highly sensitive electrostatic components requiringspecial care in handling. Be sure to ground before making contact and place theprinted circuit boards only on a conductive surface.

CAUTION! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occurwhen handling any of its exposed electronic components if proper electro-staticdischarge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that wrist straps are wornand that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in the wall. Becautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does not becomedisconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent but will havea serious affect on the images from the unit and may completely preventoperation.

3.1.5 Radiation Safety

WARNING! When using x-ray accessories or other items that do not form part of the system,possible adverse effects may arise. See Table 3-1 for the maximum attenuationequivalent of possible materials located in the x-ray beam.

WARNING! The system is sold with the understanding that IDC, its agents, andrepresentatives are not liable for injury or damage that may result from theoverexposure of individuals to x-radiation.

IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not been servicedand maintained in accordance with the instructions provided, including anyinstructions that have been altered or modified.

CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with the function ofthe system, and can, therefore, be safety hazards.

Table 3-1

Item Maximum Attenuation Equivalent mm Al

FRONT PANEL (POLYCARBONATE PAINTED) 1.2

PATIENT SUPPORT, MOVABLE, WITHOUT ARTICULATED JOINTS (CARBON FIBER TABLETOP OF PATIENT SUPPORT WITH WHEELS)

1.7

PATIENT SUPPORT, MOVABLE, WITHOUT ARTICULATED JOINTS 1.7



3.1.6 Scintillator Safety for X3C and X4C

WARNING! The scintillator used in the X3C and X4C 1600 uses thallium doped cesiumiodide with a protective coating layer. It is not hazardous in its normal form.When handling the material, use lint free gloves and treat it as you would adelicate glass lens. Do not touch nor attempt to clean the yellow surface. Ifthe detector head is dropped, check to see if the scintillator is broken. If thescintillator is broken or burned, hazardous dust or vapour may be formed.Use a protective mask and gloves before handling material and limitexposure to the minimum necessary to allow for bagging. Seal broken partsin a sturdy, non-porous bag, label contents as containing thallium dopedcesium iodide, and contact Imaging Dynamics or local authorities fordirection regarding safe disposal.


3 - 8 • 1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview

3.2 Quick Installation Overview


IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not been servicedand maintained in accordance with the instructions provided, including anyinstructions that have been altered or modified.

WARNING! Service must only be carried out by qualified, trained service personnel. Physicalinjury or damage to the equipment can result from untrained personnelattempting maintenance without supervision.

CAUTION! Mobile telephones or other radiating equipment can interfere with the function ofthe system, and can, therefore, be safety hazards.

1. Install Tube-collimator Support and Control Panel (column laid on the pallet).

2. Install Column Upper Support in top rear of the column. Mark and drill the anchoring holes, install the Wall Support, and anchor the column to the wall and floor.

3. Install the Control Box and the Generator on it (if applicable).

4. Perform cable connections from the Column harness to the Control box as per schematics 54302080.

5. Install the X-ray tube and the Collimator. Then remove the Safety Locking Rod.

Wall Support

Column Upper Support


1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview • 3 - 9

6

7

8

3.2.1 Cable Routing


WARNING! The main power cable must be permanently connected (hard-wired) to thepower source. The unit may not be connected by means of a plug/receptacle.

WARNING! The Canadian Electrical Code require all external flexible cords to use hardusage cabling.

NOTE: All mains supply cables are allowed to be changed only by service personneltrained by the supplier.

NOTE: Ensure that all signal output and input parts are only used for connection withtheir specified equipment.

NOTE: Cables must be installed covered and should not be placed on the floor.

. Turn on the column and position the C-arm in horizontal position to ease the Detector Head installation. Route the Detector Head cables through the Arm and Column.

. Install the Detector Head on the C-arm.

. Perform the cable routing and connections as per schematics 54302080 and IM--353.

Table 3-2

Cable Number From To Function

A8127-XX

(Interface Cable)

Column Harness J1 - URS PLUS Interface BD A8124-07 (Control Box)

Interface Cable

A8136--XX)

(Supply Cable)


Supply Cable

A8143-01

Emergency Cable


Detec. Mot cable


3 - 10 • 1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview

Figure 3-1

A3153--02

Power Supply Cable

Power Line TS1-L1-L2/N, GND

(Control Box)

Power Supply Cable

A338-XX

Collimator Cable

Collimator TS1-2, TS1-1 and GND

URS PLUS Interface BD A8124-07 (Control Box)

Collimator Lamp power

A8183--XX

Tube Fans Cable

Column Harness TS3 (TS3-1, TS3-2)

(Control Box)

Fans power supply.

(optional)

Table 3-3


A8131-XX)

Rot Motor Cable

Column Harness J1 (Connector Panel at Control Box)

Rot Motor Cable

(A8129-XX)

Sid Motor Cable


Sid Motor Cable

Table 3-2


TS 3 TS1J1 J3 TS1 J4


1600 Installation • Quick Installation Overview • 3 - 11

Figure 3-2

A8160-XX)

Brake-H Motor Cable


Brake-Height Motor Cable

A8143-01

Emergency Cable


Detec. Mot cable

A8155-01

Detec. Rot cable


Detec. Mot cable

(only Motorized Detector)

A8149-01

Detec. Mot cable


Detec. Mot cable (only Motorized Detector)

A8121-02

Overlay Cable

Back of Receptor J2 to J2 Receptor Back

Overlay Cable

Other

Emergency Stop wires located at the Back of the Receptor are bridged (3/6 and 4/5 to allow motion during installation), remove bridge and connect wires in Terminal Strip TS4 (at the Back of the Receptor).

GND cable from Control Box to GND stud of the Column.

HV Cables to be connected to HV Tank.

If Applicable AEC and/or Bucky Cables connected to Generator.

Special Receptor Signals: For Receptor Signals to be connected to Image System or to Control Box refer to Schematics Section.

Table 3-3



3 - 12 • 1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist

3.3 1600 Installation Checklist

WARNING! The installer is responsible for system installation and set up which will allow theoperator to optimally use the system.

CAUTION! Do not allow service personnel to pull themselves up from a sitting or lyingposition with the patient handles or any part of the unit.

NOTE: Use system parts as specified in installation instructions and parts list.

1. Unpacking

_____Column _____Control Box _____Mobile Table _____Compact Generator _____Unpacking Computer _____Skins 2. Stand Installation

_____Install the Support of the Tube-Collimator Assembly _____Drill the Column anchoring holes _____Connect both connectors marked J2 _____Place the Wall Support 3. Stand Control Box Installation

_____Complete4. Generator Cabinet Installation

_____Mount High Tension Transformer _____Mount cabinet _____P2-Shield (2 thin wires) _____P1 and P3 _____Ground wire _____Connector J15. Generator Installation

_____Connect Mains Power _____Console Console data _____Connect console power _____Connect AEC cable


1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist • 3 - 13

_____Route and connect door interface _____Route and connect rotor wire _____Connect High Tension6. Wiring the Stand to Stand Control Cabinet. Refer to schematics 54302080 and IM-358

_____Verify Inverter Configuration _____Connect the ground cables _____Terminal Strip TS1 Power cables 7. X-ray Tube and Collimator Installation

_____Mount Xray tube _____Mount ring _____Loosen collimator mounting screws _____Center collimator _____Tighten collimator mounting screws 8. Cabling of the Stand

_____Remove collimator and tube covers _____Connect the Stator / Thermostat wires _____Connect collimator power _____Reinstall the X-Ray Tube and Collimator covers _____Install the Front Housing _____Connect the HV Cables of the X-ray Tube _____Fasten the Stator and HV cables to the Upper Carriage of the C-arm 9. Detector Head Installation

_____Power up Stand _____Remove shipping bolt _____Position Arm _____Attach Head _____If installing an X3C Detector Head, reverse the camera stack and Detector Head support frame.10. Installing the PDM (Power Distribution Module)

_____Vertically mount the PDM on the mounting plate, ensuring the fan is on the top of the unit._____Connect TEC cable _____Connect computer serial cable_____Connect Grid Detect cable


3 - 14 • 1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist

_____Connect computer cable to PC RS232 _____Connect power cable to PDM power supply11. Route the Detector Cables

_____Identify the cable ends _____Tie the cables _____Check both cable ends pass through the cable access _____Route through the cable access of the Detector Assembly _____Remove the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) _____Attach all the Detector Cables to the cable guide. _____Route the Detector Cables through lower side of the C-arm _____Route the Detector Cables towards the Control Box _____Check cable hose length to enable movements _____Reinstall the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) 12. Wire Detector Head

_____Remove the covers of the Detector Assembly. _____Handle Panel cables _____Emergency Stop wires _____Connect the camera Cables _____Connect Fiber Optic cable _____Camera Power _____TEC Power _____TEC Sensor _____Grid cable _____AEC cable 13. Install Computer

_____Connect Computer components _____Connect Fiber Optic Cable _____Connect Cat 5 (TEC/Grid) Cable 14. Power Up 1600 Head and Stand

_____Turn on computer _____Turn on Stand Power _____Turn on Head Power _____Check Link Lights _____Check that all controls and movements


1600 Installation • 1600 Installation Checklist • 3 - 15

15. Trigger Board Adjustments

_____Complete 16. Install the Detector Covers

_____Complete17. Install the Base and Top Covers of the Column

_____Complete 18. Apply power to generator

_____Complete


3 - 16 • 1600 Installation • Unpacking

3.4 UnpackingThe system is shipped in several crates to facilitate transportion and installation. Inspect all shipping containers for signs of damage. If damage is found, notify the carrier or his agent immediately.

3.4.1 Unpacking the Column and Control Box

Place the shipping pallet near its final site in the room and remove the laterals. See Figure 3-3. Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes, and bags until all parts are accounted for, as listed on the packing list. See Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-3

WARNING! At least four people are required to remove all heavy components from theshipping pallet.

Figure 3-4


1600 Installation • Unpacking • 3 - 17

3.4.2 Equipment Verification

• When the equipment is unpacked, verify that all items on the customer order are present, and ensure the hardware and internal wiring is firmly connected.

• Check the part number / serial number of each component with its identification label. • Inspect all pieces for visible damages. If any damaged parts are found, repair or order

replacement parts to prevent unnecessary delays in installation.

3.4.3 Unpacking the Compact Generator

1. Open the Generator shipping box and remove the Interconnection Cables, Cabinet Cover and other furnished parts. Do not discard any packing material such as envelopes, boxes, and bags until all parts are accounted for, as listed on the packing list.

WARNING! At least two people are required to remove all heavy components from theshipping pallet.

2. Remove the Generator Cabinet from the shipping pallet and place it near its site in the room.

3. Verify all items are present and undamaged.


3 - 18 • 1600 Installation • Pre-installation Check

3.5 Pre-installation Check

WARNING! Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) are not to be used.

WARNING! Ensure any additional Multiple Portable Socket-Outlets (MPSO) or extensioncords are not connected to the system.

WARNING! Connect items as specified in the following installation procedures. Do notconnect any extraneous items, except for testing equipment to the system.

Before beginning installation, inspect the site and verify the x-ray room complies with Pre-installation requirements, such as

• Incoming Line.• Main Switch and Safety Devices.• Conduits.• Space Requirements

See “1600 Site Planning Guide” on page 2 - 8.


1600 Installation • Stand Installation • 3 - 19

3.6 Stand Installation

NOTE: Leave a working area around the equipment until installation is complete.

NOTE: Perform the installation in the order described below.

WARNING! Do not remove the Safety Locking Rod from the central carriage untilspecifically instructed in this document. See Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5

WARNING! Do not supply the main power or turn on the column / control box untilspecifically instructed in this document.

1. With the Column laid on the Pallet, install the Support of the Tube-Collimator Assembly / Control Panel to the Upper Carriage of the C-arm using the four Safety Screws installed in the carriage. All the Control Panel wires, except the SID Cable (A8128-02), are factory connected. Connect both connectors marked J2. See Figure 3-6.


Figure 3-6

Safety Locking Rod (Central Carriage)

Support of

SID Cable (A8128-02)

Upper Carriage of the C-arm

Safety Screws

Tube-Collimator

(Connector J2-J2)

Assembly


3 - 20 • 1600 Installation • Stand Installation

2. Carefully mark and drill the Column anchoring holes on the floor and wall. See Figure . The Shipping Bracket may be used for marking floor anchorages.

A 6 Wall Anchoring Holes for Screws (Diameter 0.8 cm [0.31 in])

B 4 Wall Anchoring Holes for Screws (Diameter 0.8 cm [0.31 in])

10.5 cm (4.13 in)

17 cm (6.69 in)

217.5 cm (85.63 in)

30 cm (11.85 in)

20 cm (8.03 in) 22 cm (8.66 in)30 cm (11.73 in)

A

B


1600 Installation • Stand Installation • 3 - 21

Figure 3-7


3 - 22 • 1600 Installation • Stand Installation

3. Install the Wall Support on the wall with the screws, washers, and nuts provided. See Figure 3-8.

4. With the Column laid flat, install the Column Upper Support in the top of the Column with the screws, washers, and nuts provided.

Figure 3-8

5. Stand the Column vertically and position it at its final site in the room. It is important to place the Wall Support above the Column Upper Support. Using a post level, ensure the stand is level horizontally and vertically.

WARNING! At least four people are required to perform this action.

6. Anchor the Column Upper Support to the Wall Support with the bolts, washers, and nuts supplied.

7. Perform the leveling adjustments on the Column Base and on the Column Upper Support. Ensure that the Column is correctly leveled and firmly tighten the Column. Once the Column is leveled, firmly tighten the Column Upper Support to the wall support.

8. Anchor the Column Base to the floor. Ensure that the Column is firmly anchored.

Wall Support

Stand Upper Support


1600 Installation • Stand Control Box Installation • 3 - 23

3.7 Stand Control Box Installation

Figure 3-9

69 c

m (2

7 in

)60

cm

(24

in)

59 cm (23 in) 49 cm (19 in)

46 cm (18 in)

6.5 cm (2.5 in)

5.2 cm (2 in)3.7 cm (1.4 in)

2.1 cm (0.8 in)2.8 cm (1.1 in)5 cm (2 in)

Compact Generator

Radius2.1 cm (0.8 in)

0.95 cm (0.37 in)

Stand Control Cabinet

Lateral Cable AccessFloor Cable Access (Raceway)

Back CoverUpper Cable Access(HV cables, stator cables)

Anchoring holes


3 - 24 • 1600 Installation • Stand Control Box Installation

3.7.1 To Install the Control Box

1. Place the Control Box in its final position in the room, considering

• the length of the Column Harness (approximately 1.5 m) running from the Column to the Control Box

• the length of the High Voltage Cables (X-Ray Tube -- HV Transformer in the Generator Cabinet)

• the C-arm movements 2. Level the Control Box using the adjustable leveling legs. Keep the base at the maximum

distance from the floor.

Seismic areas and other conditions require the Control Box to be firmly secured to the floor through the mounting holes at its base. In this case, place the four spacers (provided) under the base and secure them to the floor. Keep the four Leveling Legs at the same height as the spacers. See Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10

Cable Access

Spacers of use in seismic areas

Adjustable leveling legs


1600 Installation • Generator Installation • 3 - 25

3.8 Generator Installation

3.8.1 Generator Cabinet Installation

NOTE: Usually the Generator Cabinet is installed on the Control Box. If this is not thecase, refer to the Generator Service Manual.

1. Assemble the Back Cover for the Generator Cabinet to the upper side of the Control Box using two M6x20 screws (supplied). See Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11

2. Remove the four Adjustable Leveling Legs from the base of the Generator Cabinet.

NOTE: At least two people are required for this operation.

3. Hang the Generator Cabinet on the Back Cover and secure it to the Control Box using four M6x20 screws (supplied). Fix the two screws that join the rear side of the Cabinet to the Back Cover. See Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.

Back Cover

Fixing Screws



3 - 26 • 1600 Installation • Generator Installation

Im

Figure 3-12

Figure 3-13

Back Cover

Hook

Generator Cabinet

Fixing Screws


Cable Access to the Generator Cabinet (HV Cables, Stator/Thermostat, AEC)

Emergency Switch –Off Button

ON/OFF Switch

aging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0017-005 v1.0 • June 6, 2007


WARNING! The High Voltage Transformer must be secured with its anchoring plates insidethe cabinet to prevent P1, P2 and P3 from shorting to the cabinet’s frame.

4. In some cases, due to transportation safety requirements, the HV Transformer is shipped out of the Generator Cabinet. Install it inside the Cabinet (upper area) and secure it with the respective anchors or plates.

5. Connect the following cables from the Power Module to the corresponding terminals on the HV Transformer:

• P2-Shield (2 thin wires), P1 and P3. Take care to connect these cables to the stud-brass ter-minals. Use two wrenches to tighten the nuts and avoid twisting the studs.

• Ground wire to Ground stud.• Connector J1.

WARNING! Do not supply the main power until specifically instructed to do so in thismanual.

The main storage capacitors retain a large portion of their charge forapproximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.

3.8.2 Generator Cable Connections

NOTE: For more information about electrical requirements and cable connections, refer tothe 3.5 “Pre-installation Check” on page 3-18.

NOTE: See “System Interconnections” at the end of this document. Identification of someterminal connections (TB, TS), boards, etc. in this document (text and schematics)may have a prefix number which indicates the module number in the equipment (e.g.,TS2 as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2).

Some safety devices such as Safety Switch / Emergency Switch, Warning Light, and Door Interlock Switch are supplied and installed by the customer. Verify that safety devices have been properly installed and routed.



Im

3.8.3 Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet

Before connecting the cables inside the Generator Cabinet, route and secure the cables as follows:1. Route all cables over the Fastening Bar (upper rear bar) of the Cabinet Frame and

through the Cable Outlet at the rear of Cabinet Cover. See Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14

2. Route the Power Line Cables internally along the rear of the Cabinet before connecting the cables to the Ground Terminals and Input Line Fuses.

3. Route the Stator and Interconnections Cables internally through the Cabinet near the Input Transformer. See Figure 3-15 and Figure 3-16.

4. Interface the Generator with the Workstation. See Figure 3-25.

5. Connect all cables as indicated. See 3.8.11 “Virtual Console (PC)” on page 3-34.

6. Secure all cables to the Fastening Bar using cable ties. See Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-15

Cables Outlet

Stator and InterconnectionsCable Entrance

Fastening Bar

Input Transformer

Ground Terminals

Input Line FusesPower Line CablesEntrance

Cable Ties

Power Line Cables

HV Cables

Stator andInterconnections Cables



Figure 3-16

Figure 3-17

3.8.4 Power Line Connection

3.8.4.1 Compact Generators

CAUTION! The generator is permanently connected to the power line and powered on unlessthe safety switch installed in the room’s electrical cabinet is off. When thegenerator is powered, the neon (green) light located on the transformer 6T2(generator cabinet) is on.

Internal parts of the generator (line fuses, etc.) are permanently powered onthrough the power line, although the control console is off. Ensure the safety

Stator and Interconnections Cable Entrances

Input Transformer

Power LineCables Entrance

Line Input Fuses

Power Line Cord in Compact-ESM Genrator

Cable Ties

Cable Entrance

Cable Ties

Line Terminal in 1 TB-1



Im

switch is off before handling any internal part of the equipment. Do notpower on the generator until specifically instructed in this manual.

1. Verify that the power supply line is OFF in the Room Electrical Cabinet.

2. The power supply line should be sized in accordance with specifications for the Generator model defined in the Site Planning Guide. Feeder wire sizes are specified in this document relative to the power supply requirements and the wire length. Verify that the power line voltage is correct. Verify the phase connections between the Generator and the Room Electrical Cabinet are correct.

3. Cut the cable to the appropriate length and remove the insulation from both ends of the power and ground wires.

4. Make the following connections:

For Three Phase generators, connect the power wires L1, L2 and L3 to the fuse holders of F3, F4 and F5 (right side of the cabinet) and the ground wire to the Ground terminal in the cabinet (above these fuses).

For 80 kW generators, the power supply line should be 480VAC. If the generator is supplied with an external step-up autotransformer, it will include cables to connect the autotransformer to the generator cabinet. The power line should be connected to the autotransformer terminals. (Verify the phases are correct.) See Figure 3-18.

Figure 3-18

415 V400 V380 V

480 V

415 V400 V380 V

415 V400 V380 V

480 V

480 V



Step-up TransformerInput: 380 / 400 / 415 VAC. Three-phase with NeutralOutput: 480 VAC. Three-phaseMaximum Power Output: 80 kW. 10% duty cycle (approx. 5 seconds / minute)Rising Temperature: 40° C1. Verify that the Emergency Switch has been connected to the Room Electrical Cabinet so

that it cuts the power to the generator when it is switched off.

2. Depending on the nominal line voltage, verify or connect the wire “*” to the indicated Transformer 6T2-TBs. See Figure 3-19. This wire is factory connected to 400 VAC for 80 kW 3-Phase generators. See Generator Manual. Refer to Compact LV DRAC/LFRAC Generator drawing 54302010.

NOTE: For 380 VAC power line connect the generator to the 400 VAC terminals.

Figure 3-19

3.8.5 Generator Final Installation and Checks

3.8.5.1 HV Transformer

NOTE: This point does not apply to Aluminium HV Transformers (black).

The HV Transformer contains Shell Diala Oil. Check that there is no oil leakage. If there is, open the Ventilation Screw on the top of the HV Transformer. Check that the oil level is approximately 20 mm (3/4”) of the top surface of the HV Transformer.

Input Line Fuses

Input

Front Panel

HV Transformer

Transformers 6T2



Im

3.8.5.2 Cable Fastening and Covers

NOTE: Before re-installing all cabinet covers, perform the rest of the Calibrationprocedures (AEC, Fluoro, ABC) if required.

Check that all electrical connections are firm and secure and all cables are correctly routed. Remove the ferrite blocks factory clamped to the cables when it is required to carry out a correct routing, then re-install the ferrites blocks at the same place around the cables. See 3.8.3 “Cable Routing Inside Generator Cabinet” for more information.

CAUTION! In order to avoid signal interferences, it is strongly recommended to fold andfasten close to Generator Cabinet the portion of cables not routed (see Figure3-20). Never wrap in circles.

Figure 3-20

Re-install the cabinet covers and connect its internal ground wires. The Power line, High Voltage and Interconnections cables must go through the cover cable outlet.

3.8.6 X-Ray Tube Connection

3.8.6.1 High Voltage Cables

CAUTION! The Terminal Pins of the High Voltage cables are extremely delicate andeasily damaged. Handle them carefully. Ensure the pins are straight and thesplits in the pins are open (parallel to sides).

Anode and Cathode cables are furnished according to the room layout (length of the cables).1. Grease the high tension electrodes with high tension grease.

2. Connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the HV Transformer into the X-ray Tube receptacle. Ensure that all connections are made correctly, maintaining correct Anode and Cathode orientation. Tighten the cable nuts securely.

3. Put approximately 1 cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles.



4. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the X-ray Tube into the respective HV Transformer receptacles. Ensure that all connections are made correctly, maintaining correct Anode and Cathode orientation. Tighten the cable nuts securely.

3.8.6.2 Stator CableX-ray Tubes are equipped with the Stator cable installed. A LV-DRAC (Low Voltage - Digital Rotatory Anode Controller) is required for High Speed X-ray Tubes. Connections between LV-DRAC and Power Module are factory made.Route the Stator cable together with the HV cables to the Generator Cabinet. Connect the Stator cable terminals to the indicated Terminal Block TS2. See Table 3-4.

NOTE: Terminal Block TS2 can be marked with a prefix number as 4TS2, 10TS2 or 11TS2,depending on the Generator model.

CAUTION! Ensure that the stator wires are properly connected. Before making any exposure,check that the anode rotates correctly.

WARNING! In generators equipped with LV-DRAC, the LV_DRAC output can be as high as1000 Vrms. For safety reasons (to avoid electrical shocks) the stator cable mustbe shielded and both ends of the shield must be connected to the ground.

WARNING! Due to electromagnetic interference (EMI) problems, the IGBT’s heat sink is notgrounded. It is connected to the negative terminal of the input rectifier. To avoidelectrical shock, be sure that the input line is disconnected and the capacitor bankis properly discharged before manipulating in the LV-DRAC.

3.8.7 Fans

Wires from fans should be routed with the Stator Cables and connected to the indicated terminal of the generator cabinet. Depending on the X-ray Tube, the fans are powered at 115 VAC or 220 VAC. For Compact Generators with the High Speed Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the

Table 3-4

Stator WiresVarian Terminal TS2

RAD92 Tube Tube 1

Main Black TS2-1AUX (Shift) Red TS2-2Common White TS2-3



Im

bottom of the Generator (module-11), connect the wires from the fans as shown in Table 3-5.

3.8.8 Thermostat

The X-ray Tube is provided with a Safety Thermostat (approx. 65°C). The two wires should be routed to the Terminal Block TS2 in the Generator Cabinet and connected to the following Terminals:

NOTE: Terminal Block TS2 can be marked with a prefix number as 4TS2, 10TS2 or11TS2 depending on the Generator model.

3.8.9 GND and/or Shield

For Compact Generators with the Starter LV-DRAC located on a shelf at the bottom of the generator (module-11), connect the GND and/or Shield wire of the Stator cables to the Terminals 11TS2-8 for the X-ray Tube.

3.8.10 Serial Interconnection RS232 / RS422

Serial ConsoleFor systems using a Serial Console, only a Serial Interconnection Cable (A7066--xx or A3149--xx) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet must be connected to the J1 of the Serial Console. (Refer to Maps 54301052, A6188--02).

3.8.11 Virtual Console (PC)

For systems using a Virtual Console running on a PC it is required to install a PC Interface Box between the PC and Generator. See Figure 3-21. (Refer to Maps 54301052, A6188--02 and I/F-036).

Table 3-5

Tube ConnectionGenerator with HV Transformer and High Speed Starter for X-ray Tube

Wires to Fans 115 VAC 220 VAC

X-ray Tube 11TS2-6 and 11TS2-7 on the LV-DRAC Module

Jump 11TS2-6 and 11TS2-17 on the LV-DRAC Module

Jump 11TS2-6 and 11TS2-18 on the LV-DRAC Module

Table 3-6 - Thermostat Connections

Thermostat Wires X-ray Tube

Thermostat Signal TS2-4Thermostat Common TS2-5



To install the Interface Box do the following:1. Turn off the workstation and remove the power connection.

2. Remove the Back Cover of the Interface Box.

3. Connect the Serial Interconnection Cable (A3352--01) from J5 of the Generator Cabinet to J1 of the PC Interface Box.

4. Connect the Handswitch Cable to J2 of the Interface Box.

5. Connect the Interface Box - Computer Cable (A3363--01) to J3 of the Interface Box and the other end (2 connectors) to COM1 (Communication). Do not connect the power detection.

6. The other end has two connectors labelled COM1 and J1. Connect COM 1 to PC Comport.

7. Remove a convenient expansion slot backplate and install the Sedecal Power Detention Interface Board.

8. Connect the pigtail to the Power Detection Interface Board and to a free 12V plug inside the PC.

9. Re-install the Back Cover of the Interface Box.

10.Check to set proper Line Voltage on PC. Plug the Power Line cable of Computer to a 110 VAC or 230 VAC socket.

Figure 3-21

Connections

1 Serial Cable (A3352-01)

2 PC Box/PC Cable / Integration Cable

3 Power Line Cable to 110/230 VAC Socket

J51

J2

J3

2

3

J1

COM 1

COM 2

KeyboardGenerator Cabinet PC Interface Box PC (Computer)

Handswitch

J1



Im

3.8.12 Door Interlock Signal

Connect the two wires from the Room Door Interlock Switch(es) to Terminal Block 3TS1-22 (Door signal) and 3TS1-23 (Door Rtn - gnd). If the X-ray Room is not provided with a Door signal, place a jumper between both connections in the Terminal Block 3TS1.

CAUTION! At this point, perform the complete Configuration and Calibrationprocedures except the AEC. Once Configuration and Calibration areperformed, proceed with the rest of the Installation and Calibration. SeeGenerator Chapter.

3.8.13 Warning Light Signal

The Room Lamp(s) can be externally powered or internally powered through the Terminal Block 3TS1. The Room Lamp(s) must be connected through the Terminal Block 3TS1-47 and 3TS1-48 (internal relay on Interface Control PCB), so the generator switches on/off the lamps (Refer to -- I/F-008).

3.8.14 Collimator Lamp and System Locks

The generator can supply power to the Manual Collimator Lamp and System Locks (Table, Vertical Bucky, etc.)Connect wires from the Collimator Lamp to Terminal Block TB7-3 (24 VAC) and TB7-4 (0 VAC) of the Lock Board.Connect wires from the Locks to Terminal Block TB7-5 (+24 VDC) and TB7-6 (0 VDC) of the Lock Board.

NOTE: When required, voltages (VAC and VDC) on TB7 can be changed connecting therespective wires to other terminals in the Input Transformer 6T2. (Refer toSchematics 543020XX).

3.8.15 ION Chambers (AEC)

WARNING! Do not connect any Ion Chamber to the generator cabinet until you verifyand adjust the high voltage to the values required. Other voltage coulddamage the Ion Chambers.



WARNING! Do not turn on the generator until the input signals of all the Ion Chambers areconnected to the required voltage. Other voltage could damage the IonChambers.

1. Turn the Generator ON and verify the voltage in TB1-9 is correct for the ion chamber being installed. If necessary adjust the High Voltage at Potentiometer R29 of the Interface Control Board. After adjustment turn the Generator OFF.

2. Connect the Ion Chamber cable to J1 (IC1) of the AEC Adaptation Board. The Ion Chamber cable is supplied by the Generator manufacturer. The code is A3253--01. See Figure 3-22.

NOTE: The same type of Ion Chambers have to be installed in consecutive order starting atJ1 (IC1).

NOTE: The cable connection for the Vacutec or the AID is made directly to AEC AdaptationBoard.

Figure 3-22 - Connections without IC Adaptation Cables

Connections

1 Power Interface Cable

2 AEC Interface Cable

3 Ion Chamber Cable

TS1

J5

TB1 J1

J2

J3

J5J4

IC 1 Preamplifier

Generator

ATP Console Board

AEC Adaption Board(A3263-03)

1

2

3



Im

Figure 3-23 - Connections with IC Adaption Cables

3. On the AEC adaptation board ensure that TB 1-10 and TB 1-7 are jumpered together. Also check that all jumpers on the AEC adaptation board are set to B as in Table 3-7.

1 Power Interface Cable

2 AEC Interface Cable

3 Connections with IC Adaptation Cables

Table 3-7

Ion Chamber TypeJumpers Position

JP3, JP4, JP7, JP8 JP1, JP2, JP5, JP6 JP13, JP14, JP15, JP16

IC1 = IC2 = IC3 = IC4 B B B

TS1 Generator Cabinet

ATP Console CPU Board

AEC Adaption PCB

TB1

TB1-9

J1ION Chamber

J2

J3

J5

J4J5

AEC Input

AEC Output

Ion Chamber 1

Ion Chamber 2

Ion Chamber 3

Ion Chamber 4

AID or Vacutec

(not used)

(not used)

(not used)

1

2

3

3

3

3

(not used)


1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet • 3 - 39

3.9 Wiring the Stand and Control CabinetThe following illustration (Figure 3-24) shows the cable connections to perform during installation.

Figure 3-24

Connections

1 Column Main Harness to be connected to the Stand Control Cabinet

2 Detector Harness from the C-arm to be connected to the Stand Control Cabinet (Detector Area)

3 Power Line Cable to Stand Control Cabinet

4 Detector Harness from the Detector Control (Computer Workstation)

5

Cables from the Column to the Generator Cabinet:

HV Cables to HV Transformer

Stator/Thermostat

1235 46

Generator/StandControl Cabinet

C-armColumn

J2

X-ray tube

Control panel

Collimator

Collimator lamp

Detector HeadJ2 TS4 GND


3 - 40 • 1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet

Im

3.9.1 To Wire the Stand and Control Box

1. Install the lateral access cover of the Control Box. Perform the corresponding connections from the Column (Main Harness) in the Control Box as per schematics 54302080 and IM-353 in the service manual. See Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25

2. Inverters located inside the Control Box control the Motor parameters. These Inverters are factory pre-configured. See Figure 3-26.

6

Cables to the Generator Cabinet:

Power Line

Door Interlock Switches

Warning Room Lamps

other cables

Lateral Access CoverMain Harness



Figure 3-26

WARNING! Verify that inverter configurations are in accordance to the installationrequirements. If not, refer to the Section 10.6, “Inverters Factory Configurationor the inverter documentation to modify the parameters.

3. Connect the wires labeled T1, T2 and T3 to their respective Inverters.

4. Connect the brake cable to the Height Inverter terminals L1 and L2. See Figure 3-26.

5. Connect A1 and A2 to the Relay K1. Do not remove the diode across A1 and A2.

NOTE: The cathode of the diode goes to A1.

6. Connect J1, J3 and J4. See Figure 3-27.

7. Connect TS1 CI and TS2 CI. See Figure 3-27.

8. Connect the Brake Power Cable.

L1 L2 There are two conductors in each of the L1 and L2 connectors on the vertical inverter.

Height Inverter SID Inverter Rotation Inverter

T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 T2 T3


3 - 42 • 1600 Installation • Wiring the Stand and Control Cabinet

Im

Figure 3-27

9. Connect the ground cables (GND) from the Column to the Main Ground Stud (GND) of the Control Box.

10.Verify that the wire “*” of Transformer TR1 and the fuses of the Control Box are correct (sized) for the Power Line.

11.Connect the power cables of the Control Box to the Terminal Strip TS1.

WARNING! The unit is factory delivered to operate on phase and neutral. In case theequipment is connected to a two phase system, replace the neutral cartridge(F2/N in the Control Box) by the fuse supplied with the unit (supplied inplastic bag with extra fuses).

NOTE: Power supply connections must be in compliance with Local Codes.

DANGER! Exposed contacts with line voltage. See Figure 3-28.

TS2 C1

TS1 C1

J1

J3

J4



Figure 3-28


3 - 44 • 1600 Installation • X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation

Im

3.10 X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation

NOTE: The x-ray equipment, when installed shall permit the use of the focal spot to skindistances to be 45 cm or more in normal use.

1. Install the X-ray Tube in the Support of the Tube-Collimator Assembly using the Collimator Adaptation Ring and the four Safety Screws (Allen). See Figure 3-29.

Figure 3-29

2. Before installing the Collimator, equally unscrew the four Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws to allow the Collimator installation in the Collimator Adaptation Ring. Adjust the Collimator Blades to their narrowest setting and carefully install the Collimator, centering it with the X-ray Tube window.


3. Equally tighten (same number of turns) the four Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws (Allen) until the Collimator is centered and held firmly on the Coupling Ring (support). See Figure 3-30. (Also, refer to Collimator and Tube Manual supplied with equipment.)

Figure 3-30

X-Ray TubeSupport of the Tube-Collimator Assembly

Stator/Thermostat Cable

Collimator Cover

Collimator Cable

X-ray tube Cover

Centering and Safety Screws


1600 Installation • X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation • 3 - 45

4. Remove the X-ray Tube and Collimator covers. Connect the Stator / Thermostat wires to the X-ray Tube (white = common, black = main, red = shift/aux) and the Collimator Lamp cable (A3388--02) from the Upper Harness of the Column, accordingly to their identification. The Collimator Lamp is powered through its connection on the Control Box (refer to schematic 54302080). Do not power the Collimator Lamp through the Generator Cabinet.

5. Reinstall the X-ray Tube and Collimator covers.

6. Install the Front Housing (cover of the Control Panel and Tube-Collimator Assembly) by snapping it in place and securing it with the two screws at the back of the cover.

WARNING! When using x-ray accessories or other items that do not form part of the system,possible adverse effects may arise. See Table 3-8 for the maximum attenuationequivalent of possible materials located in the x-ray beam.

Table 3-8

Item Maximum Attenuation Equivalent mm Al

FRONT PANEL (POLYCARBONATE PAINTED) 1.2

PATIENT SUPPORT, MOVABLE, WITHOUT ARTICULATED JOINTS (CARBON FIBER TABLETOP OF PATIENT SUPPORT WITH WHEELS)

1.7

PATIENT SUPPORT, MOVABLE, WITHOUT ARTICULATED JOINTS 1.7


3 - 46 • 1600 Installation • To Cable the Stand

Im

3.11 To Cable the Stand1. Connect the HV Cables of the X-ray Tube.

CAUTION! Terminal Pins of the HV Cables are extremely delicate and easily damaged.Handle them carefully. Ensure they are all straight and the splits in the pinsare open (parallel to sides).

2. Prepare the High Voltage terminals to be installed in the X-ray Tube receptacles. Apply Silicone Paste over the entire surfaces of the Plug and Pins.

3. Connect the cables to the related receptors of the Tube and tighten the nuts.

4. Leaving enough cable to allow arm movements, clamp the Stator Cable and the HV Cables to the lateral side of the Upper Carriage of the C-arm. Also fasten the cables together with the cable harness to the Cable Support on the upper lateral side of the column. See Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31

5. Remove the Safety Locking Rod from the Central Carriage. See Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32

6. Turn the Unit ON with the Switch located on the Stand Control Box door.

Stator and HV cables

Cable support at lateral sideof the column

Detector Harness

Safety Locking Rod (Central Carriage)


1600 Installation • Detector Head Installation • 3 - 47

3.12 Detector Head Installation

Figure 3-33 : 1600 System Diagram


3 - 48 • 1600 Installation • Detector Head Installation

Im

WARNING! Although there are times when the camera stack will need to be removed, donot attempt to remove the camera, lens, or scintillator from the DetectorHead. Attempting to tamper with the camera, lens or scintillator will void thewarranty.

WARNING! During this procedure you will be making connections to high voltageterminals.

NOTE: Special care must be taken when handling and transporting of the Detector Head.Critical alignments and focusing may be disturbed if the unit is handledimproperly. The detector head is very heavy; if positioning the Detector Head byhand, two installers should support the head, while a third installer performs theconnection.

Prior to Detector Head installation:1. Position the C-arm at a horizontal position close to the floor.

2. Turn the unit OFF with the Switch at the Control Box door.

3.12.1 Routing the Detector Cables

Route the Detector Cables through the C-arm as indicated below:

NOTE: Use caution when handling the Fibre Optic Cable.

1. Gather the Detector Cables and identify which cable ends connect to the Detector Assembly and which cable ends connect to the Control Box. Tie the cables to get a single harness to ease the routing through the C-arm.

2. Ensure all the connectors pass through the cable access or cable hoses (Vacuflex). If not, remove the connectors.

3. Route the Detector Cables through the cable access of the Detector Assembly Support (lower side of the C-arm) towards the Detector Assembly. See Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34

Detector assembly support

Cable access

Detector cablesC-arm

Cable access



4. Remove the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) located close to the Central Carriage in the C-arm. A wire is provided from factory as a cable guide to ease the routing of the Detector Cables through the C-arm. The other end of this wire is at the cable access of the lower side. See Figure 3-35.

Figure 3-35

5. Attach all the Detector Cables to the cable guide. Route the Detector Cables through the cable access at the lower side of the C-arm towards the central cable access on the C-arm. See Figure 3-36.

Figure 3-36

Cable guide wire Cable hose cover(remove)

Cable guide wire

Cable access

Cable guide wire

Cable access

Detector cables

Cable access

C-arm



Im

6. Route the Detector Cables through the cable hose (Vacuflex) towards the Control Box.

7. This cable hose (Vacuflex) must be routed and attached to the Cable Support at the upper lateral side of the column. See Figure 3-37. The cable hose length must be long enough to enable movement of the C-arm.

Figure 3-37

8. Reinstall the cover of the cable hose (Vacuflex) and install the other end of the cable hose to the Control Box (lateral cable access).

3.12.1.1 Preparing to Install the Detector Head

NOTE: This procedure can be completed while the Detector Head is sitting in the crate.Turn the Detector Head vertically such that the end of the support frame is facingup.

When the Detector Head is received, the shipped configuration of the support frame face plate is set to face the front of the Detector Head. The support frame must be rotated 180° before the Detector Head is installed on a front mounted system. See Figure 3-38. The following procedures will must be completed when preparing to mount a front mounted Detector Head:

• Removing and configuring the support frame• Rotating the camera stack assembly• Reversing the fan orientation• Re-assembling the support frame

Cable Support at Lateral Side of the Column

Detector Harness



Figure 3-38

CAUTION! Gound straps must be used when completing the procedure.

Before After



Im

3.12.1.1.1 Removing and Configuring the Support Frame1. Remove the support frame face plate from the support frame by loosening and

removing the 12 M8 bolts. See Figure 3-39 and Figure 3-40.

Figure 3-39

Figure 3-40

face plate cover bolt

support frame face plate



2. Remove the 2 support frame side covers by loosening the bottom 2 fasteners and removing the top 2 bolts from each of the side covers. See Figure 3-41.

Figure 3-41

3. Unplug both fan cables. See Figure 3-42.

Figure 3-42

remove

loosen



Im

NOTE: Do not plug the red temperature sensor cable into the camera stack plug as shownin Figure 3-43. The temperature sensor cable must not be plugged into any part ofthe camera stack assembly.

CAUTION! The temperature probe is pigtailed with the two fan cables. Do not removethe red insulation. It does not require any handling.

Figure 3-43

4. Disconnect the trigger cable from the Detector Head trigger board and from the camera stack. See Figure 3-44 and Figure 3-45.

Figure 3-44

Do not plug the temperature sensor cable into the camera stack plug



Figure 3-45

5. Cut the tie wraps. See Figure 3-46.

Figure 3-46

6. Remove the fan wires from the side covers by removing the grommets from the fan cables. See Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47

Disconnect

Remove grommets



Im

7. Loosen and remove the 3 M10 bolts on each side that connect the Detector Head to the support frame. This includes the bolts on the inside of the support frame. See Figure 3-48 and Figure 3-49.

Figure 3-48

Figure 3-49

See Figure 3-49



8. Carefully remove the Detector Head support frame. See Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50



Im

9. Remove the end plate of the support frame by removing the 4 M10 bolts and reverse the orientation. The 3 skin bracket holes on the end plate should be facing towards the closed end of the support frame. See Figure 3-51 and Figure 3-52.

Figure 3-51 Before

Figure 3-52 After

skin bracket holes facing the open end of the support frame

skin bracket holes facing the closed end of the support frame



10.Reinstall the end plate to the support frame and tighten the 4 M10 bolts on each corner of the end plate to 10-14 Nm (90-125 in*lbs).

3.12.1.1.2 Rotating the Camera Stack Assembly

WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occurwhen handling any of its exposed electronic components if proper electro-staticdischarge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that antistatic wriststraps are worn and that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in thewall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does notbecome disconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent, butit will have a serious effect on the images and may completely prevent operation.

When the Detector Head is front mounted, the camera stack should face the open side of the support frame. 1. Remove the two screws on both sides of the camera protective cover. See Figure 3-53.

Figure 3-53

CAUTION! When moving the camera stack assembly, ensure the ribbon cable underneath thecamera stack assembly is handled delicately to prevent damage. It must not beforced into position.

screws on camera stack assembly



Im

2. Carefully lift the camera stack assembly and rotate 180°. See Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54

3. When rotating the camera stack assembly, the ribbon cable must also be turned. When turning the ribbon, ensure the ribbon is not creased and does not touch the camera stack assembly components above. See Figure 3-55 and Figure 3-56. Any contact between the camera stack assembly components and the ribbon may affect image quality.

Figure 3-55

camera components

ribbon cable



Figure 3-56

4. Once the ribbon is in place, reinstall the screws on the camera protective covering.

3.12.1.1.3 Re-assembling the Support Frame1. Rotate the support frame 180° and reinstall the support frame on the Detector Head such

that the open end of the support frame faces the back of the Detector Head.

2. When rotating the support frame, move the Trigger Board cable so the end of the cable will come out from the side of the support frame closest to the Trigger Board. This will ensure the length of the cable will reach the Trigger Board.

3. Remove the side bolt connecting the elbow connector to the support frame. Move the elbow connector to the closed end of the support frame. See Figure 3-57 and Figure 3-58.

Figure 3-57



Im

Figure 3-58

4. The 2 bolts on the corner of the support frame must be tightened at the same time to ensure the support frame is properly bolted to the Detector Head. Tighten the bolts to the support frame to 26-27 Nm (230-240 in*lbs). See Figure 3-58 above.

5. Reconnect the trigger board cable to the trigger board and to the camera stack.

6. The orientation of the fans must be reversed so the input fan blows directly into the cooling fins of the camera stack assembly. See Figure 3-59. To reverse the orientation of the fan, remove the 4 screws that attach each of the fans to the support frame.

Figure 3-59

cooling fins



7. Reverse the orientation of the fan closest to the cooling fins so the arrow on the fan points towards the inside of cooling fins. See Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60

8. Switch the covers of the fans so the filter is attached to the input fan. See Figure 3-60 above.

9. Re-attach the input fan using the 4 screws on each of the fan corners.

NOTE: To prevent damage to the fan ends, do not over tighten the screws.

10. Reverse the orientation of the other fan so the arrow on the fan points outwards from the support frame. See Figure 3-61.

Figure 3-61

filter

finger guard



Im

11. Attach the finger guard to the output fan using the 4 screws on each corner of the fan. See Figure 3-61 above.

12.Thread the fan cables through the side covers and re-attach the grommets.

13.Reconnect the fan cables.

14.Loosely re-attach the support frame side cover. The side covers are not re-attached completely until the Detector Head is installed. See Figure 3-62.

Figure 3-62

3.12.2 Installing and Connecting the Detector Head


1. Bring the stand to table position, and lower the C-arm to install the Detector Head Assembly.

2. Install the Detector Head Assembly on the Detector Plate Support of the C-arm using the six safety screws. See Figure 3-63.



Figure 3-63

3. Install the AEC Pre-amp on the Detector Assembly. See Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64

4. Perform the following connections at the Detector Assembly:

a. Control Pad Cables with connector marked J2 to J2 socket.

CAUTION! Incoming line voltage is present on Terminal Strip TS4.

b. Emergency Stop wires 5 and 6 are bridged to allow motion during installation. Remove the bridge and connect the Emergency stop wires from the Detector Cover in the Terminal Strip TS4.

5. Install the cover over the x-ray tube.

Detector assembly

Safety screws (6)

Detector plate support

Terminal strip TS4


3 - 66 • 1600 Installation • Power Distribution Module (PDM)

Im

3.13 Power Distribution Module (PDM)The PDM is controlled and monitored by the workstation and the Magellan 3 software.

Figure 3-65

3.13.1 Understanding the PDM

The PDM is used for the following functions:• The TEC cable controls the temperature of the Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC). The

TEC controller is used to set and maintain the temperature of the camera CCD at -10 C.

• Senses and analyzes the power consumption on TEC and monitors for cable connection.

• Controls the ON/OFF status of the camera power.• Senses the temperature of the camera housing.• Controls and monitors the Camera fans.• Controls the Grid Detect function (optional).

3.13.2 Installing the PDM

NOTE: When considering mounting location of the PDM, the PDM display does nothave to be visible to the technologist.


1600 Installation • Power Distribution Module (PDM) • 3 - 67

NOTE: To provide proper air flow, the PDM must be mounted vertically.

1. Using the appropriate hardware, vertically mount the PDM such that the fans are at the top of the unit. The PDM and PDM power supply is mounted on a mounting plate inside the stand control cabinet. See Figure 3-66.

Figure 3-66

2. Ensure there is enough cable length to allow movement of the Detector Head when it is attached to the stand or table.

PDM

PDM powersupply


3 - 68 • 1600 Installation • Cabling the Detector Head and PDM

3.14 Cabling the Detector Head and PDM

WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage can occurwhen handling any of its exposed electronic components if proper electro-staticdischarge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure that antistatic wriststraps are worn and that these are properly connected to a suitable ground in thewall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure the ESD protection does notbecome disconnected. Damage from ESD may not be immediately apparent, butit will have a serious effect on the images and may completely prevent operation.

NOTE: The power to the camera should be provided via an uninterrupted power supply(UPS) to meet EMI requirements.

The Detector Head has the following cables (see Figure 3-63): • Camera Power cable – Allows communication of monitoring of the cavity fans, the cav-

ity’s ambient temperature, and provides power to the camera.• TEC cable – Allows communication to set and maintain the temperature of the camera

CCD at -10°C.• Trigger Board cable – Communicates the start of image acquisition between the trigger

board and the camera.• Fibre Optic cable – Communicates image data from the camera to the computer• Grid Detect cable (optional) – Communicates the status of the Radiographic Grid.

Figure 3-67

Figure 3-68

Trigger Board CableTEC CableCamera Power Cable

Fibre Optic Cable


1600 Installation • Cabling the Detector Head and PDM • 3 - 69

3.14.1 Connecting the Detector Head and PDM

WARNING! The CCD camera is extremely sensitive to static discharge. Damage canoccur when handling any of its exposed electronic components if properelectro-static discharge (ESD) precautions are not observed. Ensure thatantistatic wrist straps are worn and that these are properly connected to asuitable ground in the wall. Be cautious when moving around to ensure theESD protection does not become disconnected. Damage from ESD may notbe immediately apparent, but it will have a serious effect on the images andmay completely prevent operation.

3.14.1.1 Connecting the PDM1. Run the Fibre Optic cable through the stand or table back to the computer. Connect the

Fibre Optic cable to the computer’s fibre optic port. If you are supplying the computer you must install the hotlink card.

2. The Camera Power cable is pre-installed in the Detector Head with external plugs to allow interconnection to the PDM. Connect the TEC cable to the PDM and run it through the stand or table to the Detector Head. If the end is not terminated, you may cut the cable to length and install the plug. If it is terminated, connect to the matching plug in the Detector Head.

3. The TEC cable is pre-installed in the Detector Head with external plugs to allow interconnection to the PDM. Connect the Camera Power cable to the PDM and run it through the stand or table to the Detector Head. If the end is not terminated, you may cut the cable to length and install the plug. If it is terminated, connect to the matching plug in the Detector Head.

4. Run the grid detect cable from the Detector Head though the stand or table to the PDM and connect the Grid Detect cable to the PDM.

5. Connect the computer cable to PC RS232 on the PDM, and run the computer cable from the PDM through the stand or table and back to the computer. Connect the computer cable to PC RS232, standard serial port on the computer.

6. Connect the PDM’s power cable to the PDM power supply.

7. Connect the PDM power supply input to AC power.

NOTE: The PDM has a Remote (REM) input for ON/OFF contact. This connection is forfuture development.

3.14.1.2 Connecting the Detector Head

CAUTION! The temperature probe is pigtailed with the two fan cables. Do not removethe red insulation. It does not require any handling. See Figure 3-69.



Figure 3-69

1. Install the fibre optic cable. See Figure 3-70. To do this remove the side panel of the support frame, connect the fibre optic cable to the fibre optic receptacle (U3) on the top board on the camera stack and reinstall the side panel.

Figure 3-70

2. Connect the Trigger Board cable to the J2 on the Trigger board. See Figure 3-71.

Figure 3-71

Fan Cables

Temperature Probe

Fibre Optic Cable

Trigger Board cable



3. Install the AEC paddle by removing the four grub screws on the mate plate. Discard these screws.

4. Slide the AEC paddle into the plate’s slots. See Figure 3-72.

Figure 3-72

5. Centre the AEC over the scintillator.

6. Secure the AEC paddle’s cables to the mate plate with tie wraps. See Figure 3-73.

Figure 3-73

7. Secure the AEC paddle onto the mate plate with the four black grub screws shipped with the ion chamber.

CAUTION! Do not overtighten the black grub screws. The screws may puncture the ionchamber causing the Detector Head to ground out.



8. Connect the 8 pin Molex camera cable to the camera stack’s camera cable. See Figure 3-74.

Figure 3-74

9. Connect the 12 pin Molex TEC cable to the camera stack’s TEC cable. See Figure 3-75.

Figure 3-75



10.Replace the support frame top cover with the 12 bolts.

11.Mount the AEC pre-amp to the support frame top cover. See Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76

WARNING! Ensure the generator is off before connecting the AEC cables.

12.Connect the stand’s AEC cable to the AEC pre-amp. See Figure 3-77.

Figure 3-77

13.Plug in JP1 to the back of the Grid Detect Board. Ensure the cable is secured to the PCB with tie wraps. See Figure 3-78.



Figure 3-78

14.The Detector Head body should be grounded using a part number 430-0117-003 and a star washer ground conductor. See Figure 3-79.

Figure 3-79

15. Mount the face plate. See Figure 3-80.

Grid cable to back of grid board

Tie wraps to secure cable



Figure 3-80

16.At the opposite end of the Grid Drawer, check the clearance between the AEC panel and the Grid Detect Board. Slowly open the Grid Drawer to determine if there are any collisions.

NOTE: Ensure there are no cables in the imaging area.

17. Connect the ribbon cable, ensuring the correct orientation of the cable. See Figure 3-81.

Figure 3-81



Figure 3-82 - Detector Head Wiring


1600 Installation • Computer Installation • 3 - 77

3.15 Computer Installation

WARNING! Ensure voltage switch is set to the appropriate setting prior to connection ofthe equipment.

NOTE: The computer system must be located at least 1.5 meters away from the digital x-ray detector.

To install the computer1. Plug the computer into the UPS.

2. Plug the mouse and the keyboard into the back of the computer as indicated (See Dell’s Workstation Manual).

3. Connect the computer to the Hospital Network Drop with a CAT 5 network cable.

4. Connect the monitor video cable (white DVI-D cable) to the back of the computer.

5. Connect the Camera Communication Cable (Fibre optic) into the hotlink card on the back of the computer.

6. Connect the TEC Cable into COM1 Port with a RJ-45 to DB9 conversion plug on the back of the computer.

7. Plug the monitor power cable into the UPS Battery Protected Receptable.

8. Plug the UPS into the designated wall outlet (dedicated line).

NOTE: The computer must have the supplied ground strap connected to a reliable earthpoint.

For more information on the workstation, refer to the Dell Reference Guide.


3 - 78 • 1600 Installation • Powering up the 1600 System

3.16 Powering up the 1600 System

DANGER! Undertable and chest positioning are provided with automatic movement of theC-arm. Ensure there are no obstructions within range of the C-arm.

WARNING! Ensure the x-ray tube is placed into the appropriate working position with thereference axis (x-ray beam) directed towards the reception area.

WARNING! Ensure there are no objects on the C-arm and Detector Head surface beforepowering on the unit

WARNING! Remaining energy may exist when the equipment is switched off. Always wait atleast 15 seconds before working on the system.

CAUTION! After complete installation or service, measure protective earth.

NOTE: The Automatic Chest and Automatic Table buttons will require pressing and holding.

1. Turn on the UPS.

2. Turn on the PDM.

3. Turn on the 1600 contol box.

4. Turn on the generator.

5. Wait for everything to power up.

6. Turn on the computer and monitor.

7. Ensure the red link light is OFF on both the camera fibre board and the computer interface board.


1600 Installation • Trigger Board Adjustments • 3 - 79

3.17 Trigger Board Adjustments

Figure 3-83

3.17.1 Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics

Setup of the PMT trigger circuit is to be completed before final focus testing. This will ensure the cavity is light tight; therefore, preventing the PMT from being destroyed by excess ambient light. 1. Apply power to the camera. This will supply 15 volts to the PMT trigger board. See

Figure 3-83.

2. Connect the DMM black lead to the trigger board at TP6. Use the red lead and check for 15 volts, ± 0.5 volts, on the lower end of L1 next to J2.

3. Leave the black lead on TP6 and touch the red lead to the single pad on the top side of VR1.

4. Adjust VR 1 to read 0.9 volts, ± 0.02 volts. This will set the PMT sensitivity.

5. Remove the DMM red and black leads.

6. Connect the black lead to TP1 (yellow).

7. Connect the red lead to TP4 (white).

8. Adjust VR2 for a meter reading of not lower than 0.060 volts or greater than 0.065 volts.

9. Reconnect the black test lead to TP6 and check for approximately 0.15 volts on L2.

Trigger Cable J2

PMT Cable J1

VR2TP1TP4

VR1

TP6 L1 L2


3 - 80 • 1600 Installation • Trigger Board Adjustments

3.17.2 Checking the Trigger Settings

1. Set the SID to 180 cm.

2. Set the x-ray factors to 50 kVp and 0.5 mAs.

3. Collimate to an exposed area of 5 cm by 5 cm. If the built in collimators will not close to such a small area, use the lead bricks to further reduce the exposed area.

4. Start the unit and its software. Check to see that the system is not triggering in the absence of an x-ray exposure. If it is, the trigger is too sensitive and sensitivity must be decreased. To decrease the sensitivity, adjust the voltage measured in Step 7 of Section 3.17.1, “Setting up the Trigger Board Electronics above to 0.070 volts.

5. Fire the x-ray machine and note whether the system is triggered. The trigger is adequately sensitive and calibration is complete when the system triggers to the above x-ray factors.


1600 Installation • Checking Movements and Installing the Covers • 3 - 81

3.18 Checking Movements and Installing the Covers

WARNING! Operators and/or patients may not be in the room if equipment covers areremoved for routine maintenance.

WARNING! Routine maintenance may not be performed on medical or non-medicalequipment by service personnel if the operator and/or patient is within theroom.

1. Turn the Unit ON.

2. Check that all controls and movements operate correctly.

3. Turn the Unit OFF.

4. Install the Detector Head Covers. See Figure 3-84.

Figure 3-84

5. Install the Base and Top Covers of the Column with the supplied screws. See Figure 3-85.


3 - 82 • 1600 Installation • Checking Movements and Installing the Covers

Figure 3-85

6. Route the cables from the Column to be connected in the Generator (HV Cables, Stator/Thermostat) through the upper cable access of the Generator Cabinet.

7. Cables to be connected to the Generator Cabinet, such as Power Line and Door Interlock, must be routed through the lateral cable access (or floor cable access when using a floor raceway) of the Control Box, across the Control Box and along the back side of the Generator Cabinet to be clamped at the Fastening Bar at the top of the Generator Cabinet.

8. Connect the Power Line Cable, HV Cables in the HV Transformer, Stator / Thermostat, Door Interlock Switches, Warning Room Lamps, etc as indicated in the Installation document of the Generator Service Manual.

9. Complete the Generator Cabinet installation (configuration, calibration, covers, etc) as indicated in the Generator Service Manual.

Column Base Cover

Column Upper Cover


1600 Installation • Leveling Checks • 3 - 83

3.19 Leveling ChecksAfter the System is connected, perform the following leveling checks in the Column/Arm, the Tube-Collimator Assembly and the Detector Assembly. Leveling of the system will result in a better installation.1. Check the vertical/horizontal position of the Column. Modify the position of the

Column with the screws attached to the Column Upper Support. See Figure 3-86.

Figure 3-86

2. Verify the Tube-Collimator Assembly is level and parallel to the Detector Head. If necessary reinstall the Tube-Collimator Assembly. See 3.10 “X-Ray Tube and Collimator Installation” on page 3-44.

3. Verify the Detector Head is level, in chest and under table positions. Use the four Detector Assembly leveling screws to adjust. See Figure 3-87.

Figure 3-87

Levels

DetectorLevelingScrews


1600 CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

The following information is included:4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” 4.2 “Configuration and Calibration Guide” 4.3 “Configuration Details” 4.4 “Common Configuration Errors” 4.5 “Calibration Details” 4.6 “Adjustments”


4 - 2 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration •






1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration • 4 - 3

4.1 Configuration and Calibration

NOTE: This unit is factory configured and calibrated. These procedures may only berequired in case a modification in the system movements or a malfunction isdetected. See See Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1

Configuration and Calibration Buttons Operation Buttons

9 Enter in Service Mode 1 Motorized Vertical UP Movement of C-arm

1 + 2 + 3 Enter Calibration / Exit Configuration or Calibration

2 Motorized Vertical Down Movement of C-arm

4 + 5 + 6 Enter Calibration 3 Motorized Rotation Movement of C-arm CCW

1 Increase value 4 Motorized SID Adjustment PLUS

2 Save value 5 Motorized SID Adjustment MINUS

3 Decrease value 6 Motorized Rotation Movement of C-arm CCW

45

6

12

3

7

8

9

10

1112

ENTER IN SERVICE MODE: Turn On the Unit and press and hold (9) while “Vxx” is being displayed on the Angle display until “CAL” appears, release all buttons and wait five seconds until the real angle degree appears on Angle display.


4 - 4 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration

4 Level / Sublevel up 7 Angle Display

5 Enter / Exit Level / Sublevel 8 Automatic Under-table Position

6 Level / Sublevel down 9 Safety Lock

7 Values / Level display 10 Automatic chest Position

1 + 3 Allow movement 11 Low Speed

8 Return to calibration 12 SID / Information Display

Configuration and Calibration Buttons Operation Buttons


1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide • 4 - 5

4.2 Configuration and Calibration GuideThe following is a guide the configuration and calibration of the Unit. See Figure 4-2 and See Figure 4-3 for a diagram of the configuration and calibration values.

Figure 4-2 Configuration

1 C31 45 cm (17.7 in)

2 C33 105 cm (41.3 in)

3 C13 120 cm (47 in) chest height all models

4 C32 168 cm (68 in)

C17 C18

30 cm 30 cm (11.8”)

1

32

4

C3

2:

Max.H

eig

htofcarr

iage

(168

cm

--66”)

C21:Safety Height (10 cm -- 4”)

Dete

cto

rA

rm(9

0cm

--35.4

”)Tube

Arm

(110

cm

--43.3

”)

C14:

Undert

able

Heig

ht(6

3cm

--24.8

”)

C16

C16: Detector Height (45 cm -- 17.7”)

C12:

Max.heig

htofhe

room

(350

cm

--138”)


4 - 6 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide

Figure 4-3 CalibrationP21 (-30 )

° P22 (0 )°

P23 (90 )°

P24 (+120 )°

P42 (0 )°

P41 (-45 )°

P43 (+20 )°

P11

P13

P32 (180 cm/71 in)

P31 (100 cm/39 in)

P12

30

°30

°90



4.2.1 Configuration Table

The following is a guiding table for the configuration of the Unit (see Table 4-1). Write down the values configured in the Set Value column. Usually C03 and C04 are not to be modified as they correspond to Standard values. See Figure 4-2 for a diagram of the configuration values.

Table 4-1

Level Sub-Level Item Standard Value Set Value

C01

C11 Centimeters (Inches) cm (in)

C12 Maximum height of the Room (from ceiling to floor) 350 cm (37.79 in)

C13 Chest height 120 cm (47.24 in)

C14Undertable height (position detector under the table and measure from the central point of the carriage to the floor)

65 cm (25.59 in)

C15 Table height (measure height from floor to table top) 75 cm (29.52 in)

C16

Detector height (measure from the Detector panel to the outer limit of the Detector)

Although this value is set at 10 cm, it is necessary to change the value to 45 cm (17.72 in) to prevent damage to the Detector Head.

10 cm (3.93 in)45 cm (17.72 in)

C17

Detector width left. Measure from the central axis of the Detector (the detector must be in horizontal position) to the end of the detector in its left side. If the distance is less than 50 cm (19.68 in), leave a minimum of 50 cm (19.68 in).

50 cm (19.68 in) 50 cm (19.68 in)

C18

Detector width right. Measure from the central axis of the Detector (the detector must be in horizontal position) to the end of the detector in its right side.

50 cm (19.68 in) 30 cm (11.81 in)

C19

Third SID position. (this configuration applies an optional third detent for SID between C41 (minimum SID) and C42 (maximum SID). Refer to C04.

190 cm (74.80 in) configure at a range between 100 and 180, if applicable


4 - 8 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Calibration Guide

C02

C21Safety Height (This value corresponds to the minimum height from floor to detector with arm in vertical position)

15 cm (5.9 in) 10 cm (3.93 in)

C22Chest SID (This value corresponds to the SID to be applied when using the automatic chest position).

180 cm

C03

C31 Minimum Height in horizontal position 45 cm (17.71 in)

C32 Maximum Height in horizontal position 163 cm (64.17 in)

C33 Half way Height 105 cm (41.33 in)

C04

C41 Minimum angle CCW (-30°) -30°

C42 Vertical Angle (0°) 0°

C43 Horizontal Angle (90°) 90°

C44 Minimum Angle CW (+120°) +120°

C05C51 Minimum SID (100) 100 cm (39.37 in)

C52 Maximum SID (180) 180 cm (70.86 in)

C06

C61Minimum Rotation Angle of Detector CCW

(-45°)-45°

C62 0° Detent of Detector Rotation (Perpendicular to X-ray Beam)

0°

C63Maximum Rotation Angle of Detector CW (+20°) +20°

Table 4-1

Level Sub-Level Item Standard Value Set Value



4.2.2 CalibrationTable

The following is a guiding table for the calibration of the Unit (see Table 4-1). Write down the values configured in the Set Value column. Also See Figure 4-3 for a diagram of the calibration values.

Table 4-2

Level Sub-Level Item Instructions Set Value

P01

P11 Minimum Height in horizontal position (configured in C31)

Measure with metric tape.P12 Maximum Height in horizontal position

(configured in C32)

P13 Half way Height in horizontal position (configured in C33)

P02

P21 Minimum Angle CCW (configured in C41)Measure the angles with an Inclinometer.

P22 Vertical Angle (0°) (Configured in C42)

P23 Horizontal Angle (90°) (Configured in C43)

P24 Minimum Angle CW (+120°) (Configured in C44)

P03

P31 Minimum SID (100) Measure with Collimator metric tape. Take into account 3 cm (1 in) of faceplate Detector distance.

P32 Maximum SID (180)

P04 --P41 Minimum Angle CCW -45° (configured in C61) Arm in vertical

position. Measure the angles with an Inclinometer.

P42 Vertical Angle 0° (configured in C62)

P43 Horizontal Angle CW +20° (configured in C63)


4 - 10 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration Details

4.3 Configuration Details

4.3.1 General Configuration Procedure

1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode.

2. Simultaneously press 4, 5 and 6 to enter into Configuration Mode.

3. Press 5 to enter or exit from Sub-levels inside a level.

4. Press 4 or 6 to go up or down a level or Sub-level.

5. Press 1 or 3 to modify values in a sub-level.

6. Press 2 to save the data. Angle Display shows OK.

7. Press 6 or 4 to go to CXX or press 5 to exit submenu.

NOTE: To exit from the Configuration Mode simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3.

4.3.2 Configuration Step by Step

4.3.2.1 Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration/Calibration Mode.

2. Simultaneously press time 4, 5 and 6 to enter into Configuration Mode.

3. C01 appears on the Angle Display. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C11.

4. Press 4 or 6 to go up or down a level or Sub-level.

5. Press 1 or 3 to modify the values in a sub-level: in this case to toggle between CM/INC. Set the desired value.

6. Press 2 to save the data. The Angle Display shows OK.

7. Press 4 to go to C12 or press 5 to exit the submenu.

4.3.2.2 Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height of the RoomThe standard height of the room for normal functioning of the Unit corresponds to a configuration value of 350 cm (137.79 in).1. Once C12 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you are not

coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)

2. Press 2 to save the data.



1600 Configuration and Calibration • Configuration Details • 4 - 11

4.3.2.3 Configuration of C13 - Chest HeightThe standard height of the chest position corresponds to a configuration value of 120 cm (47.24 in).1. Once C13 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. If you are

not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.



4.3.2.4 Configuration of C14 - Under-table HeightThe standard height of the Under-table position corresponds to a configuration value of 65 cm (25.59 in) or 10 cm (3.9 in) less than the table height.1. Once C14 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. If you are




4.3.2.5 Configuration of C15 - Table HeightThe standard height of the table corresponds to a configuration value of 75 cm (29.52 in).1. Once C15 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. If you are




4.3.2.6 Configuration of C16 - Detector HeightThis value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the Detector Head on the floor when it is going into the vertical position. Depending on the height of the Detector, this value is measured in the horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector Support to the end of the Detector in its maximum height. This value is factory set at 10 cm (3.93 in).



WARNING! This 10 cm value must be changed to 45 cm (17.72 in) to accommodate the IDCDetector Head. Failure to do so could result in serious damage to the Detector.

1. Using a metric (imperial) tape, measure the height of the detector, that is, from the Detector Panel to the base of the detector. Refer to See Figure 4-4. Write the data obtained in the table below.

2. Once C16 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the value to 45 cm (17.72 in). If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.



Figure 4-4

4.3.2.7 Configuration of C17 - Detector Width LeftThis value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the detector when going to the vertical position. Depending on the width of the Detector, this value is measured in the horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector half to the left of the Detector in its

XX cm(XX in)

Measure from detector front to end of detector



maximum point. In this case the Standard value is 50 cm (19.68 in).1. Using a metric (imperial) tape, measure the width of the detector, that is, from the

center axis of the detector to the left end (if C17) or to the right end (if C18). Refer to See Figure 4-5. Write the data obtained in the table below.

2. Once C17 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)



4.3.2.8 Configuration of C18 - Detector Width RightThis value provides information to the Unit to avoid collision of the Detector Head when going to vertical position. Depending on the width of the Detector, this value is measured in horizontal position of the Detector from the Detector half to the right of the Detector in its maximum point. In this case the Standard value is 50 cm (19.68 in).1. Once C18 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you

are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)



Figure 4-5

4.3.2.9 Configuration of C19 - Optional Third SID PointThis value provides information to the Unit of a third SID detent point. In case it is not

C17 - Measure from the Detector Center to left of the Detector or as in this case, if the distance is less than 50 cm (19.7 in), apply minimum of 50 cm (19.7 in).

C18 - Measure form Detector Center to right limit of Detector.

C17 C18

50 cm (19.68 in) XX cm (XX in)



needed, set 190 cm (74.80 in).1. Once C19 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you are not

coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)


3. Press 5. C01 appears on the display.

4. Press 4 to go to C02.

4.3.2.10 Configuration of C21 - Safety HeightThis value provides information to the Unit of the minimum height allowable of the Arm in the vertical position. In this case the standard value is 15 cm ( 5.9 in) measured from the bottom of the Detector relative to the floor.1. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C21. Once C21 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to

set the desired value. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)


3. Press 5 to exit the submenu.


4.3.2.11 Configuration of C22 - Chest SIDThis value provides information to the Unit of the SID to be applied when using the automatic chest positioning. In this case the standard value is 180 cm. If the operator requires to modify this values proceed in the following way:1. Once C2.2 appears on Angle Display (follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of General

2. Configuration Procedure in case you are not coming from previous step), press 1 or 3 to set the desired value.


4. Press 4 to go to C03 and press 5 again to enter in C31.

4.3.2.12 Configuration of C31 - Minimum Height in Horizontal PositionThis value provides information to the Unit of the minimum height allowable of the Arm in horizontal position. In this case the standard value is 45 cm (17.71 in) measured from the arm central axis to the floor.1. Press 5 to enter in Sub-level C31. Once C31 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to

set the desired value. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)





4.3.2.13 Configuration of C32 - Maximum Height in Horizontal PositionThis value provides information to the Unit of the maximum height allowable of the Arm in horizontal position. In this case the standard value is 163 cm (64.17 in) measured from the Arm Central Axis to the floor.1. Once C32 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you




4.3.2.14 Configuration of C33 - Mid Height in Horizontal PositionThis value provides information to the Unit of the middle height of the Arm in horizontal position. In this case the standard value is 105 cm (41.33 in) measured from the Arm Central Axis to the floor.1. Once C33 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set the desired value. (If you




4. Press 4 three times to go to C60 and press 5 again to enter C61.

4.3.2.15 Configuration of C4.0 and C5.0These values do not need to be modified as they are part of the standard radiographic exams. In case these need to be modified, follow the same procedure as before.

4.3.2.16 Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle for DetectorThis value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned counterclockwise. In this case the standard value is -45°. 1. Once C61 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set -45°. (If you are not coming

from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)



4.3.2.17 Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0°

This value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned to 0°. Then



rotational movement will stop in this position. The standard value is 0°. 1. Once C62 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set 0°. (If you are not coming from

the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)



4.3.2.18 Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle for DetectorThis value provides information to the Unit of the detector angle when turned clockwise. The standard value is +20°. 1. Once C63 appears on the Angle Display, press 1 or 3 to set 20°. (If you are not coming

from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Configuration Procedure in Section 4.3.1).




1600 Configuration and Calibration • Common Configuration Errors • 4 - 17

4.4 Common Configuration ErrorsThe following is a set of tips that may help to solve/understand some common errors found during the Configuration process. See Figure 4-6 for distances and standard values during Configuration.

4.4.1 Undertable Configuration Errors

Error will appear if:• The maximum height value (C32) is less than the Undertable height (C14) + Receptor

arm length (90 cm - 35.4 in).• The maximum room height value (C12) is less than the Tube Arm length (110 cm/

43.3 in) + Receptor Arm length (90 cm/35.4 in) + Undertable height (C14).• The Undertable height (C14) is less than the Receptor height (C16 + Safety Distance

C21).

4.4.2 Chest Configuration Errors

Error will appear if:• The maximum height value (C32) is less than the chest height (C13).• The maximum room height value (C12) is less than the Tube Arm length (110 cm/

43.3 in) + chest height (C13).


4 - 18 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Common Configuration Errors

Figure 4-6

1 C31 45 cm (17.7 in)

2 C33 105 cm (41.3 in)

3 C13 120 cm (47 in) chest height all models

4 C32 168 cm (68 in)

C3

2:

Max.H

eig

htofcarr

iage

(168

cm

--66”)

C21:Safety Height (10 cm -- 4”)

Dete

cto

rA

rm(9

0cm

--35.4

”)Tube

Arm

(110

cm

--43.3

”)

C14:

Undert

able

Heig

ht(6

3cm

--24.8

”)

C16

C16: Detector Height (45 cm -- 17.7”)

C12:

Max.heig

htofhe

room

(350

cm

--138”)

1

32

4

C17 C18

30 cm 30 cm (11.8”)


1600 Configuration and Calibration • Calibration Details • 4 - 19

4.5 Calibration Details

4.5.1 General Calibration Procedure

1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode. See See Figure 4-7.

2. Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 (P01 appears on the Angle Display) to enter into Calibration Mode.

Figure 4-7

3. Press 4 to go to P01.

4. Press 5 to enter into the Sub-level (it goes directly to the last selected Sub-level).

5. Press 4 or 6 to go to PXX. PXX appears on the Angle Display and is followed by the Configured Value.

6. Press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the arm. Now the operation movement buttons are enabled.

7. Position the C-arm at the calibration point (measure with a metric tape or use an Inclinometer).

8. Press Under-table to return to calibration.

9. Press 2 to save data. The Angle Display shows OK.

10. Press 5 to return to P0X.

NOTE: Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 to exit Calibration Mode.

45

6

12

3

7

8

9

10

1112


4 - 20 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Calibration Details

4.5.2 Calibration Step by Step

4.5.2.1 Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height in Horizontal Position1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter into Configuration / Calibration Mode.

2. Simultaneously press 1, 3 and 4 (P01 appears on display) to enter into Calibration Mode.

3. Press 5 to enter into P11 Sub-level (it goes directly to the last selected Sub-level).

4. P11 appears on the Angle Display and is followed by the Configured Value.

5. Simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement.

6. Position the C-arm in the configured position (i.e., 45 cm / 17.71 in). Measure with a metric (imperial) tape from the central axis of the arm to the floor.



9. Press 4 to go to P12 or press 5 to exit the submenu.

4.5.2.2 Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height in Horizontal Position1. Once P12 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-

arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Calibration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)





4.5.2.3 Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height in Horizontal Position1. Once P13 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-

arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Calibration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)



4. Press 2 to save data.


6. Press 4 to go to P02 and press 5 again to enter in P21.



4.5.2.4 Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle CCW (-30°)1. Once P21 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the

C-arm. (If you are not coming from the previous step, follow steps 1, 2, 3, 4 of the General Calibration Procedure in Section 4.3.1.)

2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (-30°). Measure with an Inclinometer.




4.5.2.5 Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle (0°)1. Once P22 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the


2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (0°). Measure with an Inclinometer.

3. Press Under-table to go back to calibration.



4.5.2.6 Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle (90°)1. Once P23 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the






4.5.2.7 Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle CW (120°)1. Once P24 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the









4.5.2.8 Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID (100 cm / 39 in)1. Once P31 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-


2. Simultaneously press 1+3 to allow movement.

3. Position the C-arm in the configured position (100 cm / 39.37 in). Measure with the metric Collimator tape to the tabletop. Discount 3 cm of tabletop-detector distance.




4.5.2.9 Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID (180 cm / 70.86 in)1. Once P32 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-


2. Position the C-arm in the configured position (180 cm / 70.86 in). Measure with the Collimator metric tape to the tabletop. Discount 3 cm (1.18 in) of tabletop-detector distance.





4.5.2.10 Calibration of P41 - Minimum Detector Angle (-45°)1. Once P41 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the C-


2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (-45°). Measure with the inclinometer on the Detector surface.






4.5.2.11 Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle1. Once P42 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the


2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (0°). Measure with the inclinometer on the Detector surface.




4.5.2.12 Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle (+20°)1. Once P43 appears on the display, simultaneously press 1 + 3 to allow movement of the


2. Position the Detector Arm in the configured position (+20°). Measure with the inclinometer on the Detector surface.



5. Simultaneously press 1, 2 and 3 to exit Calibration Mode.



Figure 4-8 P21 (-30 )

° P22 (0 )°

P23 (90 )°

P24 (+120 )°

P42 (0 )°

P41 (-45 )°

P43 (+20 )°

P11

P13

P32 (180 cm/71 in)

P31 (100 cm/39 in)

P12

30

°30

°90


1600 Configuration and Calibration • Adjustments • 4 - 25

4.6 Adjustments

4.6.1 Adjustment Tools

The following special tools have been used for adjustment of the X-ray System (these tools are not included with the system):

• Collimator Test Tool (Model RMI 161B9).• Beam Alignment Test Tool (Model RMI 162A).• SID Test Stand Tool (Inside Case: RMI Model 175).• Light Meter (Standard).• Unfors Light Meter (Model: Mult-o-meter, Type 577L or equivalent)

4.6.2 Balance Test of the C-arm

NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the X-ray Tube or the Collimator hasto be replaced by a different X-ray Tube or Collimator (different weight).

4.6.2.1 C-arm Balance in Horizontal Position1. Turn the unit ON. Place the C-arm in the horizontal position and open the SID to

maximum meters.

2. Press the Rotation button and check that the C-arm is balanced, that is, the C-arm should not tilt in any direction without force applied at any point. If the C-arm is correctly balanced, go to Section 4.6.3. If not, perform the following steps:

a. Remove the Top Back Cover of the Tube-Collimator Assembly Support.

b. Install or remove the Counterweight Plates required to balance the C-arm, such that the Tube-Collimator Assembly end weighs the same as the Detector Assembly end. See See Figure 4-9. Re-install the Top Cover.

Figure 4-9

Counterweight Plates


4 - 26 • 1600 Configuration and Calibration • Adjustments

4.6.3 To Align of X-ray Beam

1. With a level, check the vertical/horizontal position of the Column. See See Figure 4-10. If necessary, modify the position of the Column with the screws attached to the Column Upper Support.

Figure 4-10

2. Check the level of the Tube-Collimator Assembly. The mechanical installation provides a leveled Assembly; however, you should check that the Tube-Collimator Assembly is parallel with the Detector Head. If necessary reinstall the Tube-Collimator Assembly.

3. Check the level of the Detector Head, first in horizontal position (chest), then in vertical position (table). If necessary, move the Detector assembly up or down with the four Detector Assembly leveling screws. See See Figure 4-11. The Tube-Collimator Assembly must be perfectly aligned with the Detector Head Assembly.

Figure 4-11

4. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 inches).

Levels

DetectorLevelingScrews



5. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator in relation to the Detector Face Plate. The horizontal and transversal position of the light axis projected by the Collimator Lamp must be in line with the axis or Field Sizes marked on the Detector Face Plate.

If needed, modify the Collimator position by carefully loosening and tightening the four Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws (Allen) of the Collimator. See See Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12

6. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate.

7. Adjust the Light Field of the Collimator Lamp to line within carbon fibre faceplate. the rectangle drawn inside the Collimator Test Tool.

8. Center the Beam Alignment Test Tool on the Collimator Test Tool.

9. Make an exposure at 60 kVp / 5 mAs.

10.Acquire the Digital Image in the Control Station and

a. Check that the X-ray Field falls just within the image of the inner rectangle of the Collimator Test Tool.

If an edge of the X-ray Field falls out of the inner rectangle, there is a misalignment of the Light Field with respect to the X-ray Field. The maximum misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm tolerance).

Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws



See Section 4.6.3.1 for Alignment of the Light Field with the X-ray Field.

b. Check that the X-ray Beam is perpendicular to the plane of the Image Receptor. If the Image Receptor is parallel to the Detector Face Plate, the perpendicularity of the X-ray Beam can be checked using the Beam Alignment Test Tool with the Collima-tor Test Tool.

Based on the next illustration (see See Figure 4-13), the criteria for a SID at 1 meter (39.37 inches) is:

• If the image of the two balls overlap (A) the X-ray Beam is perpendicular to within 0.5°.• If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the first circle (B), the X-ray Beam

is about 1.5° away from the perpendicular.• If the image of the top ball (larger shadow) intercepts the second circle (C), the X-ray

Beam is about 3° away from the perpendicular.In cases (A) and (B) perpendicularity is within the tolerance allowed for a SID at 1 meter / 39 in (top ball is within or intercepting the first circle). The third case (C) needs readjustment. See Section 4.6.3.2 for perpendicularity adjustment.

Figure 4-13

c. Check that the X-ray Beam is properly centered with the Image Receptor. The max-imum misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm tolerance).

4.6.3.1 Alignment of Light Field with X-ray FieldTo align the Light Field with the X-ray Field1. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. The Tube-Collimator Assembly must be perfectly

aligned with the Detector Assembly. Check with a level correct horizontal position of both assemblies.

2. Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 in).

3. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate. See See Figure 4-14.

A B C



Figure 4-14

4. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator Test Tool with the light axis projected by the Collimator Lamp.

5. Adjust the Light Field of the Collimator Lamp to the rectangle drawn inside the Collimator Test Tool.

6. Check on the acquired Digital Image, the adjustment required to meet the Light Field with the X-ray Field. Identify the deviation on the axis imaged on the image. See See Figure 4-15 and See Figure 4-16.

CollimatorTest Tool



Figure 4-15 - Light Field Misalignment

Figure 4-16 - Good Fields Alignment

Acquired Digital ImageCollimated Light Field

Collimated X-ray Field

Acquired Digital Image

Collimated Light Field = Collimated X-ray Field



7. Do not remove the Collimator Test Tool from its original position and adjust the Light Field by moving the Collimator Unit and/or the Collimator Lamp.

a. The Collimator Lamp must be ON during Light Field adjustment.

b. Modify the Collimator position by carefully unscrewing and screwing the four Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws (Allen) until the Light Field coincides with the axis reference imaged (numbers and dots) on the acquired image. See See Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17

c. If adjustment is still necessary, modify the position of the Collimator Lamp (refer to the Collimator Manual).

8. Repeat the exposure and procedure until the result is satisfactory. The maximum misalignment allowed is 2% of the SID (for a SID of 1m = 2 cm of tolerance).

4.6.3.2 Perpendicularity Adjustment of X-ray Beam with Image ReceptorIf the perpendicularity is out of tolerance (top ball is out of the first circle), adjust the perpendicularity as follows:1. Place the C-arm in the vertical position. The Tube-Collimator Assembly has to be

perfectly aligned with the Detector Assembly. Check with a level correct horizontal Place the SID at 1 meter (39.37 in).

2. Position the Collimator Test Tool on the Detector Face Plate.

Centering Adjustment and Safety Screws



3. Turn ON the Collimator light and center the Collimator Test Tool with the light axis projected by the Collimator Lamp.

4. Place the Beam Alignment Test Tool centered on the Collimator Test Tool and observe if the shadow of the Beam Alignment Test Tool is projected in an equal proportion around it.

5. Check on the acquired Digital Image the adjustment required to center the top ball mark. The shadow around the Beam Alignment Test Tool can also help to make a first correction.

6. Slightly loosen the four Safety Screws (Allen-6) of the Tube-Collimator Assembly. See See Figure 4-18. If required, perform the following adjustments:

• For horizontal correction, horizontally move the Tube-Collimator Assembly before tight-ening the four Safety Screws.

• For vertical correction loosen or tighten carefully the four Leveling Screws (Allen-3) of the Tube-Collimator Assembly before tightening the four Safety Screws.

• The Angle correction is factory adjusted and it is recommended to not perform any addi-tional correction. If needed, slightly loosen the two Safety Screws of the Pivoting Locking Ratchet and adjust very carefully the two Set screws of the Ratchet to position left right the Lock Tooth. After adjustment, tighten the two Safety Screws again.

7. Repeat the exposure and procedures until the result is satisfactory (top ball must be inside of the first circle).



Figure 4-18

1 Leveling Screws: The Tube-Collimator Assembly moves slightly up or down from one side.

2 Fixing Screws: are adjusted in the middle of the slot and can be moved slightly.

3

Tube Leveling Set Screws and Tube Fixing Screws: are factory adjusted but can be adjusted to obtain the required level of the Tube. In horizontal position, loosen the Tube Fixing Screws, adjust to the left or right with the Set Screws, and re-tighten the Tube Fixing Screws.

4Shims (factory installed/adjusted with extra units included in package): These plates can be added or removed to extend/reduce the length of the Tube-Collimator Assembly.

1

1

1

2

4

3Tube Fixing Screws

Lock Tooth

Set Screws


GENERATOR CONFIGURATION AND CALIBRATION

The following information is included:5.1 “Safety Warnings and Notices” 5.2 “Initial Configuration Procedure” 5.3 “Configuration and Test Switches” 5.4 “Filament and Anode Tests” 5.5 “Generator Service Mode” 5.6 “GSM Program Menu” 5.7 “Customized Configuration” 5.8 “Extended Memory Setting” 5.9 “X-Ray Tube Type Selection” 5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data” 5.11 “Calibration” 5.12 “Generator Checklist”


5 - 2 • Generator Configuration and Calibration •






Generator Configuration and Calibration • Safety Warnings and Notices • 5 - 3



WARNING! Do not supply the mains power until specifically instructed to do so in thisdocument.

WARNING! The main capacitors of the high voltage inverter retain a large portion of theircharge for approximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.

WARNING! Before making any exposure in auto-calibration, verify that the link betweenthe banana plug connections on the HV Transformer is installed.

5.1.2 Installation Safety

WARNING! If the mA station for focal spot change is not configured according to the x-ray tube ratings, the tube filaments may be permanently damaged.

CAUTION! Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.

CAUTION! Auto-calibration can be stopped momentarily by releasing the Handswitchbutton whenever no exposure is in process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration mode before the procedure has been completed.

NOTE: Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the Auto-Calibration button.After a message informs you that Auto-calibration has been cancelled, the GSMmenu is displayed.

NOTE: To switch ON the whole system (Console + Generator), press the ON button onthe Console Housing. To switch OFF the whole system, select the OFF button onthe Main Menu (application).

NOTE: Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document.Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.

NOTE: In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory pre-programmedand cannot be changed.


5 - 4 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Initial Configuration Procedure

5.2 Initial Configuration ProcedureConfiguration provides the initial settings for extended memory and checkout procedures that must be carried out prior to making x-ray exposures. Functional characteristics of this Generator are defined at the time of installation.Calibration data and some configuration data are stored in the extended memory area on a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board in the Power Cabinet.When the initial setup and checkout is completed the Generator will be ready for Calibration.

WARNING! Do not supply the mains power until specifically instructed to do so in thisdocument.

WARNING! The main capacitors of the high voltage inverter retain a large portion of theircharge for approximately three minutes after the unit is turned off.

NOTE: Record all the configuration settings.

The Generator configuration is determined by:• X-ray tube model and use• System requirements • Maximum kV, mA, kW

Specific versions of U24-EPROM on the ATP Console CPU Board and U5-EPROM on the HT Controller Board are based on the Generator configuration. See Figure 5-1.The system configuration and test switches are shown in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1

Dip Switch Location Function

3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board System Configuration

3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board Test

3024SW3 - ATP Console CPU Board Not used for Configuration

3000SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board System Configuration and Test


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Initial Configuration Procedure • 5 - 5

Figure 5-1

J7 J8

3024SW2

3024SW3

3024SW1

U24

ATP Console CPU Board - A3024

3000SW2

U5

HT Controller - A3000 Interface Control - A3009

Power Supply

Filament DriverA3004

Power Cabinet - Front Panel


5 - 6 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Test Switches

5.3 Configuration and Test SwitchesATP Console Dip Switches must be configured with the Generator turned OFF,and they are read when the Generator is turned ON again.

5.3.1 3024SW1 - ATP Console CPU Board

Set the dip switch 3024SW1 in accordance with Table 5-2.

5.3.2 3024SW2 - ATP Console CPU Board

Set the dip switch 3024SW2 verifying that each position is set as in Table 5-3.

Table 5-2

3024SW1 Position Open (OFF) Closed (ON)

1 60 Hz * 50 Hz *2 - Normal -- Application mode.

Exposures are inhibited when Door Interlock Switch is opened.

3 Not Used Not Used4 Not Used Not Used

Generators with High Speed Starter (LV-DRAC) are always set SW1-1 to 60 Hz. In other Generators set SW1-1 in accordance with the Power Line Frequency.

Table 5-3

3024SW2 Position Open (OFF) Closed (ON)

1 Skip transmission to Power Module. Use only for display purposes or Demo Consoles where there is no Power Module. Be sure that J3 connector is not plugged to the ATP Console CPU Board.

Normal -- Application mode.

2 Beep Sound is not emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.

Beep Sound is emitted by the ATP Console CPU Board.

3 Normal -- Application mode. Service Mode.

4 kV Log (Renard) Scale Mode for kV variation (kV changes in logarithmic steps).

kV Lineal Scale Mode for kV variation (Normal mode) (kV changes one by one).


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Configuration and Test Switches • 5 - 7

5.3.3 Self-running Mode

Continously starting and braking the anode produces an overheating in the x-ray tube stator (i.e., during the calibration procedure). The Self-running Mode avoids this overheating. In the Self-running Mode (switch 3243SW4-6 in the ON position), the anode remains running for approximately one minute and rotates at 3300 or 10000 rpm (see Table 5-4).The LV-RRAC enters the Self-running Mode when Preparation is selected three consecutive times only from the console buttons or from the handswitch, and the time between two of the consecutive accelerations is shorter than 30 seconds. See Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2

Table 5-4

3243SW4-6 Function

6Normal = OFF

ON = Self running enabled OFF = Self-running disabled

1 Preparation Signals2 Anode Rotation3 Self-running Mode

1

2

3 3

t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s t<30s

tsr tsr

tsr (time for self-running mode) = approx. 1 minute at 3300 rpm or 10000 rpm


5 - 8 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Filament and Anode Tests

5.4 Filament and Anode Tests

NOTE: Changeover point for small to large filament must be set to 320mA.

CAUTION! If the focal spot switch-over point is changed after mA calibration, the mAstations affected must be re-calibrated.

5.4.1 Filament Driver

Make sure the Generator is Off.Verify that Test dip switch 3000SW2-2 (Filament and Rotor interlock bypass) on the HT Controller Board is in the Off position.Turn the console On and verify that both LEDs (DS1 and DS2) on the Filament Driver Board are On.

5.4.2 Focal Spots Configuration and Test

Determine the mA station where switch-over from Small to Large Focal Spot will take place. The smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot can be any of the available mA station or E01 memory location when is required to configure all mA stations for the Small Focal Spot. This mA station is selected according to the tube rating and/or customer preference.

WARNING! If the mA station for focal spot change is not configured according to the x-raytube ratings, the tube filaments may be permanently damaged.

1. With the generator Off, set dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in On position to permit the service mode.

2. Power On the System. Enter in calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on the GSM program. Select any workstation (WS) of the corresponding X-ray Tube and press the OK button.


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Filament and Anode Tests • 5 - 9

Figure 5-3

3. Select the smallest mA station for the Large Focal Spot using the Increase or Decrease mA buttons.

4. Press the Toggle button to store the select mA station and then press the Confirm or Dismiss buttons to confirm or cancel the process. When it is confirmed, the ATP Console CPU Board emits a double-beep.

5. Exit from calibration mode.


5 - 10 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Service Mode

5.5 Generator Service ModeThe Service Menu allows access to the Generator Service, the Software Upgrade and Settings menus and the Error Log menus.1. Switch ON the System (Console + Generator) by pressing the external ON button on the

Console Housing for two seconds. This starts the application and shows the Main Menu.

The functionality of the controls is as follows:

NOTE: To switch ON the whole System (Console + Generator), press the ON button on theConsole Housing. To switch OFF the whole System, select the OFF button on theMain Menu (Application).

2. Select the Service Mode button on the Main menu.

3. Enter the Service Password (code 2434) on the Service Access Panel.

4. Access the different menus by selecting the required menu button. See Figure 5-4. To return to the Main Menu, press the Exit button.

Table 5-5

Control Function

ON / OFF Switch on the Console Housing (PC)

Switch ON / OFF the whole System

OFF Button on the Main Menu of the Touch Screen Console (application)

Switch OFF the whole System


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Service Mode • 5 - 11

Figure 5-4

Access Screen from Main Menu

ServiceModeMenu


5 - 12 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • GSM Program Menu

5.6 GSM Program MenuThe Generator Service Mode (GSM) program allows access to the service screens for Reading the Exposure Counters, and for Configuration and Calibration procedures. After gaining access to the GSM program, a black Information Area may appear at the lower right corner of the screen, showing some messages about the process (e.g., Power Up the Generator).1. Enter the GSM program by selecting the Generator Service button on the Service Mode

Menu. See Figure 5-5.

NOTE: After pressing the Configuration, Manual Calibration or Auto Calibration buttons andstarting the GSM program the following error message may appear: “Please checkcalibration dip switch and toggle with power off.” This means these functions aredisabled because the position of the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP ConsoleCPU Board is not in Service Mode Allowed. Turn OFF the generator, change thedip switch 3024SW2-3 to Closed (ON) position, turn ON the generator and restart theGSM program.

Figure 5-5

NOTE: During operation of the GSM program, the selected button is displayed as yellow.

2. The Service screens for Read Exposure Counters, Configuration, Manual Calibration and Auto Calibration are displayed after selecting the respective button. Repress the selected button to return to the GSM menu. The Exit button can also be used to return to the GSM menu, especially if the other buttons are disabled.


Generator Configuration and Calibration • GSM Program Menu • 5 - 13

NOTE: The Configuration menu is closed by pressing any Configuration or Exitbuttons. A double-beep will sound confirming the storage of the values set foreach workstation.

3. Select the Close button to exit from the GSM program.

4. Exposure status indicators for Ready and X-ray On are located on the upper right area of the GSM screens. The Information Area displays data related to the service mode, remaining heat units, working mode, errors indicators, etc. See Figure 5-6.

When an error code or message is displayed on the GSM program, select the Reset Error button to clear its indicator.

Figure 5-6

1 Workstation Selected

2 Information Area

3 Exit Button

4 Exposure Indicators

5 Button of Menu Selected

6 Error Indicator

7 Reset Error Button

1

2

3

4

5

6

7


5 - 14 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Customized Configuration

5.7 Customized ConfigurationThis procedure always has to be performed when the ATP Console CPU Board is replaced with a new one.1. Enter in the GSM Program and select the Configuration button. See Figure 5-7.

Figure 5-7

2. Select the first workstation to be configured, by pressing the respective button (only the icon of the selected workstation has a different color). The console displays one of the following values:

3. Set the new value by pressing the corresponding Increase or Decrease buttons. Also set the selected AEC Areas by default for each Workstation in the system.

4. Exit from configuration mode by pressing the Configuration button. A double-beep will sound confirming the process.

5. Exposures made from workstations are only enabled with the internal Preparation and Exposure signals controlled by the Handswitch or Rad Footswitch (connected to the PC Interface Box).

Table 5-6

Display Function Value Description

1st Value Tubes 1 Tube-1 - X1600 or X1600 Plus2nd Value Devices - Working

Mode0 -- Direct Direct (No Bucky) - X1600 or X1600

Plus1 -- Bucky 1 Bucky-1 - NA

3 -- STD Tomo Standard Tomo - NA3rd Value Ion Chambers 1 Ion Chamber-1 - NA


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting • 5 - 15

5.8 Extended Memory Setting

5.8.1 Extended Memory Locations

Miscellaneous configuration and calibration data are stored in the Extended Memory Locations. It is recommended to note the values factory stored in each Memory Location. See Table 5-7.

NOTE: For generators with only one Radiographic X-ray Tube, this tube must beconfigured, calibrated and used as Tube-1.

5.8.2 How to Enter and Store Data in the Extended Memory

The Extended Memory data is entered from the Console when the unit is in service mode. Access to memory locations is indicated below:1. With the Generator OFF, set the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU

Board to the On position to enable service mode.

2. Power ON the System and select the Manual Calibration button on the GSM program.

3. Select any Workstation (WS) using the Up and Down buttons, then press the OK button to enter into calibration mode. See Figure 5-8.

Table 5-7

Memory Location Function Value

E02 TUBE-1 -- Tube type

E03 Low Digital mA Loop Closed (from 10 mA to 80 mA)

E04 AEC-1 calibration

E05 High Digital mA Loop Closed (from 100 mA)

E06 Digital kV Loop Open

E07 Maximum kW (Factory set. Only field changeable to lower value)

E08 AEC-1 tracking

E12 AEC Density Scale

E13 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Delay

E15 TUBE-1 -- Exposure Time adjustment - Ceq kV

* Note.-- Memory Locations not listed are not used.


5 - 16 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting

NOTE: In calibration mode, only the kV and mA parameters can be modified. Values forTime and mAs are factory programmed.

4. Increase the mA value beyond the maximum mA position, one step for each of the memory locations. The mA Display will show the first Extended Memory location (E01), and they will continue sequentially as the Increase mA button is pressed.

5. The values stored in each location are shown on the Calibration Value display after the Read button or the Increase or Decrease buttons are pressed. Since these buttons are also used to increase or decrease the stored values, one number should be added or subtracted from the reading, to obtain the current stored value. Select the new value by pressing the Increase and Decrease buttons. Each time these buttons are pressed the value displayed on the calibration panel is increased or decreased one step.

6. Store the new value by pressing the Store button (Check-summ function).

NOTE: If the Store button is not pressed after a new value is selected, no modified data isretained.

7. Exit from the calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button again.

8. Turn the Generator OFF and set the dip switch 3024SW2-3 on the ATP Console CPU Board in Off position to place the Generator in normal mode.


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Extended Memory Setting • 5 - 17

Figure 5-8

CalibrationValue Panel


5 - 18 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • X-Ray Tube Type Selection

5.9 X-Ray Tube Type SelectionIn order to properly select the X-ray Tube Insert Protection Curves for the Tubes connected to the Generator, perform the following procedure:1. Enter into calibration mode by pressing the Manual Calibration button on the GSM

program. Select one of the workstations related to the X-ray Tube to be configured. Press OK.

2. Select the respective memory location, E02 for Tube-1 (memory location is shown on the mA Display).

3. Identify in 5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data” on page 5-19, the X-ray tube that is being installed and note its tube type number.

4. Set the tube number by pressing the Increase or Decrease calibration buttons until the correct number is showed on the Calibration Value panel.

5. Store the value by pressing the Store button.

6. Verify that the tube code (ID) shown in the mAs Display is the same as the tube code listed in 5.10 “X-Ray Tube Data” on page 5-19. The tube code (ID) can only be read for the selected X-ray Tube after pressing the Store button.

7. If required, repeat this procedure for the other X-ray Tube. Exit from calibration mode.

CAUTION! For Generators with a High Speed Starter, now configure the High Speed X-rayTubes by setting the respective dip switches 3243SW1 and / or 3243SW2 on theControl DRAC Board. (Refer to LV-DRAC - Digital Rotating Anode Controllerdocument).


Generator Configuration and Calibration • X-Ray Tube Data • 5 - 19

5.10 X-Ray Tube DataRefer to the Generator manual for a table with specific x-ray tubes and their corresponding numbers.


5 - 20 • Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration

5.11 Calibration

CAUTION! Calibrate the Generator immediately after Configuration is completed.

Calibration data is entered in digital form and stored in a non-volatile memory chip (U3-EEPROM) located on the HT Controller Board, thus no battery back-up is required.

NOTE: Calibration procedures must be performed in the order listed in this document.Perform only the sections required to calibrate this unit.

5.11.1 Digital mA Loop Open

To achieve the most accurate calibration, this procedure has to be automatically performed by the Generator (Auto-calibration).

Digital mA Loop Open is calibrated by performing the following steps:1. With the Generator power OFF, set:

• Dip switch 3000SW2-2 on the HT Controller Board in OFF position (enables Filament and Rotor Interlocks).

• Dip switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in ON position (Digital mA Loop Open).

2. Turn the Generator ON.

3. Perform the Auto-calibration procedure as described in 5.11.2 “Auto-Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open” for each X-ray Tube in the system.

5.11.2 Auto-Calibration of Digital mA Loop Open

Auto-calibration of the Filament Current Numbers is divided in two procedures related to the mA stations available for the Small or Large Focal Spots.It is recommended to start with the Small Focal Spot (first group) and continue with the Large Focal Spot (second group).

WARNING! Each time the Auto-calibration is started for the small or large focal spot, allcalibration data stored for the filament current numbers of the selected focal spotare automatically set to 344. Therefore, a new complete calibration of thefilament current numbers for this focal spot is required.

Auto-calibration starts with the minimum available mA station for the selected Focal Spot at 50 kV and follows with the other combinations of mA stations for the Focal Spot at the kV


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration • 5 - 21

break points.1. Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button on the GSM

menu.

2. Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the OK button. This workstation has to be one of the previously configured as Direct.

3. Select the Small Focal Spot by pressing the Small button and then press the OK button. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button (Yes or No) on the new screen. See Figure 5-9.

Figure 5-9

4. Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration (second confirmation) by pressing the respective button (Confirm or Dismiss) on the calibration screen. See Figure 5-10.



Figure 5-10

5. Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lit and the Press Prep and Expose message appears on the screen. At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for the Small Focal Spot. See Figure 5-11.

Figure 5-11


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Calibration • 5 - 23

6. Check that the Heat Units capacity available for the X-ray Tube is near or at 100% (HU 0% displayed on the screen).

WARNING! Before making any exposure in auto-calibration, verify that the link betweenthe banana plug connections on the HV Transformer is installed.

7. Keep the Handswitch button fully pressed to perform continuous exposures.

NOTE: In Auto-calibration mode, all technique parameters are factory pre-programmedand cannot be changed.

CAUTION! Auto-calibration can be stopped momentarily by releasing the Handswitchbutton whenever no exposure is in process. Do not exit from Auto-calibration mode before the procedure has been completed.

NOTE: Auto-calibration can be cancelled by pressing the Auto-Calibration button.After a message informs you that Auto-calibration has been cancelled, the GSMmenu is displayed.

If during the Auto-calibration process, an error indication is momentarily shown (e.g., tube overload), it means that at this moment, the Generator cannot calibrate the selected kV / mA combination (because an anode overheated, a space charge occurred, Generator power limit, etc.). In this case, the Generator will continue with Auto-calibration of the following available kV / mA combinations for the selected Focal Spot. At the end of the process it will try to calibrate or calculate the combinations previously uncalibrated. If the Heat Unit’s value displayed is more than 60%, exposures are inhibited momentarily and the message Tube too hot is shown on the screen. This message will disappear and exposures can be made again when the X-ray Tube begins to cool and recovers the Heat Unit’s capacity. At this point, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Unit’s value displayed is close to the 20% before making any exposure.The Generator tries to calibrate each kV / mA combination for ten (10) attempts (maximum). If calibration is cancelled (after ten attempts), the message Auto calibration failure is shown on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and return to the GSM menu. Calibration can also be cancelled due to a space charge occuring during calibration of the lowest kV at the highest mA stations for the Focal Spot selected. The message Auto calibration failure is also shown on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and return to the GSM menu.

WARNING! If auto-calibration is cancelled due to auto-calibration failure, continue theauto-calibration procedure for the other focal spot. Check at the end of theauto-calibration procedure which kV/mA combinations have not been auto-calibrated for each focal spot (these combinations have the filament currentnumber set to 344).



8. When Auto-calibration is successfully performed, the message Auto Calibration OK is displayed on the screen until you press the Auto Calibration button to exit from Auto-calibration mode and return to the GSM menu.

9. Repeat the same procedure for the Large Focal Spot.

10.Enter in Auto-calibration mode by pressing the Auto Calibration button on the GSM menu.

11.Select an available workstation (WS) of the X-ray Tube to be calibrated and press the OK button. This workstation has to be previously configured as Direct.

12.Select the Large Focal Spot by pressing the Large button and then press the OK button.

13.Confirm or leave the Auto-calibration by pressing the respective button on each screen. Auto-calibration is activated when the Auto Calibration button is lit. At this moment, the Generator has checked the mA stations available for the Large Focal Spot.

14.Before starting the exposures, it is recommended to wait until the Heat Unit’s value displayed is close to the 20%.

15.After performing both procedures (for Small and Large Focal Spots), enter in Manual Calibration mode and select each combination of the available mA stations for each Focal Spot at the kV break points (40, 50, 80 and 120 kV). Press the Read button to read on the calibration panel the new value of the Filament Current Number stored for each combination and record the new values in the Data Book.

NOTE: The highest mA station for Small Focal Spot may have numbers larger than thelowest mA station for Large Focal Spot. This is normal.

16.Exit from calibration mode.

17.Perform the Auto-calibration procedure for the second X-ray Tube.

18.Turn the Generator power OFF and set the Dip Switch 3000SW2-4 on the HT Controller Board in the Off position (Digital mA Loop Closed).


Generator Configuration and Calibration • Generator Checklist • 5 - 25

5.12 Generator Checklist1. Introduction2. Identify _____ATP Console CPU Board _____HT Controller Board 4 3. Enter Service Mode _____Complete _____Identify Counters and Error Logs4. Configuration Workstation _____Complete 5. Complete AEC Configuration _____Enable AEC _____ Select Chambers 6. Enter Extended Memory Settings _____Entering Mode _____Tube Type _____AEC Data7. Anode Rotation Test _____Complete 8. mA Closed Loop Auto Calibration _____Small Filament _____Large Filament 9. AEC Calibration_____Complete


DETECTOR CALIBRATION AND CONFIGURATION

Included is the following:6.1 “About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller”6.2 “Adjustments on the LCD Display”6.3 “Half Value Layer Testing”6.4 “Detector Head Calibration”6.5 “AEC Procedure”

Imaging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-004 v5.0 M3.0.206 • June 6, 2007

6 - 2 • Detector Calibration And Configuration •


Version Magellan Version Date Description

2.1.149 December 15, 2005 Manual revision and module creation

2.1.149.1 January 15, 2006 Gain and offset, dark and flat field revision

2.1.149.2 February 9, 2006 Minor revisions to dark and flat fields, revisions to Gain and Offset, addition of Half Layer Testing

2.1.149.3 February 22, 2006 Revisions to Gain and Offset

2.1.151 March 7, 2006 Minor Revisions

4.0 2.1.151 June 12, 2006 Module Part numbers added

4.1 2.1.168 September 20, 2006 Detector Selector added

4.2 2.1.171 October 30, 2006 Minor revision for Magellan 3.1.171

4.3 2.1.171 November 8, 2006 Revision to Half Value Layer

5.0 3.0.206 June 6, 2007 Updates to AEC and Gain and Offset procedures


Detector Calibration And Configuration • About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller • 6 - 3

6.1 About the Thermo Electric Cooler ControllerThe Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC) Controller (700-0108-399) is used to set and maintain the temperature of the camera CCD at -10°C. It is controlled by the workstation via the RS232 connection at J2. See Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1

The power for the PDM is supplied from a +15 VAC, 6.0 A switching power supply. The voltage to the PDM power supply is 100/240 VAC 50/60 Hz 1.0 A. The controller uses a proportional/integral algorithm to maintain the desired CCD temperature set point. This set point is normally at -10°C and is set via software control from the workstation. The controller can be turned on or off in the Configuration Manager by selecting the Generator and Imaging Settings, then Imaging Station Settings, and under the TECC/PDM section of the dialog box, select Configure. See Figure 6-2.


6 - 4 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • About the Thermo Electric Cooler Controller

Figure 6-2


Detector Calibration And Configuration • Adjustments on the LCD Display • 6 - 5

6.2 Adjustments on the LCD DisplayThe PDM display will show the following values from the TEC controller.

• CDD temperature set point in °C.• Current CCD temperature in °C.• Power supply voltage (12-14 volts).• Voltage on the TEC (0 to 15 volts).• Current through the TEC (0 to 6 amps).• Heat sink temperature in °C.• Ambient temperature in °C.

The fan on the controller is only active when the controller is cooling the camera CCD.When the camera CCD has reached the set point value, the TEC voltage will drop into the 4 – 6 volt range with a corresponding drop in the TEC current value. When the TEC cooler is on, the LCD display will show the current value of the CCD temperature every second. The voltage required to keep the CCD at its set point value will vary with room temperature. As the room temperature increases the voltage and current to the TEC will increase to maintain the CCD temperature. At a normal room temperature of 23°C there is a 33°C temperature differential across the TEC. As room temperature goes up this differential also goes up making the controller supply more voltage and current to the TEC to maintain the set point. There is a trip point in the controller that will shut down the cooler if the heat sink goes above 70°C. Normally the heat sink resides in the 40 – 50°C range with the cooler on.


6 - 6 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing

6.3 Half Value Layer Testing

6.3.1 Purpose

To define the procedure for Half Value Layer (HVL) testing of x-ray tubes for use with the Detector Head. This is an important measure of beam characteristic and may affect image quality

6.3.2 Scope

Half value layer should be tested before and after beam hardening and before and after any change of the collimator or tube. Half value layer is the amount of aluminium that reduces the beam intensity by 50%. It is a measure of beam quality. A shift of the x-ray spectrum to higher 'effective' energies as the beam traverses matter is called beam hardening. The pre-filtering that occurs, results in a higher effective energy and thus a larger half value layer. It reduces soft x-rays (or lower energy photons), which contribute to patient dose, and reduces scatter. When there is a need to increase fine detail response, the HVL is reduced.

6.3.3 Equipment

• Calibrated radiation meter • Lead sheet and lead apron (sized larger than 7 cm²). • Aluminum plates: 5 squares of 0.5 mm Al, 5 squares of 1.0 mm Al • Masking tape• Tape measure.• Hard or soft copy of QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet (found in the IDC track-

ing website under IDC – Services Manuals and Procedures).

6.3.4 Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing

1. Ensure that the Collimator is parallel with a flat surface and that the source to image (surface) distance is set to 100 cm.

2. To reduce backscatter, place the radiation meter's probe parallel to and approximately 30 cm above the surface. Place the lead on the surface directly below the probe, with a collimation field of about 6 cm square.

3. Set the kVp to 80, and focal spot to small. Set the mAs to a value that will produce about a 100 mR (850 Gy) radiation meter reading.

4. Record the above settings, as well as information such as serial number and generator type, on the QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet. Also record the dose reading (for no aluminium added) under Part 1: Before.

μ


Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing • 6 - 7

5. Tape 1 mm Al across the face of the collimator, make another exposure, and record the resulting dose.

6. Continue increasing the amount of aluminium added and recording the dose values, until the resulting dose is half (or just below half) of the original value.

7. Using Excel or graph paper, calculate the HVL. See Example Calculation below.

8. The specification for the Detecotr Head is a HVL between 2.5 mm and 2.9 mm Al at 80 kVp. Add filtration to the tube (to increase HVL) or change the collimator (to decrease the HVL) until this specification is achieved.

9. Redo the Half Value Layer Testing procedure to confirm the final HVL, and record the results under Part 2: After.

10.Ensure the Worksheet is completely filled in. Sign and date the document and fax it to IDC, attention Customer Service, (403) 251-1771.

6.3.5 Records

QAL-03-003a Half Value Layer Worksheet

6.3.6 Example Calculation

The following data was taken:

Calculate the mR value that is half of the original unfiltered reading:93.37 mR / 2 = 46.69 mRGraph the data points above. On the graph, draw a horizontal line at the above calculated halved mR reading (for example: 46.69 mR). Determine the mm Al that corresponds to this value. For the example below, the HVL is 1.6 mm Al.

Table 6-1

Thickness of Al placed in beam (mm) 0 1 1.5 2

Radiation Reading (mR) 93.37 57.48 48.2 42.7


6 - 8 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Half Value Layer Testing

Figure 6-3


Detector Calibration And Configuration • Detector Head Calibration • 6 - 9

6.4 Detector Head CalibrationConfiguration of the Calibration is for the Detector Head currently being used for imaging. The Detector Calibration dialog box provides access to configure the following:

• Flat Field and Dark Field correction• Geometric correction• Cropping ROI Offsets• Device Settings• Artefacts• Images

To configure Detector Head Calibrations1. Select the Delcano icon (see Figure 6-4) on the desktop to open the Delcano application.

See Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-4


6 - 10 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • Detector Head Calibration

Figure 6-5

2. Select Xplorer Calibration to open the Detector Calibration dialog box. See Figure 6-6.



Figure 6-6

6.4.1 Device Settings

In the device settings (see Figure 6-7), set the following:• The integration time should be set to no less than 4000 ms. • The Falling-Edge Trigger box should be left checked.• The serial number of the Detector Head should be entered.• Gain and offset for the camera must be set before the Flat Field and Dark Field creation.

Figure 6-7

6.4.2 Gain and Offset

The Gain and Offset for the camera apply to the analog to digital converter (ADC) that digitizes the information from the CCD. The values are adjusted so that the full signal produced by the CCD occupies the range from between 0 and 200 counts to over the saturation point of the ADC, which is 16383.



The offset (in mV) is the set point of the camera. The gain is a multiplying factor. Gain and Offset must be set before Dark Field and Flat Field correction images are created. Once the Gain and Offset are entered for the system, they only need to be changed if the Detector Head or camera electronics are changed.

6.4.2.1 EquipmentDelCano software application

6.4.2.2 Procedure for Determining Gain and Offset1. Turn on the Detector Head.

2. Turn on the acquisition computer. Shut down Magellan.

3. Start the DelCano application and select Camera 1.

NOTE: If the system is a dual camera system (2200), and both have been connected to thecomputer for image acquisition, images from the second detector head may beaccessed by selecting Camera 2 in the Delcano application.

4. Select Xplorer Calibration to display the Detector Calibration dialog box.

5. Set the Gain to 1 and the Offset to 0. Ensure all corrections are UNCHECKED (Flatfield and Darkfield, Geometric Correction, and Charge Trap removal). Select OK.

6. Ensure the camera temperature is stabilized, usually around 263 K or -10°C.

7. Set the SID to 180 cm. If this is not possible, set the SID to 100 cm. Open the collimator blades to include the entire imaging area.

8. Set kVp to 80, mAs to 80, and select a large focal spot. For a 100 cm SID, set the mAs to 40.

9. Select the Slice button and then the Continuous Dig button. A graph of the camera function is displayed.

10.The level should be between 100 and 150 counts (on the Y-axis of the camera function graph). While holding down the left mouse button, select and drag on the graph to magnify the area you want to see. If there is no line present on the graph, you must increase the offset number. If the line is set too high, you must decrease the offset number. Start at 0 and add or subtract in steps of 5 or 10. Valid input settings are integers between –400 and +400.

11.To adjust the offset, select Continuous Dig again to stop the continuous digitize operation. Change the offset in the Detector Calibration dialog box, and then select OK.

NOTE: Before adjusting any values in the Detector Calibration dialog box, the continuousdigitize operation must be stopped. Select the Continuous Dig button to stop or startthis function.



12.Recheck the offset by selecting Continuous Dig again and then repeat steps 10 and 11. Continue until the graph is between 100 and 150 counts.

13.Ensure Continuous Digitize is still running, by seeing small movements in the output.

14.Take the exposure at 80 kVp and 80 mAs, with a large focal spot.

15.The graph will show the exposure with a line rising towards the top of the graph on the Y-axis. If the line is curved, as in Figure 6-8, the dose needs to be increased. If the line is not curved, or is off the top of the graph, skip to step 16. Select Continuous Dig to reset the graph. Increase the mAs and make another exposure.

Figure 6-8 : Unsaturated CCD

16.If the graph still looks like Figure 6-8, repeat step 15.

17.If the line rises rapidly off the graph (Figure 6-9) (and the gain is still equal to 1), then this is the final gain value and therefore the next step in this procedure can be skipped.



Figure 6-9 : ADC Saturation (≥16383 counts)

18.Observe the level of the straight line as it rises, and note the maximum value. The maximum value in Figure 6-8 is about 12750 counts – this indicates the gain is not set high enough. The maximum value needs to be just above 16383 counts, or in other words, one gain step off the graph. Continue to go up in gain steps until the signal rises to just off the top of the graph as in Figure 6-9, while using the smallest gain value possible to do this. To adjust the gain and retest, do the following:

• Select Continuous Dig to stop the continuous digitize operation. • Change the gain in the Detector Calibration dialog box (see Table 7), and then select OK. • Select Continuous Dig. If the line is not at the bottom of the graph, wait until it is. • Re-expose the system.



Figure 6-10 Saturated CCD (≤16383 counts)

19.When the correct number for the gain is achieved, double-check the offset to ensure the number of counts on the Y-axis with no exposure is set between 100 and 150 counts. Recheck as in steps 10 to 12.

20.If the offset changes in the previous step, the gain must be checked again. Recheck with steps 14 to 18.

21.If the system is a dual camera system (2200), and both have been connected to the computer for image acquisition, select Camera 2 and repeat steps 3 to 20 with the second detector head.

22.If the gain or offset has been changed, all other calibrations including Flat Field, Dark Field, F#, and AEC must be redone. Remember to turn on corrections after all changes are completed.



6.4.2.3 Table of Gain Steps

6.4.3 Procedure for Measuring Exposure

For radiation meters that have unshielded probes, the radiation is measured in free-air to avoid backscatter, and then the radiation at the desired SID is calculated from these results. The calculation is as follows:

DESE = DM * (SPD / SID) 2

where• DESE is the system entrance exposure dose• DM is the measured dose from the radiation meter• SID is the source to imager distance in centimetres• SPD is the source to probe distance in centimetres

For example, for a SID of 180 cm (70 in), we suggest a measuring distance of SPD = 127.3 cm (50.1 in). This gives a simple factor of 2. In other words, divide any measured reading by 2 to give the reading at a SID of 180 cm.For a SID of 100 cm (40 in), a measuring distance of SPD = 70.7 cm (27.8 in) will give the same factor of 2.

6.4.3.1 To Measure the ExposureSee Figure 6-11 below for a diagram of the set-up.1. Lay a lead sheet or lead apron on the floor to reduce backscatter.

2. Make a stand for the radiation meter's probe on the lead sheet with phone books or other such support to allow the probe to be positioned at least 25 cm from the floor (the probe is positioned perpendicular to the tube axis).

Table 7

Step Value Step Value Step Value

1 1 12 1.379 23 2.2222 1.026 13 1.429 24 2.3533 1.053 14 1.481 25 2.54 1.081 15 1.538 26 2.6675 1.111 16 1.6 27 2.8576 1.143 17 1.667 28 3.0077 1.176 18 1.739 29 3.3338 1.212 19 1.818 30 3.6369 1.25 20 1.905 31 4

10 1.29 21 2 32 4.44411 1.333 22 2.105



3. Place the radiation meter's probe at the centre of the beam (indicated by the light collimator) at the calculated SPD distance from the focal spot (127.3 cm for 180 cm SID, or 70.7 cm for 100 cm SID). The distance should be measured to the centre of the chamber.

4. Collimate the x-ray beam to only cover the probe with no more than 2 centimetre margins.

5. Attach a 1 mm copper filter.

6. Set the kVp to 80 and focal spot size to large. Set the mAs to a starting value of 80 for 180 cm SID and 25 for 100 cm SID.

7. Make the exposure and divide the measured exposure by 2 to determine the exposure that the Detector Head would receive at the faceplate. Change the mAs setting to obtain the desired exposure of 8 mR (70 µGy) at the faceplate. Record the final mAs.

8. Once at an mAs that will give the closest reading to the required dose, move the source to fine tune the dose reading to within ±0.1 mR (1 µGy).

9. Measure the final source-to-probe distance. Multiply this value by (or 1.4142) to determine the corrected SID distance. Record the final corrected SID.

10.Before proceeding with the rest of the procedure, reposition the tube to produce a horizontal beam at the corrected SID, and open the collimator to fully cover but not exceed the imaging area by more than 2 cm.

11.If Delcano or Magellan was running during this test, reject any images that may have been captured due to scatter.

2



Figure 6-11

1 Source2 Radiation Meter Probe3 Support4 Lead

1

2

3

4

127.

3 cm

(50.

1 in

)

> 25 cm (9.8 in)



6.4.4 Dark Field Correction

The purpose of the following is to define the procedure for producing the Dark Field corrections for use with the CCD camera used in the Detector Heads.A Dark Field is an “image” taken without any light. Thermal processes within the CCD cause electrons to be trapped just as if they had been created by the capture of light photons. This is called dark current. When an image is read from the CCD, there is no way to tell which electrons are thermally generated and which actually represent captured light. The amount of dark current is proportional to the temperature of the CCD and the length of the exposure. That is why the CCD in the camera is cooled to around –10°C. Even so, we need to determine the level of dark current that we can expect to see in an exposure of a certain length and correct for it. Dark Fields for use in the Detector Heads are made by averaging many individual dark frames. The signal to noise ratio of the resulting Dark Field is increased by the square root of the number of individual dark frames. It is important to ensure that darkfields are matched to the exposure duration. An 8 second darkfield will not provide the correct adjustment for a 1 second exposure. Although all CCD chips are made to the same specification, variations in manufacture will mean that the correction is different for every system. This procedure must therefore be followed for each system. It is not acceptable to use the darkfield correction from one system on another system. Dark current characteristics may change over the life of a system. It is therefore good practice to update the Dark Field correction for a system as part of regular maintenance.

6.4.4.1 EquipmentSoftware is needed for producing images and Dark Fields. This procedure will refer to the use of the DelCano application and the Magellan 3 or Sirius software.

6.4.4.2 Configuring Dark Field CorrectionTo configure Dark Field correction1. Turn on the Detector Head.

2. Start either the DelCano or Magellan 3 software.

3. If using DelCano, select the Xplorer Calibration button. See Figure 6-12. If using Magellan, first select the Configuration Manager, then, select the Generator and Imaging Settings and then Imaging Station Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations dialog box (Figure 6-13). Select Settings. See Figure 6-14.



Figure 6-12



Figure 6-13

Figure 6-14

4. In the Detector Calibration dialog box, (see Figure 6-14) ensure Charge Trap Removal is turned OFF and Geometric Correction is turned OFF. Select Apply.




6. In the Flat Field and Dark Field Correction area of the Detector Calibration dialog box, select Configure to open the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box. See Figure 6-15.

Figure 6-15

7. Select the number of images you want the program to take (recommended 64).

8. Set the Integration Time to 125 or to the time in milliseconds that best matches the actual integration time for the images you expect to correct. The integration time is not the same as x-ray exposure time since the camera will continue to integrate while the light output from the scintillator decays.

9. Indicate whether this Dark Field image is for correcting binned or unbinned images. Binned images are acquired in High Efficiency POD mode and unbinned images are acquired for High Resolution POD mode. To correct for both types of images, first collect



the binned images and then collect the unbinned images by repeating the next two steps and changing the checkbox in between.

10.Select Acquire Images. Acquiring images takes several minutes.

11.Select Save Dark Field Image. Give an appropriate file name (including number of images and integration time) for the Dark Field image and save the image in a directory set up for correction images. This Dark Field image is specific for this Detector Head unit.

12.Continue with the Flat Field Correction (see Section 6.4.5, “Flat Field Correction”) or select OK to close the dialog box. If the last Dark Field image acquired was unbinned then Flat Field Correction will continue automatically.

13.In the Dark Field paths area of the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the + button beside the list of Dark Field images. This opens a file selection window where the newly acquired Dark Field image(s) can be located. Use the ? button to display the Dark Field image properties (Figure 6-16).Use the - button to delete any inappropriate images. This step must be completed for your newly created Dark Fields to be used.

Figure 6-16

NOTE: The Apply Flat Field and Dark Field Correction box should be checked for diagnosticpatient images.

14.To apply the Dark Field Correction, ensure the Flat Field Correction has been created, then select the Apply Flatfield and Darkfield Correction check box in the Detector Calibration dialog box.

15.Select OK to close the Detector Calibration dialog box.

6.4.5 Flat Field Correction

The following is to define the procedure for producing the Flat Field correction reference images for use with the Detector Head. A Flat Field is an image taken with even x-ray illumination. Ideally, every pixel would record the same intensity level. In practise this is never the case. Different pixels will react slightly differently to the same amount of light. As well, it is almost impossible to ensure truly even



illumination as the x-ray source, scintillator and optics all play a part in distorting the image. The Flat Field corrects for much of this non-uniformity by measuring how the pixels vary. Flat Fields for use in the Detector Head are made by averaging many individual flat frames. Since a uniform x-ray illumination is impossible to achieve, the correction will also correct, to some extent, for lack of uniformity in the x-ray field. It is important that Flat Fields are matched to the exposure conditions. Although all Detector Head components are made to a fixed specification, variations in manufacture means that the correction is different for every system. This procedure must therefore be followed for each system. It is not acceptable to use the Flat Field correction from one system on another system. Flat Field characteristics may change over the life of a system. It is therefore good practice to update the Flat Field correction as part of regular maintenance. The Flat Field image also depends on the individual x-ray tube and generator, and the Source to Imager Distance (SID) used. The Magellan 3 software uses a database to predict what SID will be used for the next image and preloads the Flat Field taken at the closest SID to that.

NOTE: Flat Field calibration usually follows Dark Field calibration.

6.4.5.1 EquipmentSoftware is needed for producing images and Flat Fields. This procedure will refer to the use of the DelCano application and the Magellan 3 software applications.

6.4.5.2 Configuring Flat Field CorrectionTo configure the Flat Field correction1. Turn on the Detector Head.

2. Start either the DelCano or Magellan software.

3. If using DelCano, select the Xplorer Calibration button. See Figure 6-17. If using Magellan, first select the Configuration Manager, then, select the Generator and Imaging Settings and then Imaging Station Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations dialog box (Figure 6-18). Select Settings. See Figure 6-19.



Figure 6-17



Figure 6-18

Figure 6-19

4. In the Detector Calibration dialog box, (see Figure 6-19) ensure Charge Trap Removal is turned OFF and Geometric Correction is turned OFF. Select Apply.




6. In the Flat Field and Dark Field Correction area of the dialog box, select Configure to open the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box. See Figure 6-20.

Figure 6-20

7. Use an existing unbinned Dark Field (from the same camera) by selecting the checkbox Use Existing Dark Field Image, or take a new unbinned Dark Field (see 6.4.4 “Dark Field Correction”).

8. Move the x-ray tube to the SID that will be used. Set the kVp and mAs to the settings recommended in Table 6-1 or to those required for your particular task. Open the



collimators to expose the entire imaging area of the Detector Head, but do not expose more of the device than necessary. Remove the grid.

9. Select the number of images you wish to take (usually 16 or 32). The more images that are taken, the better the correction will be. Select the SID in the SID list.

10.Take an exposure. You will be prompted to take additional images.

11.When all the images are acquired, the Save Flat Field Image button is enabled. Save the image. Give an appropriate file name (including number of images and SID) to the Flat Field image and save it in a directory set up for the correction images. This Flat Field image is specific to this Detector Head unit at the specified SID and the specific x-ray tube and generator used.

12.You may change the SID and acquire another Flat Field correction image. Flat Field corrections should be created for each commonly used SID.

13.Select OK to close the Flat Field and Dark Field Configuration dialog box.

14.In the Flat Field paths area of the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the + button beside the list of Flat Field images. This opens a file selection window where the newly acquired Flat Field image(s) can be located. Use the ? button to display the Flat Field image properties (Figure 6-21).Use the - button to delete any inappropriate images. This step must be completed for your newly created Flat Fields to be used.

Figure 6-21

Table 6-1 - Recommended kVp and mAs settings for different SIDs

SID kVp mAs

100 cm (40 in) 70 3140 cm (56 in) 70 4180 cm (72 in) 110 - 120 3 - 5210 cm (83 in) 110 - 140 3 - 5220 cm (87 in) 110 - 140 3 - 5



NOTE: The Apply Flat Field and Dark Field Correction box should be checked for diagnosticpatient images.

15.To apply the Flat Field Correction, select the Apply Flat Field and Dark Field Correction checkbox in the Detector Calibration dialog box.

16.Select OK to close the Detector Calibration dialog box.

6.4.6 Running the f# Wizard

After Gain and Offsets and Flat Fields and Dark Filelds are configured you must run the f# Wizard, located at C:\Magellan2\FnumWizard.exe. To run the f# wizard, a radiation meter that gives readings in mR and a 1 mm medical grade copper plate are required.

6.4.7 Geometric Correction

1. Insert the accompanying configuration CD into the workstations CD tray.

2. Create a new folder titled IDC in the workstations C: drive.

3. Copy the XMap and YMap from the configuration CD into the newly created folder.

4. From the Detector Calibration dialog box, click on the button to the right of the XMap and YMap fields to set a path to the XMap and YMap locations on the C: drive.

5. Check Apply Geometric Correction to automatically apply geometric correction to all incoming images. See Figure 6-22.

NOTE: The Apply Geometric Correction checkbox should be checked for diagnosticpatient images.

Figure 6-22

NOTE: The Configure button is only used in the factory.

6. Check the appropriate rotation to set how all incoming images should be automatically rotated to deal with Detector Head orientation.



6.4.8 Cropping ROI Offsets

Cropping ROI Offsets remove additional rows or columns of pixels from the edges of an image. These values are set by inserting the required number of pixels (in multiples of 4) to be removed from each edge. Cropping ROI Offsets should be used if there are unnecessary information or pixels around the edge of an image that affects image processing. The Cropping ROI Offsets is applied only when Geometric Correction is applied. The Cropping ROI Offsets are applied to the image after the rotation is applied. See Figure 6-23.Selecting the Reset button sets all the values to 0.

Figure 6-23

6.4.9 Artefact Removal Procedure

Charge Trap Removal should only be checked if the camera has a chip defect configured. See Figure 6-24. Please refer to the Artefact Removal Procedure.

Figure 6-24

6.4.9.1 Artefact Removal ProcedureThis procedure requires the DelCano application.

NOTE: Artefact removal is done after completion of Flat Field and Dark Field correction ifartefacts are present, or anytime a new constant artefact appears.

1. Ensure that the power to the unit is turned on.

2. Start the DelCano Application and select Xplorer Calibration.

3. In the Detector Calibration dialog box uncheck the following:

• Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections• Apply Geometric Correction• Charge Trap Removal

4. Make note of which selections where changed and select the Apply button.

5. Ensure the camera temperature is stabilized at approximately -10°C.



6. Make an exposure of the entire imaging receptor at 180 cm SID with the grid removed using a small focus, 70 kVp and 5 mAs.

7. Select Configure beside the Charge Trap Removal checkbox. See Figure 6-24 above. This opens the Chip Defect Editor dialog box. See Figure 6-25.

Figure 6-25

8. Select New to create new correction coordinates.

9. Find the artefact on the newly acquired image by magnifying and scrolling through the image piece by piece (to zoom in DelCano, use the mouse wheel holding down the Ctrl key and use the left button to pan the image). Apply a narrow window and adjust the level as required to help locate the artefact.

10.After locating the artefact, find the X co-ordinate. Place the cursor on the upper, left tip of the artefact and read out the X co-ordinate in the lower right hand corner of the DelCano screen. This is the number that you enter beside the Left field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box.

11.Now find the Y co-ordinate by placing the cursor on the superior tip of the artefact and read out the Y co-ordinate in the lower right hand corner of the DelCano screen. This is the number that you enter beside the Top field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box.

12.If the artefact is one pixel in width enter 1 in the Width field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box. If wider, find the width of the defect check X co-ordinate and enter the number of pixels to get the width.

13.On the Y co-ordinate, count from the top number to the bottom number to get the number of pixels. Enter this number in the Height field in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box.

14.Select OK in the Chip Defect Editor dialog box to compare the removal.

15.Take another exposure at the same settings. Review the image closely and compare with the prior image to ensure the defect is eliminated.

16.If the artefact is still there as in the previous images, check the coordinates and repeat steps 6 to 15. Note that the removal will not remove every defect 100%. You may also have some residual effects or some noticeable blurring as a result of the artefact removal.



17.Referring to the notes you made in step 4, reset the Detector Calibration dialog box accordingly and enable Charge Trap Removal.

18.Select OK.


Detector Calibration And Configuration • AEC Procedure • 6 - 33

6.5 AEC ProcedureDepending on the generator used, the AEC Procedure will be calibrated differently. If using a CPI Generator, follow Section 6.5.1, “CPI Generator – AEC Procedure”. If using a Sedecal Generator, follow Section 6.5.3, “Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure”.

6.5.1 CPI Generator – AEC Procedure

6.5.2 Detector Selector

NOTE: If you are installing the 2200 system with two Detector Heads, it is convenient toview the Detector Selector instead of the Gen UI when performing the AECprocedure. To view the Detector Selector and hide the Gen UI, click on the Gen UIand press the Alt and F4 keys. This displays the Detector Selector, enabling you toselect between Detector Heads. See Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26

NOTE: Generator Calibrations must be completed.

NOTE: All Detector Head Calibrations must be completed (Gain/Offset, Dark Fields/FlatFields, f# Calibrations).

6.5.2.1 The AEC Calibration The purpose of the AEC Calibration is to calibrate the Automatic Exposure Control (AEC).

6.5.2.2 Equipment Needed To calibrate photo timing the following equipment is needed:

• Attenuator, 15 cm (6 in) of water (water is the preferred attenuator).• 1.0 mm Cu (99.9% pure)• Laptop with Genware software • 9 pin female/female Null modem cable

6.5.2.3 Assignment of Chambers1. To verify assignment of chambers to the corresponding controls, place a sheet of copper on

a cell.

2. Take an exposure of 70 kVp, 5 mAs, at 100 cm for each individual cell.

3. Verify that when the covered cell is selected, the mAs reported back by the generator is higher than the uncovered cells.


6 - 34 • Detector Calibration And Configuration • AEC Procedure

4. Repeat this for each cell. If the assignment is incorrect, consult the AEC documentation and set the correct jumper or dip switch configuration.

6.5.2.4 Balancing of the AEC Ion Chambers Balance the three AEC cells by doing the following: 1. Collimate the x-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields.

2. Place the 1.0 mm Cu over the center cell and take a low technique exposure (60 kVp, 20 mAs).

3. Record the ms value.

4. Do the same with the left and right Fields and record the ms value. (This verifies that the left and right cell correlates with what is selected at the Touch Screen.)

5. Adjust the Field A and Field C potentiometers on the AEC preamplifier so that the ms values correlate with the center cell.

NOTE: Do not adjust the Center Field (B field).

6. Remove the Cu attenuator and tape it to the collimator.

7. Take a low technique exposure and double check the ms value of all three cells. Adjust if necessary.

6.5.2.5 AEC Calibration Procedure To perform the AEC calibration:1. Place the stand in the vertical (table) position. If the stand is an 1500, this must be done in

chest position.

2. Set the tube to a 100 cm (40 in) SID.

3. Insert the 100 cm (40 in) grid into the Detector Head.

4. Place the attenuator on the faceplate (or on a stand of some kind for the 1500). Use two 10 cm acrylic sheets or 15 cm water. Cover all of the AEC Fields with the attenuator.

5. Collimate 13 mm (½ in) past the edge of the attenuator.

6. Turn on the Generator.

7. When prompted, use the password 1973 to put the Generator into Service mode.

8. Attach the null modem cable between the serial port of the laptop and the serial port of the touch screen.

9. In Service mode select Data Link.

10.Start the Genware software on the laptop. See Figure 6-27.



Figure 6-27

11.Select the AEC calibration button (see Figure 6-28) to display the AEC Calibration Points dialog box. See Figure 6-29.

Figure 6-28



Figure 6-29

12.Select the AEC Setup Tab and do the following:

a. Select Channel 1 for Channel Number.

b. Select Ion for Chamber Type.

c. Select All Fields for Fields.

d. Select 1, 2, and 3 for F.S. Active.

e. Set R, C, L Field Comp to 0.

13.Set F.S. 1 Gain to 10. Set F.S. 2 and 3 Gain to 10. Select the FS Options Tab, the following options must be selected:

a. Set RLF Compensation for all appropriate fields to 0.

b. Set Multiple Spot Compensation to 0.

14.Select the Density Tab, and enter the following values as in Table 6-2.Table 6-2

Density Step Values

1 252 50



15.Select the FS Reference Tab to enter the voltage values between 0 and 10 VAC to make a kV characteristic curve.

In the Radiography Terminal (left side of screen) select the following:

a. 320 mA and a Density of 0.

NOTE: KV will be selected in the FS Reference tab.

b. The centre cell (highlighted green) for the Fields

c. Large Focus for Focus

d. AEC for Techniques

e. Film Screen 2 for Film Screen

f. The receptor that you have programmed for the Receptor.

16.Start Magellan 3.

NOTE: If operating Magellan 2.0.111, Step 17 will need to be completed. If operatingMagellan 2.1.136 or later the film speed has been preset, so proceed to Step 18.

17.Select the Configuration Manager icon (see Figure 6-30) and select the Parameter Editor (see Figure 6-31). In the Anatomy/Projection Pairs list, select Calibration. See Figure 6-32.

Figure 6-30

3 754 100-1 25-2 50-3 75-4 100

Table 6-2

Density Step Values



Figure 6-31

Set the film speed for view: a. HE to 400 film speed and an SID of 100 cm.

b. HR to 200 film speed and an SID of 100 cm.



Figure 6-32

18.Create a Test Patient (Anonymous Study–see Figure 6-33) with the anatomy set to Calibration and the projection to HE. See Figure 6-34.

Figure 6-33



Figure 6-34

19.In the AEC Calibration Points dialog box of Genware, select Film Screen 2.

20.Select the FS Reference tab.

21.Place the cursor in the 75 kVp window. Selecting this will automatically select the kVp in the Radiography Terminal.

22.Enter the value of 4.0 in the 75 kVp window and select Apply.

23.Take an exposure. The f# in Magellan should read 0.0. If the f# does not read 0.0, adjust the Master Gain on the AEC Preamp. Keep adjusting the AEC Master Gain and take exposures until the f# reads 0.0.

NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp after the f# reads 0.0 for 75 kVp.

24.Select the 65 kVp window.

25.Take an exposure. The f# should read 0.0. If the f# does not read 0.0, adjust the value in the 65 kVp window and select Apply. Keep adjusting the value and take exposures until the f# reads 0.0. Select Apply after each change in the kVp window value.

NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp.

26.Repeat step 25 for 55 kVp, 50 kVp, 85 kVp, 95 kVp, 110 kVp, and 130 kVp. For 110 and 130 kVp’s add more attenuation to prevent low mAs values (add 5 cm water).

27.Repeat step 15 using film screen 1.

28.Repeat step 18 using film speed 200 for HR.

29.Repeat step 19 using film screen 1.

30.Repeat steps 22 through 26 only adjusting the value in each kV window.

NOTE: Do not adjust the master gain on the AEC Preamp.

31.Exit out of the AEC Calibration Points dialog box and Genware.

32.Place the Generator back into the User Mode.



6.5.3 Sedecal Generator – AEC Procedure

Prior to AEC the Generator Calibration, Focal Spot Configuration and Detector Head Calibrations must be completed

6.5.3.1 Equipment NeededThe following equipment is required:

• 15 cm (5.9 in) water in collapsible plastic container is the recommended attenuator. • 1.0 mm Cu.

6.5.3.2 Assignment of Chambers1. To verify assignment of chambers to the corresponding controls, place a sheet of

copper on a cell.

2. Take an exposure of 70 kVp, 5 mAs, at 100 cm for each individual cell.

3. Verify that when the covered cell is selected, the mAs reported back by the generator is higher than the uncovered cells.

4. Repeat this for each cell. If the assignment is incorrect, consult the AEC documentation and set the correct jumper or dip switch configuration.

6.5.3.3 Balancing the Ion Chambers

NOTE: Complete prior to performing the AEC calibration.

Balance the three AEC cells using the following: a. Collimate the x-ray beam so that it completely covers all three fields.

b. Place the copper (1 mm) attenuator over the collimator.

c. Select a low technique exposure (60 kVp at 20 mAs).

d. Select the center cell and take the exposure.

e. Record the ms value.

f. Repeat steps c and d for the left and right cells.

g. Adjust the Field A and Field C potentiometers on the AEC preamplifier so that their ms values correlate with the center cell.

h. When the three AEC cells are balanced, remove the copper attenuator.

6.5.3.4 To Perform the AEC Calibration 1. Place the stand in the Table position.

2. Set SID to 100 cm (40 in).

3. Insert the 100 cm (40 in) grid.

4. Place the attenuator on the faceplate covering all of the ion chambers.



5. Set the jumper on the AEC Control Board to Position A

• (A3012-01/02/05) use JP3 • (A3012-06/07) use JP2

6. Ensure the dip switch on board 3024 SW2 position 3 is in the closed ON position.

7. Start the Magellan 3 Application. See Figure 6-35.

Figure 6-35

NOTE: In versions of Magellan 2.1.149 and later, omit steps 8, 9, and 10 as these steps areautomatically completed.

8. Open the Configuration Manager. See Figure 6-36.

Figure 6-36

9. Select the Parameter Editor and select Calibration in the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree. See Figure 6-37.



Figure 6-37

10.Display the HE Details by selecting HE and Custom and set the Film Speed on HE to 400. Similarly, select HR and set the Film Speed on HR to 200.

11.Turn on the Generator.

12.Put the Generator into Service mode and select Manual Calibration.

13.Ensure the value in Memory locations E04 is 70. The range for AEC calibration numbers is from 20–120.

NOTE: A value closer to 70 will increase AEC accuracy.



14.Enter into User Mode by selecting the Go to User Mode button.

15.On the Console:

• RAD Menu: 70 kVp, 320 mA, Large Focus and 1 second back-up time. See Figure 6-38.• AEC Menu: Center Cell, Density 0, and Medium Film Screen. See Figure 6-39.

Figure 6-38



Figure 6-39

16.Collimate to the edge of the attenuator. Leave 13 mm (.5 in) of light around the attenuator.

17.In the Magellan Interface start an Anonymous Study. See Figure 6-40.

Figure 6-40

18.In the Anatomy and Projection dialog box, set the anatomy as Calibration and projection as HE.

19.Make an exposure using the technique described in step 15.

20.Adjust the Master Gain on the preamplifier of the AEC until the f# reads 0.0. If the f# is not 0, adjust the Master Gain counterclockwise to increase the f# and clockwise to decrease the f#. Make exposures as necessary to verify the f# at 0.

21.Check other film/screen speeds by selecting them on the Workstation or Touch Screen. As in Step 10 above, change the film speed for the anatomy Calibration and the view HE and HR (HR 200 speed for slow, HE for both 400 speed for medium and 800 speed for fast).



22.Check if the f# still reads 0.0 by making exposures and increasing and decreasing the kVp by ±10 kVp respectively. If it does not track properly the following procedure should occur:

a. Go to the Manual Calibration Menu.

b. Check that the Memory Location E08 has a Value of 000. If not, set it to 000.

c. If the f# at 55 kVp has to be decreased and the f# above 80 kVp has to be increased then increase the Tracking value by one.

d. If the f# at 55 kVp has to be increased and the f# above 80 kVp has to be decreased then decrease the Tracking value by one.

e. Enter the new value in accordance to the table below, and store it by selecting the Store button.

f. Remove the water attenuator and exit Calibration/Service mode.Table 6-3 - kVp Tracking

NOTE: The Master Gain Potentiometer and the Field B (center cell) Potentiometer should notbe adjusted further. See Figure 6-41.

AEC-kVp Tracking Curve

+10 +9 +8 +7 +6 +5 +4 +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10

Value to Enter in the Memory Location

10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246



Figure 6-41 AEC kVp Tracking CurveD

AC

Out

put i

n B

yte

(8 B

it) (U

3-2

of A

EC C

ontro

l Boa

rd)


SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE

The following sections are included:7.1 “Acceptance Procedure”7.2 “Detector Head Installation Checklist”


7 - 2 • System Acceptance Procedure •



3.0 August 29, 2005 Module revision

3.1 November 3, 2005 Image Update

3.2 January 15, 2006 New Acceptance Procedure

3.3 February 24, 2006 Revisions to Acceptance Procedure

4.0 June 12, 2006 Module Part numbers added

4.1 August 15, 2006 Minor Revision

4.2 December 22, 2006 Revisions to the Acceptance Testing Procedure


System Acceptance Procedure • Acceptance Procedure • 7 - 3

7.1 Acceptance Procedure

7.1.1 Purpose

To define the procedure and acceptance criteria to be used by IDC staff for verifying system performance of the Detector Head.

7.1.2 Scope

This procedure is to be performed as part of the physics site acceptance tests at the time of installation of a system. It must also be performed after adding any desired beam filtration to the X-Ray Tube.Parts of this procedure have been copied or modified from an original paper on CR acceptance tests by Ehsan Samei of Duke University. The author’s permission to use the material is gratefully acknowledged. We have also incorporated the recommended procedures for CR acceptance tests proposed by the American Association of Physicists in Medicine (AAPM) Task Group 10. This document outlines the quality testing procedures for the digital x-ray systems. The procedures require an x-ray source and a display device (soft- or hard-copy) previously evaluated for satisfactory performance. It is recommended that this inspection be performed annually.

7.1.3 Responsibility

It is the responsibility of IDC staff to follow this procedure when testing new installations or when performing annual maintenance. The procedure is also recommended for hospital staff performing QC checks on the system.

7.1.4 Equipment

To perform the Acceptance Procedure, the following equipment is required:• Copper and aluminium filters (1.0 mm Al, 1.0 mm Cu, 0.5 mm Cu)• Calibrated radiation meter• Stand or holder for the radiation meter (ex: phone books)• Lead sheet or lead apron• IDC low contrast phantom, or equivalent down to at least 1.5%• Lead or steel ruler with x-ray visible markings (for edge and size tests)• Good quality line-pair phantom up to 5 lp/mm frequencies• Masking tape• A hard or soft copy of the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Test-

ing Worksheet)


7 - 4 • System Acceptance Procedure • Acceptance Procedure

• Inspection is performed using the DelCano software to obtain images from the device. Do not use Magellan or for these tests as they lack the image analysis tools that are required.

7.1.5 Acceptance Testing Procedure

NOTE: The following set of instructions is given for a single-detector head system. For dual-detector head systems, such as the 2200, perform the full acceptance testing processfor each of the detector heads separately. If both detector heads have been connectedto the computer for image acquisition, images from each detector head may beaccessed by toggling between Camera 1 and Camera 2 in the Delcano application.

7.1.5.1 Start-up1. Fill in the top portion of the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing

Worksheet) with the location, detector head serial #, generator type, etc. Each subsequent step of this procedure follows the Results section of the Certificate of Quality. When filling in the worksheet, do not leave blanks. If there are no concerns, note that there are no concerns. For dual-camera systems, two separate copies of the Acceptance Testing Worksheet need to be filled out.

2. Turn on the detector head.

3. Start the Delcano software.

4. Set the SID (Source-to-Image Distance) to 180 cm, or if that is not possible, set the SID to 100 cm.

7.1.5.2 Physical Inspection/Inventory1. Check the system serial number against the Acceptance Testing or Prior Compliance

Inspection Reports.

2. Ensure the unit is free from physical defects and is functional. Ensure the grid mechanism allows smooth insertion and removal of the grid. Remove the grid for all of the following tests.

3. Make a note on the QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality worksheet of any concerns or, if there are none, note that there are none.

7.1.5.3 Temperature ControlDuring the tests described in this procedure, note the temperature of the CCD and ensure that it remains at -10°C ± 0.5°C at all times. Record the largest variation from -10 °C on the Certificate of Quality worksheet.

7.1.5.4 Gain and Offset, Flat Field and Dark Field CorrectionsBefore continuing, ensure the following are completed:

• Gain and Offset have been properly set. See Section 6.4.2, “Gain and Offset”.• Acquire Dark Field and Flat Field Correction images with no filtration applied. See

Section 6.4.4, “Dark Field Correction” and Section 6.4.5, “Flat Field Correction”.



7.1.6 Exposure Calibration

The tests in this procedure require specific input radiation, as seen in Table 7-1. Determine the appropriate mAs values to produce this input radiation:1. Determine if the radiation meter's probe has a shielded backing or not. An un-shielded

probe is usually cylindrical (ex: Radcal), whereas a shielded probe is usually flat (ex: Unfors).

2. If using a radiation meter that has a probe with no shielded backing, use the procedure in Section 7.1.6.10 “Procedure for Measuring Exposure” on page 7-18, then continue after Table 7-1.

3. Attach the shielded radiation meter's probe to the faceplate in the centre of the beam (indicated by the light collimator). If the detector head is installed under a table, put the probe on the faceplate under the table. Collimate to a few centimetres around the probe.

4. Tape the filtration to the collimator, as required by Table 7-1. Ensure the copper filter is closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminium filter is next.

5. Set the focal spot to small. Set the kVp to what is required in Table 7-1. Set the mAs to the starting value suggested in Table 7-1.

6. Make the exposure. Change the mAs setting to obtain the desired radiation reading. Record the actual mAs and the radiation reading.

7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 until Table 7-1 is completed.

8. Remove the radiation meter's probe.

• Determine the half value layer of the tube. See Section 6.3.4 “Procedure for Half Value Layer Testing” on page 6-6. Ensure no filters have been added. Record the half value layer on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet).

Table 7-1

Filtration (mm) Radiation required at Faceplate Starting mAs Actual

mR/µGy Actual mAskVp Al Cu mR µGy SID=180cm SID=100cm

50 0 0 15 131 25 850 0 0 1 8.8 1.6 0.560 0 0 5 44 5 1.680 1 0.5 0.1 0.88 0.5 0.580 1 0.5 1 8.8 5 1.680 1 0.5 5 44 25 880 1 0.5 10 88 50 12.5100 0 1 1 8.8 4 1.2



7.1.6.1 Dark NoiseCCD sensors convert incoming light photons to electrons, trapping them in place for later readout. Thermal processes randomly create electrons too, and these are captured in the CCD along with the electrons produced by light. These thermal electrons represent a source of noise known as dark current. This Dark Noise test checks that the dark current is being appropriately corrected.

Figure 7-1

To perform the Dark Noise test1. Select Xplorer Calibration.

2. Set the Integration Time to 100 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling-Edge Trigger is checked, as shown above in Figure 7-1. Select OK.

3. Select Anatomy to display the Anatomy and Projection Selection dialog box.

a. Select the following:

•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - Dark Uniformity•Level - HR•Size - Medium

b. Select OK

4. Click on the Trigger to acquire an image without an x-ray exposure. The image should be uniform without any artefacts.



5. The mean pixel value and the standard deviation in the image is automatically calculated when the Region of Interest (ROI) is selected. To do this, draw a rectangle on the image by dragging the mouse across the ROI while holding down the left mouse button. An ROI of approximately 1000 x 1000 pixels in the center of the image encompasses one million pixels and gives a very good statistical measurement. The size and position of the ROI as well as its mean and standard deviation are shown in the box to the right of the Info button as shown in Figure 7-2 below.

Figure 7-2

6. The mean pixel value should be less than 10. If the mean pixel value is higher than 10, it indicates a problem with the dark field or flat field correction. Update these corrections and repeat the test.

7. Record the measured values on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet).



8. As integration time has been reduced to 100 milliseconds for this test, you must reset the value to the default of 4000 milliseconds before proceeding to the next test.

7.1.6.2 UniformityCCD sensors are comprised of millions of pixels. It is not possible to manufacture a CCD in which every pixel has the exact same response to incoming photons. This variation from pixel to pixel is known as pixel non-uniformity. An additional source of static non-uniformity in the detector head is the uneven illumination due to the lens characteristics. Over and above these effects are non-uniformities due to the x-ray source, collimator etc. These latter variable sources are not readily reversible; however, the static sources may be corrected by a Flat Field operation. This Uniformity test checks that the pixel non-uniformity and lens fall off are being appropriately corrected.

Figure 7-3

To perform the Uniformity test1. Select Xplorer Calibration.

2. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Geometric Correction ON, Charge Trap Removal ON (if Charge Traps are present), and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked, as shown in Figure 7-3 above. Select OK.



•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - Flat Uniformity



•Level - Select your SID•Size - Medium

b. Select OK.

4. Open the collimator to expose the entire imaging area. Expose the system to 10 mR (88 Gy) entrance exposure, using 80 kVp, 1 mm Al mm and 0.5 mm Cu filter.

5. Ensure the copper filter is closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminum filter is next. Do not use a grid for the exposures.

6. Examine an ROI that is 1000 x 1000 pixels in the center of the image. The image should be uniform without any artefacts except those attributable to beam non-uniformity such as collimator paint lines. Take a look at the average pixel value in the image and its standard deviation. Two times the standard deviation should be less than 10% of the average pixel value. See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4

7. Any significant deviation from uniformity is an indication of problems with the Flat Field operation. If necessary, try updating the Flat Fields and repeating the test.

8. If retaking the Flat Fields does not remove all the artefacts, then retake the Flat Fields with the filter installed. Next, retake the Uniformity exposure, accessing this new Flat Field, to ensure the artefacts are removed. Some artefacts may be produced by the filter

μ



itself or by the difference in beam quality between the filtered and unfiltered exposures. By flat fielding with the filter in place, we can determine if this is so. If artefacts remain after this, a more serious problem exists and service should be consulted. In addition, take an extra exposure at a different kVp level (for example, 100 kVp) to confirm that the artefacts are being removed.

9. Record the measured values of mean and standard deviation on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet).

7.1.6.3 Response LinearityCCD sensors have a linear response to input radiation. This is very different from the well known H & D characteristic curve of film. This test ensures that the response is indeed linear. To perform the Response Linearity Function test1. Select Xplorer Calibration and ensure the following settings are still in effect. (Set the

Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and Dark Fields ON, Charge Trap Removal ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked.) Select OK.



•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - System Linearity•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK

3. Open the collimator to expose the entire imaging area. Expose the system to approximately 0.1, 1.0, 5.0 and 10 mR (0.88, 8.8, 44, and 88 Gy) entrance exposures in a sequence of four exposures using 80 kVp, 1 mm Al and 0.5 mm Cu filter. Ensure the copper filter is closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminum filter is next.

4. Record the average pixel value for each image on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet). Also record the actual radiation readings used during the test on the Certificate of Quality. The spreadsheet will plot the average pixel value as a function of exposure. The result should be a straight line with a goodness of fit (R value) of 0.95 or higher. The Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet) will calculate this value for you.

7.1.6.4 Readout Linearity FunctionCCD sensors are read out row by row and column by column. This test ensures that the rows and columns are being read out in proper sequence. It is very unlikely that a CCD could fail this test and still produce a usable image. By contrast, scanning systems such as CR readers can occasionally skip, thereby producing a discontinuity.

μ



To perform the Readout Linearity Function test1. Select Xplorer Calibration and ensure the following settings are still in effect. (Set the




•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - Spatial•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK.

3. Place a steel ruler across the faceplate, parallel to the long axis of the detector head (or pointing towards the camera, see Figure 7-5). Open the collimator to expose the entire imaging area. Expose the system to about a 5 mR (44 Gy) entrance exposure, using a 60 kVp unfiltered x-ray beam.

Figure 7-5

4. Examine the edges of the ruler on the image for discontinuities. Ruler edges should be straight and continuous.To verify this do the following:

a. View the image in high magnification.

b. While pressing the CTRL key, hold down the left mouse button and slowly drag the mouse over the image, examining the ruler edges.

5. The image must be closely examined to verify uniform line spacing (dropouts are detectable as lucent straight lines in the open field). Any “missed” lines would

μ



represent a serious error in the camera electronics. To pass this test, no such lines are allowed. To verify uniform line spacing do the following:

a. View the image in high magnification.

b. While pressing the CTRL key, hold down the left mouse button and slowly drag the mouse over the image, examining the line spacing.

6. Do not confuse a line of high or low pixel values with a missing line. A line of high or low pixels is a charge trap and should be corrected using the Artefact Removal procedure. See Section 6.4.9 “Artefact Removal Procedure” on page 6-30.

7.1.6.5 Geometric CorrectionThe Detector Heads are optically coupled systems. They use a very wide aperture, wide angle lens. All such lenses produce a “barrel” distortion which must subsequently be corrected by applying an inverse distortion. The result should be a perfectly square image. Some further linear distortion is inevitable, however, as objects on the faceplate are projected onto the scintillator. The degree of projection distortion varies with the source image distance (SID). This test ensures the barrel correction is functioning properly and checks that projection distortion is within the expected limits.

To perform the Geometric Correction test 1. Select Xplorer Calibration and ensure the following settings are still in effect. (Set the




•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - Spatial•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK

3. Place a steel ruler in the same position as step 2 in Section 7.1.6.4. Expose the system to about a 5 mR (44 Gy) entrance exposure, using a 60 kVp unfiltered x-ray beam.

4. Adjust window and level settings by moving the mouse up and down or left and right across the image while holding the right mouse button. Adjust levels such that the gradations on the ruler can be seen.

5. Use the Region Of Interest (ROI) function to draw a box 20 cm long. Verify that it overlays markings spaced 20 cm apart. Deviation should be less than 5%.

6. Repeat the test with the ruler placed along the top and bottom edges and left and right sides.


μ



7.1.6.6 High-Contrast ResolutionThe X4C uses a 4096 x 4096 imaging area CCD. This gives a 108 micron pixel size at the scintillator. Sampling theory shows that the limiting spatial resolution for this system is 4.6 line pairs per millimetre. The X3C uses a 3072 x 3072 imaging area CCD. This gives a 144 micron pixel size at the scintillator. Sampling theory gives about a 3.4 lp/mm limiting resolution. This test checks that spatial resolution is within specifications.

Figure 7-6

To perform the High Contrast Resolution test1. Select Xplorer Calibration. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and

Dark fields ON, Geometric Correction OFF, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked as shown in Figure 7-6. Select OK.



•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - High Contrast•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK

3. Place a line-pair pattern device on the centre of the imaging area at 45 degrees from the edge directions. Collimate to an area double the size of the target.



4. Expose the system with an exposure of about 15 mR (131 Gy). Use a 50 kVp unfiltered x-ray beam. The central beam should be orthogonal to the plane of the line pair target. If it is not, the lines can act like a grid and reduce the apparent resolution. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7

5. Process the image by selecting Enhance. In the Sharpen dialog box, select Box Car Unsharp, and then move the sliders for Sharpening Strength to 10 and Sharpening Kernel to 0. See Figure 7-8. It is important to select the method first with the drop down box and then to set the values with the sliders.

μ



Figure 7-8

6. Set the window and level to optimally visualize the line-pair patterns using 2-3X magnification. A group is considered resolved when at least one unbroken dark line can be seen extending through the group. The limiting resolution should be within 10% of the expected value and should be consistent with prior inspections. Nominal value is 4 line pairs per millimetre for the X4C and 3.2 line pairs for the X3C. An example is shown in Figure 7-7.


7.1.6.7 Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check

To perform the Erasure Thoroughness and Artefact/Defect Check1. Take another high-contrast resolution exposure.

2. Do not change the Xplorer Calibration settings.



•Anatomy - Calibration



•Projection - Erasure•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK.

4. Remove the resolution test object. Expose the system to a 1 mR (8.8 Gy) entrance exposure, at 50kVp, collimated to expose the entire imaging area. This exposure must be done within one minute of the high-contrast resolution exposure.

5. The image should still be uniform with no visible ghosting from the previous exposure, nor artefacts or defects. Confirm this by measuring the average pixel value in the image and its standard deviation. Two times the standard deviation should be less than 10% of the average pixel value.


7.1.6.8 Noise/Low-Contrast Resolution

Figure 7-9

μ



To perform the Noise/Low-Contrast Test1. Select Xplorer Calibration. Set the Integration Time to 4000 milliseconds, Flat and

Dark Fields ON, Geometric Correction ON, and ensure Use Falling Edge Trigger is checked as shown in Figure 7-9 above. Select OK.



•Anatomy - Calibration•Projection - Low Contrast•Level - Custom•Size - Medium

b. Select OK.

3. Place the low-contrast phantom on the imaging area. Use a 100 kVp beam with 1 mm of Cu. Collimate to an area double the size of the target.

4. Expose the low-contrast phantom using a 1 mR (8.8 µGy) entrance exposure.

Figure 7-10

5. Adjust window and level to visualize as many holes as possible. See Figure 7-10 above. Record the number of holes visible as a representative of the contrast-detail behavior. The contrast threshold should be similar to that observed in previous inspections. For X4C, the target threshold value is lower than 2%. If less than seven holes are visible, the system fails to meet the required specification. For X3C, the target threshold value is lower than 3%. Therefore, if less than six holes are visible, the system fails.



6. Record the measured values on the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet). Table 7-2 below shows the contrasts represented by the holes in the IDC low contrast phantom.

7.1.6.9 DocumentationEnsure the Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet) is complete, including signature and date. Fax the Certificate of Quality, along with the Customer System Acceptance Document, to IDC, attention Customer Service.

7.1.6.10 Procedure for Measuring Exposure

7.1.6.11 CalculationFor radiation meters that have unshielded probes, the radiation is measured in free-air to avoid backscatter, and then the radiation at the desired SID is calculated from these results. The calculation is as follows:

DESE = DM * (SPD / SID) 2

whereDESE is the system entrance exposure dose

DM is the measured dose from the radiation meter

SID is the source to imager distance in centimetresSPD is the source to probe distance in centimetres

For example, for a SID of 180 cm (70 inches), we suggest a measuring distance of SPD = 127.3 cm (50.1 inches). This gives a simple factor of 2. In other words, divide any measured reading by 2 to give the reading at a SID of 180 cm.

Table 7-2

Hole Number Visible

% Contrast (@100kVp)

1 Fail 13.952 Fail 9.843 Fail 6.924 Fail 4.895 Fail 3.496 Fail 2.437 Pass 1.758 Pass 1.21



For a SID of 100 cm (40 inches), a measuring distance of SPD = 70.7 cm (27.8 inches) will give the same factor of 2.

7.1.6.12 Procedure for Measuring ExposureThe following is the procedure for measuring the exposure. See Figure 7-11 below for a diagram of the set-up.1. Lay a lead sheet or lead apron on the floor to reduce backscatter.

2. Make a stand for the radiation meter's probe on the lead sheet with phone books or other such support to allow the probe to be positioned at least 25 cm from the floor (the probe is positioned perpendicular to the tube axis).

3. Place the radiation meter's probe at the centre of the beam (indicated by the light collimator) at the calculated SPD distance from the focal spot (127.3 cm for 180 cm SID, or 70.7 cm for 100 cm SID). The distance should be measured to the centre of the chamber.

4. Collimate the x-ray beam to only cover the probe with no more than 2 centimetre margins.

5. Tape the filtration to the collimator, as required by Table 7-1. Ensure the copper filter is closest to the x-ray tube and the aluminium filter is next.

6. Set the focal spot to small. Set the kVp to what is required in Table 7-1. Set the mAs to the starting value suggested in Table 7-1.

7. Make the exposure and divide the measured exposure by 2 to determine the exposure that the X3C would receive at the faceplate. Change the mAs setting to obtain the desired radiation reading. Record the final mAs.

8. Repeat Steps 5 through 7 until Table 7-1 is completed

9. Before proceeding with the rest of the procedure, reposition the tube to produce a horizontal beam at the needed SID of 180 cm or 100 cm, and open the collimator to fully cover but not exceed the imaging area by more than 2 centimetres.

10.If Delcano was running during this test, reject any images that may have been captured due to scatter.



Figure 7-11

7.1.6.13 Reference SectionsThe following apply:

1 Source

2 Radiation Meter Probe

3 Support

4 Lead

1

2

3

4

127.

3 cm

(50.

1 in

)

> 25 cm (9.8 in)



QAL-03-003 Half Value Layer TestingQAL-03-007 Creation of Dark Field CorrectionQAL-03-008 Creation of Flat Field CorrectionQAL-03-010 Gain and Offset for X4C systemsQAL-06-010 Gain and Offset for X3C systemsQAL-04-009 Artefact Removal

7.1.6.14 Records

The following applyThe following apply:QAL-03-001a Certificate of Quality (QC / Acceptance Testing Worksheet)


7 - 22 • System Acceptance Procedure • Detector Head Installation Checklist

7.2 Detector Head Installation Checklist After the Detector Head and associated equipment (generator/tube crane) are installed, the following checks and calibrations must be completed.

____Input the Hospital name in Magellan 3. For more information see the “To Configure the Institution Settings” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.

____Set the life size image for the monitor. For more information see the “To Configure Life-Size Calibration” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.

____Check disk space settings. For more information see the “The Disc Space Monitor” section in the Service chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.

____Set the serial number of the Detector Head into the Magellan.ini file.

____Set monitor resolution to 1600 x 1200.

____Setup network connection.

____Setup all PACS, printers, workstations, and work lists. Include image box sizes for all print servers used. For more information see the “To Add a New PACS”, “To Add a New Printer”, and “To Add a Worklist Provider” sections in the Magellan 3 Administration Manual.

____Set up CHUM and check the VPN connection if established.

____Check fan operation on the Detector Head.

____Check the TEC operation.

____Check Trigger operation.

____Set the gain and offset for the camera.

____Check the Half Value Layer.

____Install the geometric correction maps.

____Darkfield and flatfield calibrations.

____Set the cropping ROI.

____Check for artefacts. Perform artefact removal if necessary.

____Set up F number. For more information see the “To Configure the Institution Settings” section in the Administration chapter of the Magellan 3 Administration Manual. Also refer to the F Number Wizard.

____Perform the AEC calibration.

____Perform the final acceptance test.


System Acceptance Procedure • Detector Head Installation Checklist • 7 - 23

If the equipment is installed in the United States, the FDA 2579 form must be completed. It is the responsibility of the dealer installing the equipment to complete this form.


MAGELLAN 3 SERVICE

The sections are as follows:8.1 “System Requirements” 8.2 “Storage Commitment Theory” 8.3 “Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application” 8.4 “Magellan 3 Help” 8.5 “Connecting to the Generator” 8.6 “The Configuration Manager” 8.7 “Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords” 8.8 “Detector Status” 8.9 “Generator and Imaging Station Configuration” 8.10 “Disk Space Settings” 8.11 “The Worklist Manager” 8.12 “The Send Queue” 8.13 “The Print Queue” 8.14 “Study/Image Settings” 8.15 “Grid Detection” 8.16 “The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)” 8.17 “The Parameter Editor” 8.18 “Managing the Procedures” 8.19 “Import Data” 8.20 “Configuring the Arcoma CMT”


8 - 2 • Magellan 3 Service •

Im


Revision Version Date Description

2.1.139 September 26, 2005 Updates for Magellan 2.1.139 - Draft

2.1.147 November 23, 2005 Update to AEC Procedure, minor adjustments - Draft

2.1.149 December 15, 2005 Release

2.1.151 February 17, 2006 Arcoma information

4.0 2.1.151 June 12, 2006 Module part numbers added

4.1 2.1.158 June 20, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.158

4.2 2.1.163 July 28, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.163

4.3 2.1.168 September 5, 2006 Updates for Magellan 2.1.168

4.4 2.1.168 September 20, 2006 Minor revisions

4.5 2.1.171 October 30, 2006 Minor revision for Magellan 2.1.171

5.0 3.0.206 June 1, 2007 Updates for Magellan 3.0.206

5.1 3.0.206 June 5, 2007 Minor Revision

aging Dynamics Company • PN: 902-0001-003 v5.1 M3.0.206 • June 6, 2007

Magellan 3 Service • System Requirements • 8 - 3

8.1 System RequirementsThe following sections describe minimum PC hardware platforms and accessories required to run the Magellan 3 software.The IDC acquisition workstation requires either a 100/120 VAC approx 11.4 A at 5/60 Hz or 200/240 VAC approx 6.1 A at 50/60 Hz. The IDC workstation must be provided with an UPS (uninterruptible power supply) for power protection.The IDC Workstation must be connected to a separating (isolating) transformer that complies with the requirements of IEC 60989, IEC 60601-1 clauses 6.1 and 6.2.

8.1.1 Computer

• Intel Pentium 4• 3.2 GHz processor• 2 GB RAM minimum• 2 x 120 GB mirrored hard drives• AGP video card (DVI or VGA capable)• internal modem• 21” colour flat panel screen with 1600 x 1200 pixel resolution.• built-in 10/100/1000 mbit/s NIC (network interface card)• Windows XP operating system

8.1.2 Detector Head and PDM Power Requirements

Do not exceed the specified voltage, or supply AC power at frequencies other than 50 and 60 Hz.

Detector Head Power Distribution Module

Jerome Power Supply:

• Input: 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 2.0 A • Output: 16 VDC, 5.0 A


8 - 4 • Magellan 3 Service • Storage Commitment Theory

8.2 Storage Commitment Theory Storage Commitment is a feature that checks to see if images have been safely stored by a server. For example, Storage Commitment will check to see if the server has archived images on a backup CD. This feature is beneficial to ensure that images are not mistakenly deleted before being archived. When an image is sent from a workstation to a storage computer, such as a PACS, the workstation will ask Storage Commitment to verify the image is successfully archived on the storage computer. When an image has been archived, the image is marked as committed and ready for future deletion. Storage Commitment communicates between the workstation and storage computer using a short-term connection between ports on each computer. These connections are only open for a (configurable) few seconds or minutes. Storage Commitment creates one of these associations to send a request for storage commitment. If the Storage Commitment SCP (on the storage computer) can respond before the connection closes, it sends an immediate response. Otherwise, it will have to open another association and send a delayed response. See Figure 8-1 for a conceptual diagram of storage commitment. Following the diagram is an explanation of how Storage Commitment is utilized in the Send Queue.


Magellan 3 Service • Storage Commitment Theory • 8 - 5

Figure 8-1

MO

DA

LIT

Y W

OR

KS

TA

TIO

NS

TO

RA

GE

CO

MP

UT

ER

(e.g

., P

AC

S)

SE

ND

MA

NA

GE

R(S

tora

ge S

CU

)S

TO

RA

GE

(Sto

rage S

CP

)

BA

CK

UP

ME

DIA

CD

/DV

D

ST

OR

AG

E C

OM

MIT

ME

NT

SC

US

TO

RA

GE

CO

MM

ITM

EN

TS

CP

Request

Dela

yed R

esponse

Image

Opera

tions o

ccur

befo

re the im

age is s

tore

d

Opera

tions o

ccur

after

the im

age is s

tore

d

Opera

tion o

ccurs

if m

axim

um

num

ber

of re

quests

are

sent and a

ll re

sponses s

tate

sto

rage failu

re

AS

SO

CIA

TIO

N K

EY

Imm

edia

te R

esponse

HA

RD

DIS

KD

RIV

E

ImageID

RequesttoResendImage

Image

eD

Imag

I



8.2.1 Send Queue (Storage SCU) Request for Storage Verification

NOTE: To use the Storage Commitment feature, add a Storage Commitment server. SeeSection 8.12.1.1.2, “To Add or Change a Send Destination” and Section 8.12.1.3,“Configuring Sending Preferences”.

8.2.1.1 Scenario #1–Successful, Immediate Response The Send Queue, also called the Storage SCU, sends an image to the Storage SCP on the storage computer. The Send Queue then asks Storage Commitment to verify safe storage. The workstation Storage Commitment SCU sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment SCP, which checks whether or not the image has been archived. If the image has been archived and the association to Storage Commitment SCU is still open, Storage Commitment SCP will send an immediate response stating storage was successful.

NOTE: Storage Commitment SCU will keep the request association open for the amount oftime that is configured in the Sending Preferences dialog box.

This response causes the image on the workstation to be marked as committed and ready for future deletion.

8.2.1.2 Scenario #2–Successful, Delayed Response The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP). The Send Queue asks Storage Commitment to verify safe storage. The workstation Storage Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment (SCP), which closes the association. After the storage computer backs up the image during its scheduled run, Storage Commitment (SCP) sends a response back to Storage Commitment SCU indicating the image has been successfully stored. If the image has been archived, and the association to Storage Commitment (SCU) has been closed, a new association must send a delayed response stating the storage was successful.

NOTE: Storage Commitment (SCU) will keep the association open for the amount of timeconfigured in the Sending Preferences dialog box. After the delayed timeout has beenreached, Storage Commitment will automatically default to a response of failed tostore.

This delayed response updates the committed status of the image on the workstation.

8.2.1.3 Scenario #3–Failed, Immediate Response The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP). The Send Queue then asks Storage Commitment to verify that the image is archived. The workstation Storage Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment (SCP), which checks whether or not the image has already been archived.


Magellan 3 Service • Storage Commitment Theory • 8 - 7

If the image failed to store and the association to the Storage Commitment (SCU) is still open, Storage Commitment (SCP) will send an immediate response indicating storage was unsuccessful. Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry by sending another request to Storage Commitment (SCP).

NOTE: The number of times Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry sending the requestwill depend on the number of times configured in the Sending Preferences dialogbox.

Storage Commitment (SCU) keeps track of the responses it receives from Storage Commitment (SCP). If the maximum number of verification request is reached, Storage Commitment (SCU) will notify the Send Queue to send the image to the storage computer again. The cycle is then repeated until a response of success is returned. A response of success will update the committed status of the image on the workstation.

8.2.1.4 Scenario #4–Failed, Delayed Response The Send Queue (SCU) sends an image to the storage computer (SCP). The Send Queue then asks Storage Commitment to verify that the image is archived. The workstation Storage Commitment (SCU) sends a request to the storage computer’s Storage Commitment (SCP), which checks whether or not the image has already been archived. If the image failed to store and the request association from Storage Commitment (SCU) is closed, a new association is made to send a delayed response indicating storage/archiving failed. Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry by sending another request to Storage Commitment (SCP).

NOTE: The number of times Storage Commitment (SCU) will retry sending the requestwill depend on the number of times configured in the Sending Preferences dialogbox.

Storage Commitment (SCU) keeps track of the responses it receives from Storage Commitment (SCP). If the maximum verification request is reached, Storage Commitment (SCU) will notify the Send Queue to send the image to the storage computer again. The cycle is then repeated until a response of successful storage has been relayed. A response of successful will update the committed status of the image on the workstation.

8.2.2 AutoDeleting Images

The workstation and storage computer can be configured to AutoDelete images after a specified amount of time. Schedule AutoDelete settings in the AutoDelete Configuration dialog box on the SCU workstation. See the Administration Manual for details.Images will be AutoDeleted if the image is older than a configurable age and if any of the



following are true:• The image is rejected. • The image is sent or printed and Storage Commitment is not enabled. • The image is committed and Storage Commitment is enabled.

NOTE: AutoDelete settings for the workstation may differ from the AutoDelete settings forthe storage computer. If using third-party software on the storage computer, refer toits accompanying documentation.


Magellan 3 Service • Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application • 8 - 9

8.3 Starting or Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application

8.3.1 Starting the Magellan 3 Application

It is not required for the system to be powered off at night. Before starting the Magellan 3 Application, the main power to system should be on. The computer and the Magellan 3 Application do not require daily shut down or rebooting. If however the computer is shut down, simply restart the computer to automatically launch the Magellan 3 Application.

WARNING! When the Magellan 3 Application starts, a cool down period must beobserved before using any component of the application. The DetectorManager icon on the Magellan 3 Application Launcher turns from red togreen when the operating temperature is reached.

WARNING! If Magellan 3 is started prior to the unit being powered on, an error messageappears. If this occurs, exit the Magellan 3 Application, turn on the power tothe unit and restart the Magellan 3 Application.

Before acquiring an image, the Magellan 3 Application must be running.

8.3.2 Shutting Down the Magellan 3 Application

It is recommended that the unit and the computer are left running; however, there will be instances when you must shut down and power up the unit and the computer. Generally, Magellan 3 should not be shut down without shutting down the computer, so if you need to shut down Magellan 3, simply shut down the computer.However, there are times when Magellan 3 must be shut down by a service user, without shutting down the computer. To shut down the Magellan 3 application without shutting down the computer, select the Application Launcher and simultaneously press the Alt and F4 buttons on the keyboard.


8 - 10 • Magellan 3 Service • Magellan 3 Help

8.4 Magellan 3 Help Magellan 3 Help is an application that is used by administration, technologist, and service personnel. The application displays information about Magellan 3 software, the workstation, and includes the Adobe PDF Help File.

8.4.1 Using the Help Application

1. Select the Help application icon. See Figure 8-2.

Figure 8-2

2. The Magellan 3 – Help dialog box will appear. See Figure 8-3.

Figure 8-3

From the dialog box, select one of the following:• About – Displays information about the Magellan 3 software. See Figure 8-4.


Magellan 3 Service • Magellan 3 Help • 8 - 11

Figure 8-4

• System Information – Displays network and system information such as the IP address and computer model.

Figure 8-5

• Help File – displays an Adobe PDF file of the Magellan 3 Administration and Opera-tor’s Manuals.

3. To exit from the Help application, select Close.


8 - 12 • Magellan 3 Service • Connecting to the Generator

8.5 Connecting to the Generator

8.5.1 Sedecal Generator Connections

The following connections are possible with the Sedecal Generator:

Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with no Console and no DAPIn this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port.

Using the Magellan 3 GenUI on Primary Port with no Console and with DAPIn this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port and the DAP (Dose Area Product) is connected to the secondary port.1. Verify the Sedecal Generator U24 firmware V7R0b13 is already installed in the generator

cabinet.

2. If the new generator firmware V7R01b9 is not installed in the generator cabinet (the cabinet has the old V7R0b13 firmware), the old firmware needs to be removed and the new generator V7R01b9 firmware installed.

3. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J8 in the Sedecal Generator.

4. Connect the DAP Null Serial Cable to the Secondary Port J7 in the Sedecal Generator.

8.5.2 CPI Generator Connections

The following connections are possible with the CPI Generator:

Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with the CPI Touch Screen ConsoleIn this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the secondary port while the CPI Touch Screen is connected to the primary port. To connect the Magellan 3 GenUI and the Generator 1. Connect the CPI Touch Screen Console Cable to the Primary Port J4 in the CPI Generator

interface board.

2. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Secondary Port J11 in the CPI Generator.

Using the Magellan 3 GUI with no Console and no DAP In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the primary port. To connect the Magellan 3 GenUI and the Generator, connect the Magellan GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J2 in the CPI Generator.

Using the Magellan 3 GenUI with no Console and with DAP


Magellan 3 Service • Connecting to the Generator • 8 - 13

In this case the Magellan 3 GenUI is connected to the secondary port.1. Plug the cable from the DAP device 1 (tube 1) into J2 of the DAP interface board.

2. Connect the Magellan 3 GenUI Null Modem Serial Cable to the Primary Port J2 in the CPI Generator.


8 - 14 • Magellan 3 Service • The Configuration Manager

8.6 The Configuration ManagerThe Magellan 3 Configuration Manager enables you to modify the settings of the applications on the Application Launcher, set the parameters of the anatomies, manage the procedures, importa data and configure the Arcoma CMT.The Configuration Manager allows you to configure and adjust the following settings:

• Groups, Users and Passwords• Generator and Imaging Stations• Disk Space Settings • Worklist Settings• Send Settings• Print Settings• Study/Image Settings• Acquisition Interface Settings• Parameter Editor• Manage Procedures• Import Data• Arcoma CMT Settings

To open the Configuration Manager, select the Configuration Manager icon. See Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7.

Figure 8-6


Magellan 3 Service • The Configuration Manager • 8 - 15

Figure 8-7


8 - 16 • Magellan 3 Service • Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords

8.7 Configuring Groups, Users, and PasswordsSecurity groups, user lists, and passwords can be added and modified in Magellan 3. Each group can be assigned different permissions to access various components of Magellan 3.

To Open Groups, Users and Passwords1. From the Configuration Manager, select Groups, Users and Passwords.

See Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8

8.7.1 To Add a New Security Group

1. From the Configuration Manager, select Groups, Users and Passwords.

2. From the Groups, Users, and Passwords, select Security Groups. See Figure 8-9.


Magellan 3 Service • Configuring Groups, Users, and Passwords • 8 - 17

Figure 8-9

3. Select Add New to activate the Group Details fields.

4. Enter the Group Name and the Security Level. This is a value from 1-998 indicating the level of security for a group. The higher the level of security, the higher the number.

NOTE: The group you create must have a security level lower than the highest level ofthe group you are a member of. You cannot give a lower level user permission toperform actions you do not have permission to perform.

5. In the Group Details field, check the components the user group has access to by selecting the checkbox next to the permission.

Select Save. The user group is added to the Existing Groups list.

8.7.1.1 Modifying a Security GroupBecause a security group has users associated with it, it cannot be removed from the Existing Groups list. Group Details and permissions of a selected group can be changed, or a selected group can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing Groups list. Inactive groups are displayed in red and marked as inactive.To display the inactive groups select the Show Inactive Groups checkbox.



NOTE: The Administration and Technologist groups are locked; therefore, they cannot bedeactivated or have their name or security level changed. The permissions for thesegroups can be modified.

8.7.1.1.1 To Modify a Security Group1. From the Groups, Users, and Passwords, select Security Groups.

2. Select the security group you want to modify. See Figure 8-10.

3. Do one of the following:

• To deactivate a security group, select the Inactive checkbox. • To recover an inactive security group, deselect the Inactive checkbox.• To change the Group Details or permissions for the group, edit the group’s information or

change the permissions as required.4. Select Save.

NOTE: You can change the permissions of a group lower than the group you are a memberof, but you cannot change the permissions of an equal or higher level group. Youcannot give a lower level user permission to perform actions you do not havepermission to perform.



Figure 8-10

8.7.2 Configuring the User List

You can add a new user, import user information, and modify a user’s information in the User List.

8.7.2.1 To Create a New User1. From Groups, Users, and Passwords, select User List.

2. In the User List dialog box (see Figure 8-11) select Add New and do the following:

• Enter the user's Initials (this is a mandatory field). • Enter the technologist’s identification number. • Enter a Login Name (this is a mandatory field).• Enter a Password. • Enter an E-mail address (optional). This should be filled in if the user is required to

send or receive JPEG images by e-mail.• Enter a Phone Number.



Figure 8-11

3. In the Group(s) list, select the group(s) to add the user to by selecting the checkbox beside each name.

4. Select Save.

8.7.2.2 Modifying the User List Because users have records associated with them, they cannot be removed from the Existing Users list. User Details and groups of a selected user can be changed, or a selected user can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing User list. Inactive users are displayed in red and marked as inactive.To display the inactive users, select the Show Inactive Users checkbox.

8.7.2.2.1 To Modify a User1. From Groups, Users, and Passwords, select User List.

2. Select the user you want to modify. See Figure 8-12.


• To deactivate a user, select the Inactive User checkbox. • To recover an inactive user, deselect the Inactive User checkbox.• To change the Group Details or groups for the user, edit the user’s information or change

the groups as required.4. Select Save.



Figure 8-12

8.7.3 To Change Your Password

1. From Groups, Users and Passwords, select Change My Password. See Figure 8-13.

Figure 8-13

2. Enter your Current Password.

3. Enter your New Password.

4. Re-enter your New Password.

5. Select OK to save the changes.


8 - 22 • Magellan 3 Service • Detector Status

8.8 Detector StatusThe TEC Controller Manager monitors the cooling status of the camera. The TECCM has a status icon on the Application launcher. It is a service module and is always running.Magellan 3 can be configured to communicate with more than one detector head. The Detector Status will start a TEC Control Manager (TECCM) for each detector head installed. From the Image Stations dialog box you can add and remove detector heads, configure the TECCM for each detector head, and configure the Detector Calibration. The Detector Status icon (see Figure 8-14) on the Application Launcher, can be displayed with one or two TECCM controls. Each TECCM thermometer will display its own color, indicating its status.

Figure 8-14


Magellan 3 Service • Generator and Imaging Station Configuration • 8 - 23

8.9 Generator and Imaging Station ConfigurationThe Generator and Imaging Stations are configured in the Configuration Manager.To configure the Generator and Imaging Stations:1. Select Configuration Manager to open the Configuration Manager menu. See

Figure 8-15.

Figure 8-15

2. Select Generator and Imager Settings to open the Configure Imaging Stations Settings. This menu displays three settings: Generator Settings, Imaging Station Settings and Scan for Hardware. See Figure 8-16.


8 - 24 • Magellan 3 Service • Generator and Imaging Station Configuration

Figure 8-16

8.9.1 Configuring the X-ray Generator

Magellan must be configured to allow communication between the generator and Magellan 3. This communication allows Magellan 3 to associate exposure parameters (such as kVp, mAs, mA, and ms) with the image.

NOTE: The exposure is not initiated by the Magellan 3 Application. The exposure must beinitiated by the x-ray generator.

1. Completely shutdown the Magellan 3 Application (Alt F4), the DelCano Application, and any other applications that might use the Xplorer control.

2. Download and run the Installer.

3. The following dialog is displayed if generator integration has not already been installed. See Figure 8-17.



Figure 8-17

4. Select Sedecal Generator, CPI Generator, or Do not install Generator Integration.

Selecting one of the generators displays a dialog box asking if DAP is installed for this generator. See Figure 8-18. Selecting Yes will automatically install all the necessary settings to read the DAP information from the generator.

Figure 8-18

5. Choose the number of Detectors that will be installed and select the Next button. See Figure 8-19.



Figure 8-19

6. If more than one detector is selected, you will be prompted to enter names for each detector. Enter the names for the detectors as requested and select Next. See Figure 8-20.



Figure 8-20

7. The installation will begin and when completed a dialog box appears confirming installation success. Select Finish.

8. Reboot the machine.

9. From the Configuration Manager, select the Generator Settings in the Generator and Imaging Station Settings to open the Magellan Generator Integrations Settings dialog box. Depending on the generator selected, one of the following dialog boxes is displayed. See Figure 8-21 for Sedecal Generator and Figure 8-22 for CPI Generator.

Figure 8-21



Figure 8-22

10.Ensure that Null Serial Cable is connected to the Com Port.

11.Select the COM Port, and check the appropriate values for the generator being used.

12.If connecting to the Sedecal Generator, select the Maximum AEC Density from the AEC Density drop-down list.

13.Check Send Parameters to Generator to send the exposure parameters of the anatomy and projection pairs to the generator. If this is checked, Connect to Generator must also be checked. Connecting to the generator will automatically get exposure parameters from the generator. In the Sedecal Generator Configuration dialog box, check Has DAP if a Dose Area Product Meter is used.

8.9.2 Adding or Removing a Non-DR Imaging Station

An Imaging Station for a non-IDC detector can be installed. • To install a non-IDC detector, select Add Non-DR Imaging Station. See Figure 8-23.• To remove a non-DR imaging station, select Remove Imaging Station. See Figure 8-23.

NOTE: Only a non-DR imaging station can be removed.

NOTE: You may not select a non-DR detector to work with a regular imaging station.

8.9.3 Setting up the Imaging Station

When configuring the Imaging Station, both the Detector and the TECC/PDM have to be configured. The number of Imaging Stations and TECC/PDMs will equal the number of detectors installed. For a non-DR imaging station, IDC Detectors and TECC/PDMs cannot be selected.



8.9.3.1 Naming the Imaging Station Icons and names may be assigned to the IDC units. 1. In the Generator and Imaging Station Settings menu, select Imaging Station Settings to

display the Configure Imaging Stations. See Figure 8-23.

NOTE: The Configure Imaging Stations dialog box is displayed with one or two ImagingStation set ups, depending on the number of detector heads installed.

Figure 8-23

NOTE: When generator integration is installed, the generator workstation that theimaging station corresponds to will be displayed. If no generator is displayed,there is no generator integration.

2. Enter a name for the Detector Head in the Imaging Station Name field.

3. Select the icon button to select an icon to associate with the imaging station.



8.9.3.2 Configuring the Detector Head1. The Detector drop-down list should display 1 or 2, depending on the number of detector

heads installed.

2. The serial number is automatically displayed once it is entered into the Serial Number field in the Detector Calibration Settings dialog box.

3. Select Settings to open the Detector Calibration dialog box. Calibrate the Detector Head with the necessary values required for selected the selected Detector Head.

8.9.3.3 Configuring the TECC/PDMFor every Detector Head installed a TECC/PDM must also be installed.1. In the Generator and Imaging Station Settings menu, select Imaging Station Settings to

display the Configure Imaging Stations dialog box.

2. Select the TECC/PDM from the drop-down list.

3. The COM Port is automatically assigned when the hardware has been scanned. If the hardware was not found the TECC/PDM info displays n/a. When this occurs, try the following:

• Scan for hardware by selecting Scan for Hardware located on the Generator and Imaging Station Settings dialog box.

• If it still does not appear, ensure the TECC/PDM is properly plugged in. The scan will only locate what COM port the device is on.

4. The Serial number of the PDM the serial number of the device will be determined and automatically displayed once the TECC is running with the entire Magellan suite.

5. Select Configure to open the TECC/PDM Status dialog box. See Figure 8-24.

6. Check the appropriate settings for the TECC/PDM being configured.



Figure 8-24

NOTE: The TEC should be on at all times except for troubleshooting purposes. If turnedOFF, ensure it is turned back on.

7. Check the TEC On checkbox.

8. Uncheck Ignore External Fan Error Messages if the system’s PDM uses a fan that is recognized (connected through our configuration). If no fan can be detected, an error message will display stating that the Fan in the PDM has failed. If there is no external fan being used (the system is using a control box) check Ignore External Fan Error Messages. This will prevent the error message from displaying.



9. Check Use Digital Grid Detect Board if a digital grid detect board is being used.

10.In the TEC Set-point field, enter a value by clicking on the arrows to the right of the text box to scroll to the desired temperature. The temperature range is between -20°C and +20°C. This will normally be set to -10°C and should not be changed except for testing purposes.

11.The TEC Controller Status is informative and displays the status of the TEC Controller at any given time.

8.9.4 Detector Selector

If you are installing the 2200 system with two detector heads, it is convenient to view the Detector Selector instead of the Gen UI when performing the AEC calibration. To view the Detector Selector and hide the Gen UI, click on the Gen UI and press the Alt and F4 keys. This displays the Detector Selector, enabling you to select between detector heads. See Figure 8-25.

Figure 8-25


Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings • 8 - 33

8.10 Disk Space SettingsMagellan 3 allows monitors to have multiple drives. To add, remove or change the Disk Space Settings:1. Select the Disk Space Settings to open the Disk Space Settings dialog box. See Figure

8-26.

Figure 8-26

2. From the Disk Space Settings dialog box (Figure 8-27), select one of the following:

• Add – to include the other drives in the Drive Settings field. Select Add to open the Add Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-27. Select the drive to add to the Drive Settings field from the drop-down list and select OK.


8 - 34 • Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings

Figure 8-27

• Change – to adjust the panic levels of the drive. Click on the row of the drive to adjust and select Change. The Change Settings dialog box will appear. Also see Section 8.10.1, “To Change the Disk Space Settings”.

• Remove – to remove a drive from the drive settings field. Click on the row of the drive to remove, and select Remove.

8.10.1 To Change the Disk Space Settings

1. From the Disk Space Settings dialog box, click on the row of the drive to adjust and select Change.

2. By using the Up and Down arrows or by entering a numeric value, change the levels of the Show Caution (yellow) below. The default is 5000 MB. If the disk space falls under the specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application Launcher will be outlined in Yellow. When the disk space is greater than the specified value, the Disk Space icon is outlined in Green.

3. Similarly, change the levels of the Show Urgent (red) below. The default is 3000 MB. If the disk space falls under the specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application Launcher is outlined in Red.


Magellan 3 Service • Disk Space Settings • 8 - 35

4. Change the levels of the Show Panic Message below. The default is 2000 MB. If the disk space falls under the specified value, the Disk Space icon on the Application Launcher flashes from Blue to Red. A warning message is displayed every 30 seconds, warning that the disk space is almost full.

5. In the Additional message text field, add any warning messages about space and contact information for service in the event the hard drive is full.

6. Select OK. A confirmation dialog will appear to confirm the changes. See Figure 8-28.

Figure 8-28

NOTE: Additional message is an informative message displaying warning messagesabout disk space. This message is site configured, so the site administrator canadd contact information for service in case the hard drive fills up.


8 - 36 • Magellan 3 Service • The Worklist Manager

8.11 The Worklist ManagerThe Worklist Manager operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 AI and two possible information sources. The Worklist Manager can be configured to accept studies in two ways:

• A scheduled study from a DICOM worklist provider. This is typically a component of a Hospital's Information System (HIS) or Radiology Information System (RIS).

• An unscheduled study that is manually entered at the workstation, as in a drop in or an anonymous study.

The Worklist Manager communicates the status of performed studies back to the respective sources. As studies are performed in Magellan 3, they are removed from the Worklist Manager's scheduled studies list and added to the Performed Studies list. The status of any scheduled study is communicated to the Worklist Provider via Modality Performed Procedure Step (MPPS).

8.11.1 Worklist Settings

In the Worklist Settings, you can configure the Worklist Provider, the Scheduled Studies, and the Port settings.1. From the Configuration Manager, select the Worklist Settings. See Figure 8-29.

Figure 8-29


Magellan 3 Service • The Worklist Manager • 8 - 37

8.11.2 Configuring the Worklist Connection

The Worklist Connection allows you to Change the Application Entity for the Worklist Manager, add, change and remove Worklists, and configure the Worklist Query Conditions for the Selected Worklist Provider.

8.11.2.1 To Change the Application Entity Title for the Worklist Manager1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Connection.

2. In the Worklist Manager section, select Change beside the AE Title text box to make the field editable. See Figure 8-30.

Figure 8-30

3. Enter the appropriate information.

4. Select Save.

8.11.2.2 To Add or Change a Worklist Provider1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Connection.

2. Select New to display the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box (see Figure 8-31) or select the Worklist Provider from the Description drop-down list and select Change to display the information for the selected provider (see Figure 8-32).



Figure 8-31

Figure 8-32

3. In the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box do the following:

• Enter or change the Description for the Worklist Provider. This value has no DICOM connectivity relevance, but is used as an identifying tag by IDC Magellan 3.

• Enter or change the AE Title value for the DICOM AE (Application Entity) Title defined on the Worklist Provider to which you want to connect. The DICOM AE Title is a DICOM specific name used to identify DICOM providers and clients on a network. The worklist provider you are connecting to will have its own identifying AE Title.

• Enter or change the host name or IP address of the Worklist Provider. • Enter or change the provider’s TCP/IP port. The TCP/IP port is an integer number used to

specify a particular “network address” for the worklist provider. Typical values may be 104 or 4000; however, the value you enter here depends on the particular provider to which you are connecting.

• Uncheck Use MPPS if you do not want Magellan to report any MPPS (Modality Per-formed Procedure Steps) status changes to the Worklist Provider. The default is checked.



4. If adding a new Worklist Provider, select Apply & Next to save the information and add another Worklist Provider or select OK to save the information.

If changing the Worklist Provider Information, select Apply to save the changes and then OK.

8.11.2.3 To Remove a Worklist Provider1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Provider.

2. In the Worklist Connection Configuration dialog box, select the Worklist Provider from the drop-down list.

3. Select Remove.

4. A dialog box appears asking if you want to remove the Worklist. Select Yes to remove the Worklist Provider or select No to cancel. See Figure 8-33.

Figure 8-33



8.11.2.4 To Configure the Worklist Query Conditions1. Select Configure Worklist Connection to open the Worklist Connection Configuration

dialog box. See Figure 8-34.

Figure 8-34

2. Select the Worklist Provider from the Description drop-down list.

3. Enter the query conditions for the Worklist Provider. You may choose to have any number of conditions specified. The Magellan 3 Worklist displays only the studies that meet the criteria for all the query conditions specified. The filtering conditions are as follows:

• Scheduled Station AE Title – The Application Entity Title of the station where studies are performed.

• Modality – Any valid modality code. Modality simply means the method of generating medical images. IDC Magellan 3 uses the standard DICOM abbreviations, such as CR for computed radiography.

• Scheduled Performing Physician – The exams to be performed by a specific physician.• Scheduled Station Name – The exams to be performed at a particular imaging station.

This would be useful for hospitals with many imaging stations. • Scheduled Procedure Step Location – The exams to be performed at a particular location

(either a machine or a hospital department).• Scheduled Procedure Step Description –The exams that use a specific procedure descrip-

tion. If necessary, contact your system administrator or IDC Customer Service for assis-tance.



4. Select Apply to save the conditions and select OK.

8.11.2.5 To Test the Connection to a Worklist Provider1. From Worklist Settings, select Configure Worklist Provider.

2. In the Worklist Provider Configuration dialog box select the Worklist Provider you want to test from the Description drop-down list.

3. Select Test Connection to open the Test Connection dialog box. See Figure 8-35.

4. When the test is complete, the status is indicated. Select Close.

5. Confirm the Worklist Provider displayed is the one you want.

6. Select OK.

Figure 8-35

8.11.3 Managing the Scheduled Studies

You can set the Scheduled Studies list to reflect the workflow requirements. You can also determine the automatic refresh time of scheduled studies and what patient information is displayed.



To configure the scheduled studies1. Click on the Worklist Manager to open the Scheduled Studies. See Figure 8-36.

2. In the Scheduled Studies dialog box, select Studies Preferences.

Figure 8-36

3. In the Preferences dialog box (see Figure 8-37) do the following:



Figure 8-37

• Check the Automatically refresh schedule checkbox to automatically refresh the list of scheduled studies. Enter the interval time to refresh the schedule.

• In the Heading list check the fields that you want to display in the list of Scheduled Studies. Explanations of the data fields are as follows:

•Patient Name – displayed as last name, first name, middle name.•Patient ID – a unique identifier assigned to a patient by the HIS/RIS.•Sex – specifies the patient’s sex. DICOM standard terms are female, male,

and other.•Date of Birth – birth date of the patient.•Patient Age – indicates the patient’s age in days if the patient is less that one

month old, months if the patient is from 1 to 24 months, and years if the patient is older than 2 years.

•SPS ID – Scheduled Procedure Step ID is an identifier that recognizes the Scheduled Procedure Step.

•SPS Date and Time – Scheduled Procedure Study date and time.



•SPS Description – Scheduled Procedure Step Description is the specific procedure being performed in the study. This field can include more than one procedure.

•Accession Number – depending on the site, this is a number assigned to a study by a HIS or RIS.

•Referring Physician – the physician that referred the patient for this exam.•Requested Procedure ID – this is a unique text tag used to identify each imaging

procedure.•Requested Procedure Description – description of the requested procedure as

created by the performing institution.•Contrast Allergies – any contrast allergies of the patient.•Medical Alerts – any relevant medical problems of the patient.

4. Select OK.

NOTE: Changing the view of the Worklist Manager list also changes the view in theMagellan 3 AI.

8.11.3.1 Moving the Scheduled Study ColumnsThe Scheduled Studies columns can be moved to reflect what data is displayed first.

To move a Scheduled Studies column1. Select and hold the column heading you want moved. The column heading appears

recessed.

2. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag the column until the desired location is reached.

3. Release the mouse button. The column is moved.

NOTE: All columns can be moved with the exception of the Patient Name. It is locked in thefirst position.

8.11.3.2 Resizing the Columns The columns can be resized, changing the display of the study information.

To resize a column1. Place the mouse cursor on the edge of the column you want to resize. The mouse cursor

becomes a double arrow.

2. Select and hold down the column border.

3. Continue to hold down the mouse button and drag to the left or right, depending on the column you want to resize.

4. Release the mouse button. The column is resized.



8.11.4 To Configure Other Settings in the Worklist Manager

1. From Worklist Settings in the Configuration Manager, select Other Settings.

2. In the Other Settings dialog box (see Figure 8-38) enter the Port number you want to listen on for incoming queries.

Figure 8-38

3. Select OK.


8 - 46 • Magellan 3 Service • The Send Queue

8.12 The Send QueueThe Send Queue operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 Workstation and DICOM PACS or other Send Destinations.The Send Queue Service runs in the background and ensures that studies are sent to remote destinations as requested by the Magellan 3 AI or the Study Manager. Network problems can sometimes prevent studies from being sent to a Send Destination. In this case, studies are queued in the Send Queue and automatically sent later. You can view the queued studies and direct a study to another destination.The Send Queue can be configured from Send Settings to communicate with a number of Send Destinations. Each Send Destination is configured separately in the Send Destination List and is added to the list. Each destination can be active or inactive. At least one active destination is selected as the default destination.The Send Queue can be configured to send studies with lossless compression, and unsent studies can be automatically re-sent.Configuring a Send Destination requires the following information:

• DICOM AE (Application Entity) title of the Image Storage Server.• Image Storage Server TCP/IP address ("IP address") or host name.• Image Storage Server TCP/IP port.• Whether the Image Storage Server supports being sent as JPEG compressed images.

8.12.1 Send Settings

In Send Settings you can configure the Send Destination List, Film Size, and Sending Preferences.To open Send Settings, select Send Settings from the Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-39.

Figure 8-39


Magellan 3 Service • The Send Queue • 8 - 47

8.12.1.1 To Configure the Send Destination ListFrom Send Settings select the Send Destination List. In the Send Destination List dialog box PACS or other Send Destinations can be added, changed, or removed from the list. See Figure 8-40.

Figure 8-40

8.12.1.1.1 To Change the AE Title for Magellan 3 1. From the Send Destination List dialog box, select Change next to the AE Title field

making the field editable. The Change button changes to a Save button. Enter the appropriate information. See Figure 8-40.

2. Select Save.



8.12.1.1.2 To Add or Change a Send Destination1. In the Configuration Manager, select Send Settings. See Figure 8-41.

Figure 8-41

2. From Send Settings, select Send Destination List. See Figure 8-42.

Figure 8-42

3. From the Send Destination List dialog box select New or Change.

4. In the Send Destination Configuration dialog box (see Figure 8-43) do the following:

• Enter or change a Description of the destination to which images will be sent. This identi-fies the destination to the user (e.g., 1st Floor PACS).



• Enter or change the value for the DICOM AE Title defined on the Send Destination.

A DICOM AE Title is a DICOM specific name used to identify DICOM servers and clients on a network. The Send Destination you are connecting to has its own identify-ing AE title.

Figure 8-43

• Enter or change the Host Name/IP address of the Send Destination. • Enter or change the TCP/IP Port value in the Port field.

The TCP/IP port is a number used to specify a particular “network address” for the Send Destination. Typical values may be 104 or 4000; however, the value depends on the particular destination.



• Check Destination is an Archive to confirm the send destination is an archive system. This allows the images to be cleaned up by AutoDelete. This information is displayed in the Performed Studies list of the Magellan AI and the Study Image Manager.

• Check Send lossless compressed to apply a lossless compression technique applied an image without loss of data to the file, thus image quality is preserved. Unchecking Send lossless compressed sends the file without any compression.

• Check Burn in VOI LUT to burn in the VOI LUT instead of sending it as a DICOM tag. Not preferred in most cases.

• Check Burn in Scale Markers to burn scale markers into the edges of the image when the image is sent to a send destination.

• Select the image bit depth for the Send Destination from the Resample bit depth to drop-down list (select the highest bit depth that the Send Destination will allow).

• Check Different image uses different series UID if each image is to have a different Series UID. Leaving this unchecked results in each image in the study having the same Series UID.

• Check Include Series Description UID to include the contents of the Study Description tag in the Series Description tag. Leaving this unchecked will keep the Series Description out of the image header when it is sent to PACS.

• Check both Different image uses different series UID and Include Series Description UID to include the anatomy and projection of the image in the Series Description tag.

• Choose an option for sending the f#.•Do not send f# – the f# tag is not sent to the destination, and the tag is deleted

from the header.•Send f# in exposure tag (0018, 1405) – the default behaviour.•Send f# in custom tag (4321,1005) – moves the f# from the relative exposure tag

and places it in the custom tag.• Choose an option for cropping the sent images:

•Crop to mask – crops the image to the specified mask. This is the default.•No cropping – does not crop the image.•Crop to nearest film size – image size will be calculated and the image will be

cropped to the nearest film size located in the Film Size List. This option is only enabled if film sizes have been specified in the Film Size Settings dialog box.

• Check Storage Commitment Enabled if using a PACS with storage commitment capabilities.

• Add – Description, AE Title, Host Name/IP, and Port of new server. See Figure 8-44.

• Change – Description, AE Title, Host Name/IP, and Port of existing server. From the drop-down list, select the server and select Change.



Figure 8-44

5. Select OK.

8.12.1.1.3 To Remove a Destination from the Send Destination List1. From the Send Destination List dialog box, select the Send Destination that you want

to remove.

2. Select Remove.

3. In the Send Manager Confirmation dialog box choose Yes.

8.12.1.1.4 To Test the Connection of the Send Destination1. From the Send Destination List select the Send Destination that you want to test.

2. Select Test. A Test Connection dialog box appears giving the status of the connection.

3. While the Send Manager is attempting to connect to the destination, you may Cancel. Once the testing is complete, the status is displayed. See Figure 8-45.



Figure 8-45

8.12.1.1.5 To Change the Status of the Send Destinations1. In the Send Destination List, check the Active box for the Send Destinations that are to be

available to the technologist. Unchecking the Active box makes the Send Destination inactive and unavailable to a technologist. See Figure 8-46.

2. Select Apply to save the changes.

8.12.1.1.6 To Choose the Default Send Destination1. In the Send Destination List, check the Default box of the Send Destination to be the

default. More than one destination can be set as the default, allowing the user to send to multiple destinations. See Figure 8-46.

2. Select Apply to save the changes.

8.12.1.1.7 Changing the Order of Sending to Multiple DestinationsWhen multiple destinations are selected as default Send Destinations, they are placed in order as they appear on the list of destinations. This is the order that selected studies are sent to the destinations.



To change the order that selected studies are sent to the send destinations1. Select and hold the order button next to the Send Destination you want to move.

2. Drag in the direction you want to move the Destination in the list. As you drag, the order button changes colour and appears recessed. A heavy grey line indicates where the Send Destination will be moved in the Send Destination List.

3. When the Send Destination is moved to the desired location, release the mouse button. The Send Destination is repositioned in the list and the default destinations are renumbered.

8.12.1.1.8 Enabling IDC JPEG, IDC TIFF and IDC DICOMDIR Send DestinationsMagellan 3 can save studies as JPEG, TIFF and DICOMDIR by sending them to the IDC_SCP. When Magellan 3 is installed, three Send Destinations (IDC DICOMDIR, IDC JPEG and IDC TIFF) are automatically set up by the installer; however, these destinations need to be enabled to be available to the user. To enable these destinations1. In the Send Destination List select the Active boxes beside the IDC DICOMDIR, IDC

JPEG and IDC TIFF destinations to make them active.

Figure 8-46

2. Select Apply.

8.12.1.2 Configuring Film SizeFilm size can be configured in the Send Manager so images sent to the remote destinations are cropped to the nearest film size. Film sizes can be added or removed. Predefined film



sizes are 8x10, 11x14, and 14x17.

To Add a Film Size1. From Send Settings, select Film Size.

2. In the Film Size Settings (see Figure 8-47) dialog box do the following.

Figure 8-47

• Enter a Film Size Name to identify the film size.• Check either Imperial or Metric for the measurement units.• Enter the Height and Width of the film to which to crop the images.

3. Select Add.

To Remove a Film Size1. In the Film Size Setting dialog box select the Film Size name to highlight it.

2. Select Remove.

8.12.1.3 Configuring Sending Preferences Network problems can sometimes prevent studies from being sent successfully to a Send Destination by Magellan 3 or the Study Manager. In such cases, studies can be queued in the Send Manager and automatically sent again in a specified time period.

8.12.1.3.1 To Configure the Sending Preferences 1. From Send Settings, select Sending Preferences.

2. In the Sending Preferences dialog box Check Automatically retry sending to automatically retry sending queued images. See Figure 8-48.



Figure 8-48

3. Enter a time interval to resend studies in the Auto resend after text field and specify Minutes, Hours, or Days in the drop-down list.

4. Storage Commitment is used when performing long term storage or archiving on a different computer such as a PACS. If the PACS has Storage Commitment capabilities, enter the following information into the Storage Commitment Manager Details frame. For more information on Storage Commitment, see 8.2 “Storage Commitment Theory” on page 8-4.

• Check Send storage commitment requests to enable Storage Commitment requests to be sent to Send Destinations that have a configured Storage Commitment server.

NOTE: If enabling Storage Commitment, the Storage Commitment must be configuredfor each send destination from both the workstation and the storage computerlocation. See 8.12.1.1.2 “To Add or Change a Send Destination” to configure thesend destination from the workstation.

• Enter the AE Title of the Storage Commitment SCU.• Enter the Port of the Storage Commitment SCU.• Enter the Immediate Timeout – time in seconds in which the association will

remain open for immediate response• Enter the Delayed Timeout – time in hours in which a new association can be

made for delayed response. This time interval should be at least as long as the greater of: the interval between archives on the Send Destination and the minimum age of studies to be archived on the Send Destination.

• Enter the Maximum Attempts – number of delayed timeouts, failure responses, and resent requests before the image will be resent.



5. Select OK.


Magellan 3 Service • The Print Queue • 8 - 57

8.13 The Print QueueThe Print Queue operates as an intermediary between the Magellan 3 Workstation and any number of DICOM printers.The Print Queue can accept studies or images from the Magellan 3 AI and the Study Manager. The Print Queue Service runs in the background and ensures studies or individual images are sent to remote printers as requested by the Magellan 3 AI or the Study Manager. If studies cannot be sent immediately, the Print Queue automatically queues the studies so they can be sent later.There is no typical setup for printers because the support and usage of a printer’s characteristics depends on the printer model and version. The appearance of the printed output will depend on the printer’s characteristics and will vary depending upon your preferences.DICOM printers generally correspond to a print server, not an actual printer. A print server is a computer that acts as a common server to which a variety of printers are connected. Therefore the parameters specified here must be tailored to the printer and the print server.

NOTE: It is useful to have the DICOM Conformance Statement for the printer you areadding.

8.13.1 Print Settings

Configuring a DICOM printer requires the following information:• DICOM AE (Application Entity) title of the printer• Printer TCP/IP address ("IP address") or hostname• Printer TCP/IP port• Printer supports monochrome printing• Printer film size and type• Printer film destination

To open Print Settings, select the Print Settings from the Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-49.


8 - 58 • Magellan 3 Service • The Print Queue

Figure 8-49

8.13.2 To Configure Printer Settings

From the Configuration Manager select Printer Settings to open the Printer List dialog box. You can add, remove or copy a printer, change a printer’s settings, and select default and active printers. See Figure 8-49 above.



8.13.2.1 To Change the AE Title for Magellan 31. From the Printer List dialog box, select Change beside the AE Title. See Figure 8-50.

The text field can now be edited and the Change button is replaced with a Save button.

Figure 8-50

2. Enter the appropriate information in the AE Title text box.

3. Select Save.

8.13.2.2 Choosing Active and Default Printers1. Open the Printer List dialog box (see Figure 8-50) and do the following:

• Check the Active box for the printers that are to be available to the technologist. Unchecking the Active box makes the Printer inactive and unavailable to a technolo-gist.

• Check the Default box of the printer you want as the default. Only one printer can be set as the default.

2. Select Apply and OK.

8.13.2.3 Adding or Changing a Printer When you add a new printer or change a printer’s settings you can configure the Printer, the Settings, and the Film Layout Settings for the printer. For information on the general settings and film layout settings see 8.13.2.3.1 “To Configure a Printer’s Settings” on page 8.61 and 8.13.2.4 “Film Layout Settings” on page 8.67.



To Add or Change a Printer1. From the Printer List dialog box select New or Change.

2. In the Printer Settings dialog box (see Figure 8-51) do the following:

Figure 8-51

• Enter or change a Description of the printer. The description is used to identify the printer to the user (e.g., Kodak-3 Printer).

• Enter or change the value for the AE Title defined on the printer.

A DICOM AE Title is a DICOM specific name used to identify DICOM servers and cli-ents on a network. The printer you are connecting to has its own identifying AE title.



• Enter or change the Host name/IP address of the destination printer. • Enter or change the TCP/IP Port value in the Port field.

The TCP/IP port is a number used to specify a particular “network address” for the printer. Typical values may be 104 or 4000; however, the value depends on the partic-ular printer.

3. Select Apply to save your settings and select OK.

8.13.2.3.1 To Configure a Printer’s Settings1. Depending on the item in the Settings box, you can configure the setting by entering

text in the text field or by selecting the arrow to the right of the field to display a drop-down list of options. For a description of the settings, refer to Table 8-1 below.

2. Select Apply and OK to apply and save the settings.



Table 8-1

Setting Name Description

Print Priority The priority given to the print job (HIGH, MED, or LOW).

Medium Type Choose between medium types (CLEAR FILM, BLUE FILM, and PAPER) or enter a medium type in the text box.

Film Destination

PROCESSOR means the exposed film is developed in the film processor. MAGAZINE specifies that exposed film should be stored in a film magazine.

BIN_i (1-30) specifies sorter bins on the printer that has a sorter where “i” is the bin number, ranging from 1-30. If the printer does not have a sorter, the default PROCESSOR will be used. A specific ID for the printer can be entered.

Film Session Label A readable label that identifies the film session.

Magnification TypeThe interpolation type by which the printer magnifies the image in order to fit the image into the image box on the film. This is printer specific and should be obtained from the printer’s DICOM Conformance Statement.

Smoothing Type This is printer specific and should be obtained from the printer’s DICOM Conformance Statement.

Border Density Border Density specifies whether the area around and between images is WHITE or BLACK.

Empty Image DensityThis specifies whether the image box that does not contain an image is WHITE or BLACK. If printing five images in a six-up layout, there will be one empty image box.

Minimum Density

This specifies the degree of brightness of light shades in the image. The lower will produce brighter whites. If set to 0, this density information will not be sent with images, and the printer will use its default density. These values express the brightness in hundredths (e.g., 40 is 0.40 OD).

Maximum Density

This specifies the degree of darkness of dark shades in the image. A higher number will produce darker blacks. If set to 0, this density information will not be sent with images, and the printer will use its default density. These values express the darkness in hundredths (e.g., 300 is 3.00 OD).

Trim Trim specifies whether a trim box is printed surrounding each image on the page. YES will print a trim box around each image. NO will not print a trim box.

Configuration Information A printer specific configuration instruction.

Polarity Choose between REVERSE and NORMAL. Reverse prints with the black part of images reversed to white and white reversed to black.

Photometric Interpretation Choose between MONOCHROME1 and MONOCHROME2. This is printer specific.

Print Bit Depth The bit depth that the printer will accept. If the printer will handle a bit depth of 12, leave it at 12. If not, choose a bit depth the printer will handle.



8.13.2.3.2 Configuring DICOM Annotation Box SettingsThe Use DICOM Annotation Box settings specifies whether annotations can be printed on the film. When Yes is selected in the Use DICOM Annotation Box drop-down list, a Settings button appears. Selecting this button opens the DICOM Annotations dialog box. See Figure 8-52.In the DICOM Annotation dialog box, the Annotation Display Format ID is displayed. This is defined by the DICOM printer and implies a specific layout of the available annotation boxes of a film.

True Size Print

Always prints the image at true size.

Shrink to fit will shrink the image, if necessary, to fit the image box.

Printer default size will shrink or enlarge the image, depending on the printer.

Use DICOM Annotation Box

If this option is set to Yes, a Settings button appears. Selecting the Settings button displays the DICOM Annotations dialog box. To use this feature, the printer must support BASIC ANNOTATION BOX SOP class. For more information about annotation settings see 8.13.2.3.2 “Configuring DICOM Annotation Box Settings” .

Print Information on

Images

If this option is set to Yes, a Settings button appears. Selecting the Settings button displays the Print Information on Images dialog box.

For more information about Print Information settings see 8.13.2.3.3 “Configuring the Print Information” on page 8.65

Burn in Scale Markers Selecting Yes will display a measurement scale on the edges of the printed image.

Pad Image to Fill Image Box Guarantees the image will fill the image box when printing True Size.




Figure 8-52

To Configure Print Annotations on Images do the following: • Enter or change the Annotation Display Format ID.• In the Box # drop-down list, select the box number to which you want to add an annota-

tion. The number of boxes available and the location of these boxes is determined by the individual printer.

Any text can be printed in the annotation. The % symbol is used to substitute information as described below:

•%P – Print Date (Today)•%N – Patient Name (Full Name)•%B – Patient Date of Birth •%G – Patient Sex (M, F, or O)•%I – Patient ID•%D – Study Date •%T – Study Time (HH:MM)•%A – Accession number



•%% – “%” Character•%U – User Tag (% U(gggg,eeee))

• In the Format field, enter any text or code (e.g., %G) from the Input Legend that you want to appear in the box. Entering %N will display the patient’s name in the annota-tion box. If you want “Sex: M” to appear on the image, enter “Sex: %G” in the text field. The Output Example displays how the code will appear on the image.

3. Select OK.

8.13.2.3.3 Configuring the Print Information The Print Information on Images allows you to specify whether text can be burned on an image. In the Printer Settings list, when Yes is selected in the Print Information on Images drop-down list, a Settings button appears to the right. Selecting this button opens the Print Information on Images dialog box. See Figure 8-53.In the Print Information on Images dialog box you can burn in multiple lines of text in each of the six locations on an image. Locations can be Top Left, Top Center, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Center, or Bottom Right.



Figure 8-53

The Font Size for the Print Information can be specified by selecting the font in the drop-down list.Any text can be specified to be printed. The % symbol is used to substitute information as described below:

• %P – Print Date (Today)• %N – Patient Name (Last, First Middle)• %B – Patient Date of Birth



• %G – Patient Sex (M, F, or O)• %I – Patient ID• %D – Study Date (M/D/YYYY)• %T – Study Time (HH:MM)• %A – Accession number• %% – “%” Character• %C – Image Comment (0020,4000)• %U – User Tag (%U(gggg,eeee))• %Y – Anatomy• %J – Projection• %E – POD Mode• %F – f#• %K – kV• %M – mA• %X – mAs• %S – ms

• %O – DAP (Unit mGy.cm2)• %L – Level• %W – Window

8.13.2.3.4 To Configure Print Information on Images1. From the drop-down list, select a Location for the information to appear.

2. In the All annotations field, enter the text (eg.%N) from the Input Legend of what you want to appear in the specified location.

3. To add more Print Information in the same location, press Enter and repeat Step 2. Select OK.

8.13.2.4 Film Layout SettingsFilm settings must be set for each specific printer. Consult the printer’s DICOM Conformance Statement for more information.

8.13.2.4.1 To Configure Available Film Sizes1. From the Printer Settings dialog box select Film Layout Settings.

2. In the Film Selection dialog box (see Figure 8-54) check all the Film Sizes you want available for the printer and select a default Film Size.



Figure 8-54

3. Select OK to save the settings or select a film and select the Image Box Settings button to set the Image Box Size settings for the selected film.

8.13.2.4.2 To Set the Image Formats1. Select the Film Size that you want to format.

2. Select Image Box Settings to open the Image Box Size Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-55.

NOTE: If the film size selected is square (e.g., 14INx14IN) only one Image Box Size SettingGrid is displayed. If the film size is rectangular, two grids are displayed, one forportrait and one for landscape.



Figure 8-55

3. If necessary, specify the Image Box Size Settings for Portrait and Landscape film orientations by selecting the Image Box Layouts that you want to be available for that film size and orientation. For example, 1-up indicates that one image will be printed on the print medium and 8-up indicates that eight images will be printed on the print medium in a 2x4 format.

4. For each layout available, enter a measurement for the Width and Height of the image (in millimeters).

5. Select Apply to apply the settings. Repeat for other Image Box Layouts. Select OK to exit.

8.13.3 To Remove a Printer from the Printer List

1. From the Configuration Manager select Printer Settings.

2. In the Printer List (see Figure 8-56) select the printer that you want to remove from the list.



Figure 8-56

3. Select Remove.

4. The Print Manager Confirmation dialog box appears. See Figure 8-57. Select Yes to remove the printer.

Figure 8-57

8.13.3.1 To Copy the Settings of a Printer The settings of a printer can be copied to a new printer.1. From the Configuration Manager, select Printer Settings.

2. From the Printer Description list, select the printer whose settings you want to copy. See Figure 8-58.



Figure 8-58

3. Select Copy. A new printer is added to the list and is displayed as a copy of the selected printer.

4. To rename the copied printer, double-click on the printer in the list or select the printer in the list and select the Change button. This displays the Printer Settings dialog box, allowing you to rename the printer or edit the printer’s settings.

8.13.3.2 To Test the Printer’s Connection1. From the Configuration Manager, select Printer Settings.

2. In the Printer List dialog box, select the printer you want to test.

3. Select Test to open the Test Connection dialog box, giving the status of the connection. See Figure 8-59.



Figure 8-59

4. While the Print Manager is attempting to connect to the printer, you may Cancel. Once the testing is complete, the status is displayed.


Magellan 3 Service • Study/Image Settings • 8 - 73

8.14 Study/Image SettingsIn Study/Image Settings, you can configure Xporter FTP.

To Open the Study/Image SettingsSelect Study/Image Settings from the Configuration Manager dialog box to open the Study/Image Settings dialog box. See Figure 1.

Figure 8-60

8.14.1 To Configure Xporter FTP

1. From the Configuration Manager, select the Study/Image Settings.

2. Select Configure Xporter FTP to open the FTP Options dialog box. See Figure 8-61.

Figure 8-61


8 - 74 • Magellan 3 Service • Study/Image Settings

3. In the Address field enter the FTP address to which you want to connect.

4. In the Port field enter the Port number on which the FTP server is listening.

5. Enter a User Name.

6. Enter a Password.

7. If you use a proxy server to connect to the Internet, check the checkbox next to Use Proxy. Enter an Address for the proxy server. Enter the Port number on which the proxy server is listening.

8. Test the connection by selecting Test Connection.

9. Select OK to save the options or select Cancel to exit the dialog box without saving.


Magellan 3 Service • Grid Detection • 8 - 75

8.15 Grid Detection Specific grids are required for certain exams. In order to ensure the proper grid is in place, Magellan 3 can detect the following possibilities:

• No Grid.• Grid focused for 180 cm (72 in). • Grid focused for 140 cm (55 in).• Grid focused for 120 cm (48 in).• Grid focused for 100 cm (40 in).• Grid focused for QA Phantom.• Grid in Backwards.

Magellan 3 will check the examination ordered and compare its grid requirement with what it has detected. If a match is not found, the operator will be prompted to make the change.

NOTE: An exposure is still possible if the operator chooses to ignore the prompt.

The grid detect board reads the presence of magnets attached to the grid. The values sensed by the grid detect board are sent as an analog signal to the TECC connnected to Channel 1 (J7). The TECCM converts this value using a look-up table located in the file xray_grids.ini. This file should not be modified. The Magellan 3 AI queries the TECCM for the current grid. The values that come in on Channel 1 to the TECCM are matched against a look up table which is located in C:\Magellan2\Conf\TECCM.ini. The information converted in the TECCM is typically within the provided values:

• No Grid: 961-1023 • 180 cm (72 in): 705 -768• 140 cm (55 in): 449 -512• 120 cm (48 in): 321 - 384• 100 cm (40 in): 193 - 256• QA Phantom 577 - 640 • Grid Backwards: 832-996

If the values provided by the TECCM are outside the listed values by a small range, it is possible to adjust the previous values so that everything coincides.

CAUTION! Be careful not to overlap value ranges!


8 - 76 • Magellan 3 Service • Grid Detection

8.15.1 To Enable Grid Detect

1. From the Configuration Manager, select Acquisition Interface.

2. From the Acquisition Configuration dialog box select Institution Settings to open the Institution Settings dialog box. See Figure 8-62.

Figure 8-62

3. Check enable Grid Detect.


Magellan 3 Service • The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr) • 8 - 77

8.16 The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)An image is reprocessed using a Visual Parameter Editor. The Visual Parameter Editor can be accessed through the Reprocess Image button. Using the editor, you can edit the image processing parameters of a single image, save changes as the defaults for that image, or save the changes as default parameters for multiple images.

8.16.1 To Open the Visual Parameter Editor

NOTE: Sent images cannot be reprocessed or modified. Copied images may byreprocessed and modified.

1. From Performed Studies, open a study.

2. Select the image to edit.

3. Select the Reprocess Image button. See Figure 8-63 and Figure 8-65.

Figure 8-63

4. Reprocessing will remove any existing shutter, crop, markers, points, and text annotations. A dialog box will prompt for you to confirm the task. See Figure 8-64 and Figure 8-65.

Figure 8-64


8 - 78 • Magellan 3 Service • The Visual Parameter Editor (ViPEr)

Figure 8-65

8.16.1.1 To Edit the Parameters in the Visual Parameter Editor1. From the Visual Parameter Editor, select one of the options from the Contrast Control

drop-down list (Figure 8-66):

Figure 8-66

• Select ICE LUT to create the default LUT for an image with that anatomy/projection/level/size. Modifying the brightness, contrast, and straightness will create a default ICE LUT that is used when an exposure is first created.

• Selecting Window Level (W/L) from the drop-down list will display the image with a window level based on the current brightness and contrast parameters.



2. The Contrast Parameters can be modified by using the buttons on the left side of the editor. See Table 9 for explanations of each contrast parameter.

To modify the Contrast Parameters, do one of the following:

• Select the parameter to modify. The selected parameter is indicated by a larger font on the button. To increase or decrease the values, click on the up or down arrows. See Figure 8-67 below. The changed values will appear on the contrast button, and the change can be viewed in the After preview image.

• Click on the slider above the parameter value to open the contrast parameter slider. See Figure 8-67 and Figure 8-68. Increase or decrease the values by clicking and drag-ging the slider to the required parameter value, or enter the value in the Value field.

Figure 8-67

Figure 8-68

Table 9

Contrast Parameters Description

Brightness Determines the brightness of an image. Minus one indicates a dark image, whereas Plus one indicates a bright image.

Contrast Determines the contrast of an image. The higher the number the lower the contrast.

Straightness Ten indicates a straight LUT. Zero indicates a curved LUT.

slider

active parametervalue



3. Select the Enhancement Version as Standard or PureView depending on what has been configured with your system. See Figure 8-69.

Figure 8-69

4. The following enhancement parameters will be given depending on what enhancement version has been configured with your system:

• Standard – The Enhancement Parameters can be modified by using the buttons on the left side of the editor. See Table 10 for explanations of each enhancement parameter. To increase the Parameter value, click the up arrow on the button. To modify the Enhancement Parameters do one of the following:

• Select the parameter to modify. The selected parameter is indicated by a larger font on the button. To increase or decrease the values, click on the up or down arrows. See Figure 8-70 below. The changed values will appear on the button, and the change can be viewed in the After preview image.

•Click on the slider above the parameter value to open the contrast parameter slider. See Figure 8-70 and Figure 8-71. Increase or decrease the values by clicking and dragging the slider to the required parameter value, or enter the value in the Value field.

Table 10

Enhancement Parameter Description

Sharpening Amount Amount of sharpening applied to an image. 0 indicates no sharpening is applied to the image, whereas 10 indicates that the maximum amount of sharpening is applied to the image.

Sharpening Kernel Determines the size of sharpening kernel. Zero enhances small details, whereas 10 enhances large details.

Equalization Strength Determines the dynamic range compression. Zero indicates there is no compression, whereas 100 indicates a high level of compression.

Equalization Kernel Determines the area of the kernel. Zero indicates a small kernel area, whereas 1000 indicates a large kernel area.

Equalization Iterations Reduces the black border, caused by equalization, from around the anatomy.

Noise Reduction Reduces the amount of background noise and sharpness in the image. Zero indicates low noise reduction and 10 indicates high noise reduction.



Figure 8-70

Figure 8-71

• PureView – The enhancement parameters can be modified by selecting from the anat-omy and projection drop-down lists. See Figure 8-72. The selections made from the drop-down list can be previewed on the After preview field. If your system does not have PureView, a prompt will inform you a valid license is necessary to use PureView image enhancements.

active parameter value

slider



Figure 8-72

5. Once the changes made to the image are complete, select one of the following:

• Save to Current – will save the modified parameters of the reprocessed image as the default for all images with the same anatomy/projection/level/size.

• Save to Multiple – will save the modified parameters as defaults for multiple projections. After selecting Save to Multiple a Save to dialog will prompt you to select the Anatomy, Projection, and Level to save the parameters to. This will save the modified parameters as the defaults for all selected images. If more than one Anatomy, Projection, and Level are being selected, hold the ctrl key while clicking on the various selections. See Figure 8-73.



Figure 8-73

• Save Image Only – will save only the modified image. Selecting this option will not change the default parameters.

• Reset – will reset the parameters to their original settings.• Cancel – will cancel or close the reprocessed image.


8 - 84 • Magellan 3 Service • The Parameter Editor

8.17 The Parameter EditorIn the Parameter Editor you can manage anatomies, projections and levels, and edit A/P pairs.To open the Parameter Editor, select Parameter Editor from the Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-74.

Figure 8-74


Magellan 3 Service • The Parameter Editor • 8 - 85

8.17.1 Managing the Anatomies

From the Parameter Editor select Manage Anatomies (see Figure 8-75) to open the Anatomy Manager dialog box. See Figure 8-76.

NOTE: Locked items in the Anatomy list are configured by IDC and are uneditable.

Figure 8-75

Figure 8-76



8.17.1.1 To Add a New Anatomy1. Select Add New to activate the Anatomy Details fields. See Figure 8-77.

Figure 8-77

2. Enter the Anatomy Name and the DICOM Code. This is a DICOM value code obtained from the DICOM specifications.

3. Select Save to add the anatomy to the Anatomy list and the database. Saving the anatomy allows you to add another anatomy.

8.17.1.2 Modifying an Anatomy



Because an anatomy may be associated with a study, an anatomy cannot be permanently removed from the Existing Anatomies list. A selected anatomy can be modified by changing the Anatomy Details, changing the laterality option of the selected anatomy, or can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing Anatomies list. Anatomies with laterality are indicated with a mark in the Has Laterality checkbox. If there is no mark in the checkbox, then the anatomy is treated as unpaired. See Figure 8-78.

Figure 8-78

Inactive anatomies are displayed in red and marked as inactive. A mark in the Inactive checkbox indicates the anatomy is unavailable. Before using an inactive anatomy to create a pair or set parameter values for pairs, the anatomy must be reactivated.To display the inactive anatomies, select Show Inactive Anatomies.

8.17.1.2.1 To Modify the Laterality of an Anatomy1. Open the Parameter Editor by selecting Parameter Editor in the Configuration

Manager.

2. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Anatomies.



3. From the Existing Anatomies list, select the anatomy.


• To allow the anatomy to have laterality, select the Has Laterality checkbox. • To remove the laterality of an anatomy, deselect the Has Laterality checkbox.

5. Select Save. Depending on what change has been done to the laterality, the following will occur:

• If an anatomy has been changed from laterality to having no laterality, a dialog box will notify you that the related procedure steps will be automatically updated to have unpaired laterality. See Figure 8-79.

Figure 8-79

• If an anatomy has been changed from no laterality to having laterality, a dialog box will notify you that the related procedure steps must be manually updated immediately after saving. Assign patient laterality be selecting the configuration as right, left or both. See Figure 8-80 and Figure 8-81.

Figure 8-80



Figure 8-81

• Once completed, select OK.

8.17.1.3 To Modify the Activity or Details of an Anatomy1. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Anatomies.

2. From the Existing Anatomies list, select the anatomy.


• To deactivate the anatomy, select the Inactive checkbox. • To recover an inactive anatomy, deselect the Inactive checkbox.• To change the Anatomy Details, edit the information as required

4. Select Save to update the selected anatomy's information in the database and to update the Anatomy list.

8.17.2 Managing the Projections

In the Parameter Editor you can add, edit or deactivate projections.From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Projections (see Figure 8-82) to open the Projection Manager dialog box. See Figure 8-83.

NOTE: Locked items in the Projection list are configured by IDC and are uneditable.

Figure 8-82



Figure 8-83



8.17.2.0.1 To Create a New Projection 1. Select Add New to activate the Projection Details fields. See Figure 8-84.

Figure 8-84

2. Enter the Projection Name and the DICOM Code. This is a DICOM value code obtained from the DICOM specifications.

3. Select Save to add the projection to the Projection list and the database. Saving the projection allows you to add another projection.

8.17.2.0.2 Modifying a ProjectionBecause a projection may be associated with a study, a projection cannot be permanently removed from the Existing Projection list. A selected projection can be modified by



changing the Projection Details or can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Existing Projections list. Inactive projections are displayed in red and marked as inactive.A mark in the Inactive checkbox indicates the projection is unavailable. Before using an inactive projection to create a pair or set parameter values for pairs, the projection must be reactivated.To display the inactive projections, select the Show Inactive Projections.

8.17.2.0.2.1 To Modify a Projection

1. From the Parameter Editor, select Manage Projections.

2. From the Existing Projections list, select the projection.


• To deactivate the projection, select the Inactive checkbox. • To recover an inactive projection, deselect the Inactive checkbox.• To change the Projection Details, edit the information as required

4. Select Save to update the selected Projection’s information in the database and to update the Projection list.

8.17.3 About Anatomy/Projection Pairs

When a study is started in the Magellan 3 AI, the Scheduled Procedure Step is received from the Worklist Manager. The Procedure maps to an ordered set of Anatomy/Projection pairs. These pairs have corresponding sets of parameters that determine how the image is acquired and processed. For example, if the procedure is Routine Chest, the procedure likely requires two images: Chest, Postero-anterior and Chest, Left Lateral.

NOTE: Locked Levels in the Anatomy/Projection Pairs list are configured by IDC and areuneditable.

8.17.3.1 To Create or Remove a Anatomy/Projection Pair1. In the Parameter Editor, select the Anatomy in the Anatomy/Projection tree for which

you want to add or remove a projection.

2. Select Edit A/P Pair.

3. In the Pair Selection dialog box all projections currently paired with the named anatomy are checked. See Figure 8-85.



Figure 8-85

4. Check or uncheck the Projection Name to create or remove an anatomy/projection pair.

5. Select Close.

NOTE: The anatomy and projection must be active before creating a new pair. For moreinformation about deactivating or reactivating projections and anatomies, seeSection 8.17.1.2, “Modifying an Anatomy” and Section 8.17.2.0.2, “Modifying aProjection”.



8.17.3.2 To Add a New Level to an Anatomy/Projection Pair1. Open the Parameter Editor.

2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy and projection to which to add the level. See Figure 8-86.

Figure 8-86

3. Select Manage Levels (see Figure 8-87).



Figure 8-87

4. In the Level Manager dialog box (see Figure 8-88) a new level can be added or an existing level can be edited. Do one of the following:

• To add a level, select Add New and enter the Level Name. Select Save. The parame-ters assigned to the Anatomy/Projection/Level combination are the default settings.

• To edit an existing level, select the name in the Existing Levels list and edit the Level Name.

Figure 8-88

5. Select Close.



8.17.3.3 To Copy Parameter Values from Other Anatomy/Projection Pairs1. Open the Parameter Editor.

2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy, projection, and level you want to obtain the parameter values for. When the level is selected, the Parameter Details for that anatomy/projection/level combination are displayed.

3. Select the Copy From button (see Figure 8-89).

Figure 8-89

4. In the Copy From dialog box (see Figure 8-90) expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree to display and select the anatomy, projection, and level you want to copy the parameter values from. When the level is selected, the Parameter Details for that anatomy/projection/level combination are displayed.



Figure 8-90

5. All the parameter values or selected parameter values can be copied. Do one of the following:

• To copy all the parameter values select Copy All. • To copy a specific parameter, select the parameter from the list, highlighting it. Multi-

ple items can be selected by holding down the Ctrl button on the keyboard. Select Copy Selected. The selected parameters from this combination are copied into the previously selected combination.



8.17.3.4 To Modify Parameter Details for Existing Anatomy/Projection Pairs1. Open the Parameter Editor. See Figure 8-91.

Figure 8-91

2. Expand the Anatomy/Projection Pairs tree and select the anatomy, projection, and level to modify. When the level is selected, the Parameter Details for that anatomy/projection/level combination are displayed. The parameter values displayed are either the default values for the pair or pre-defined values for the pair at the given parameter level.



3. Modify the processing parameters by selecting the item on the grid and selecting the button that is displayed. See Table 8-1 for explanations of each processing parameter.

Table 8-1


Arcoma Position Parameters

AutoPosition Allows you to select pre-set positions if the facility has an Arcoma Ceiling Mount Tube installed. The default is None. To names of the preset positions can be changed in the Arcoma CMT Configuration dialog box which is accessed by clicking on the Arcoma icon located in the task bar. See 8.20.2 “To Configure AutoPosition” .

Contrast

Brightness Determines the brightness of an image. Minus one indicates a dark image, whereas Plus one indicates a bright image.

Contrast Determines the contrast of an image. The higher the number the lower the contrast.

Straightness Ten indicates a straight LUT. Zero indicates a curved LUT.

Device Options

Film Speed The film speed normally used with this particular anatomy/projection pair.

Orientation Assists in the automatic selection of Flat Field for stands that can place the Detector Head in different orientations. Choose between Vertical, Horizontal and N/A (default). Choose the normal SID and orientation for the anatomy and projection. Based on the Flat Field images selected in the Detector Calibration dialog box, Magellan will automatically select the best SID and orientation combination. Magellan will give SID priority over orientation. E.g., For a 100 cm upright exposure, the 100 cm vertical Flat Field will be used. Even though this exposure is upright, a 180 cm vertical Flat Field will not be selected because this would not give priority to SID.

Grid Determines if the grid is needed.

POD Mode Indicates the Pixel Optimized Dose Mode for this anatomy and projection. The options are High Efficiency and High Resolution.

SID (cm) Indicates the Source to Image Distance.

Enhancements

Sharpening Amount Amount of sharpening applied to an image. 0 indicates no sharpening is applied to the image, whereas 10 indicates that the maximum amount of sharpening is applied to the image.

Sharpening Kernel Determines the size of sharpening kernel. Zero enhances small details, whereas 10 enhances large details.



Equalization Strength Determines the dynamic range compression. Zero indicates there is no compression, whereas 100 indicates a high level of compression.

Equalization Kernel Determines the area of the kernel. Zero indicates a small kernel area, whereas 1000 indicates a large kernel area.

Equalization Iterations Reduces the black border, caused by equalization, from around the anatomy.

Noise Reduction Reduces the amount of background noise and sharpness in the image. Zero indicates low noise reduction and 10 indicates high noise reduction.

Despeckle Turning despeckle ON for large anatomies may decrease high contrast detail and turning it OFF for small anatomies may increase high contrast detail.

Exposure Settings

Exposure Technique Select from AEC, mA/ms, mAs

kV Choose between 40 and 150

mA Choose between 0 and 1000

ms Choose between 10 and 6300

mAs Choose between 3.2 and 1000

Focal Spot Choose between Small and Large

AEC Field Left Choose between Off and On

AEC Field Center Choose between Off and On

AEC Field Right Choose between Off and On

AEC Density Choose between -4 and 4

AEC Sensitivity Choose between slow, medium, and fast

Generator Workstation This setting allows you to match anatomy and projections with Detector Heads or workstations. Choose from 1 to 6 Detectors.

Hanging Protocol

Mirror Image Flips the image across a vertical axis. Yes indicates that the image will be mirrored. No indicates that the image will not be mirrored.

Rotate Determines auto-rotate increments. Zero indicates no rotation, -90 rotates image 90º counterclockwise, 90 rotates image 90º clockwise, and 180 rotates the image 180º.

Shutter The shape of the auto shutter when an image is displayed. The options are None, Rectangular, and Polygonal.

Table 8-1




4. Select Close to save the parameters.

Shuttering

Right Edge, Top Edge, Left Edge, and Bottom Edge

Determines the sensitivity of auto-shuttering on the specified edge. It measures the sensitivity of the shutter such that 0 is not sensitive and 10 is very sensitive.

1600 Plus Positioning

Preset Position Choose a Preset position for the 1600 Plus from the drop down list.The default is None.

Collimator X Position (mm) Set the collimator position for the X axis in mm.

Collimator Y Position (mm) Set the collimator position for the Y axis in mm.

Table 8-1



8 - 102 • Magellan 3 Service • Managing the Procedures

8.18 Managing the ProceduresManaging Procedures allows you to activate or deactivate a procedure, import procedures from a worklist, and add, remove, and duplicate steps from a procedure.

To Manage the Procedures Select Manage Procedures from the Configuration Manager to open the Manage Procedures dialog box.

8.18.0.1 To Add an Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure1. Select Manage Procedures from the Configuration Manager to open the Manage

Procedures dialog box.

2. From the Manage Procedures dialog box select a procedure from the Procedures list. See Figure 8-92.

Figure 8-92

3. Select Add Step to open the Add Step dialog box. See Figure 8-93.


Magellan 3 Service • Managing the Procedures • 8 - 103

Figure 8-93

4. Expand the tree and select an anatomy, laterality, projection and level. To select multiple projections and levels, hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard while making your selections.

5. Select OK to add the anatomy, projection and level to the Steps list.

6. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all required steps are added.

7. Select OK.

8.18.0.2 Activating or Deactivating ProceduresBecause a procedure has studies associated with it, it cannot be removed from the Procedures list. Procedures can be made inactive (hidden) or active (available) in the Procedures list. Inactive procedures are displayed in red.



8.18.0.3 To Activate or Deactivate a Procedure1. From the Parameter Manager select Manage Procedures.

NOTE: To display the inactive procedures select the Show Inactive Procedures checkbox.

2. In the Manage Procedures dialog box select the Procedure in the Procedure Name list and do one of the following:

• Select the Inactive Procedure checkbox to deactivate the procedure.• Deselect the Inactive Procedure checkbox to activate the procedure. See Figure 8-94.

Figure 8-94

8.18.0.4 To Delete Procedures and Import Procedures from a WorklistIn preparation for importing procedures from a database, all the existing procedures can be deleted from the Procedures list by selecting Delete All Procedures.

To import procedures from the hospital’s worklist1. If necessary, select Delete All Procedures to delete the existing procedures.

2. Select Import From Worklist. Procedures from the worklist will be automatically imported into the Procedures list. The anatomy and projection steps have to be added for each of the procedures imported.



8.18.0.5 To Remove or Duplicate an Anatomy/Procedure Step1. From the Manage Procedures dialog box select the procedure.

2. Select the Anatomy/Projection step. This activates the Remove Step and Duplicate Step buttons. See Figure 8-95.

Figure 8-95


• To remove an Anatomy/Projection step, select Remove Step. • To duplicate an Anatomy/Projection step, select Duplicate Step.

8.18.0.6 To Change the Order of Procedure Steps1. In the Manage Procedures dialog box, select the procedure of the steps you want to

move.

2. Select the Anatomy/Projection step you wish to move.

3. Selecting the Up and Down arrows to move the step up or down in the list. See Figure 8-96



Figure 8-96



8.18.0.7 To Create a New Procedure1. In the Manage Procedures dialog box select New to activate the Procedure Name

field. See Figure 8-97.

Figure 8-97

2. Enter the new Procedure Name.

3. Select New to add the Procedure to the Manage Procedures list or select Add Step to add steps to the new procedure. For more information see Section 8.18.0.1, “To Add an Anatomy/Projection Step to an Existing Procedure”.


8 - 108 • Magellan 3 Service • Import Data

8.19 Import Data1. From the Configuration Manager, select Import Data. See Figure 8-98.

Figure 8-98

2. Select Import From to open the Import Data dialog box.

3. Navigate to the file you want to import.

4. Select Open to display the file in the Location field.

5. Select the items to be imported. Selecting Users allows you to import users, selecting Anatomies/Projections/Values allows you to import anatomies, projections, levels and parameter values, and selecting Procedures allows you to import procedures.

6. Select Import.


Magellan 3 Service • Configuring the Arcoma CMT • 8 - 109

8.20 Configuring the Arcoma CMT

NOTE: You will only need to configure the Arcoma CMT if the facility has an ArcomaCMT installed.

To configure the Arcoma CMT settings, select Arcoma CMT Settings from the Configuration Manager. See Figure 8-99.

Figure 8-99

Once logged on, the Arcoma CMT Control dialog box is displayed. From here you can set the COM Port connection, Configure AutoPositioning and test the connection to the CMT.

8.20.1 To Set the COM Port Connection

1. From the COM Port drop-down list, select the COM port that you want to connect to.

2. Select OK. The CMT is automatically connected to the COM port selected.

8.20.2 To Configure AutoPosition

Configure AutoPosition allows preset positions to be given a more meaningful and user-friendly name. To do this1. Select the Configure AutoPosition button to open the Arcoma CMT AutoPosition

Configuration dialog box.


8 - 110 • Magellan 3 Service • Configuring the Arcoma CMT

Figure 8-100

2. Move the CMT into the preset position you want to rename.

3. Enter the Position Name into the text field beside the Position #.

4. Select OK. The Position number will now be displayed with the new Position Name.

8.20.3 To Test the AutoPosition #

1. Select the AutoPosition # from the Test AutoPosition # drop-down list.

2. Select Send. The selected AutoPosition is displayed in the Send dialog box and the name is displayed on the CMT.


DETECTOR TROUBLESHOOTING

The following information is included:9.1 “Error Codes” 9.2 “Failed Focus Troubleshooting”


9 - 2 • Detector Troubleshooting •




1.0 June 1, 2007 Module updates.


Detector Troubleshooting • Error Codes • 9 - 3

9.1 Error CodesMove the mouse cursor over the Detector Manager icon to display a tooltip indicating Detector Head error codes.

Table 1

Message Action

Error 2: The Thermo-Electrical Cooler Control Voltage has gone over range.

Ensure the fan openings on the detector are not blocked and that the room temperature is below +35°C. If this error persists, please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 3: The Thermo-Electrical Cooler Control Voltage has gone under range.

Ensure the ambient room temperature is above -10°C. If this error persists, please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 4: The Thermo-Electrical Cooler PWM period has gone over range.

Ensure the fan openings on the detector are not blocked and that the room temperature is below +35°C. If this error persists, please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 5: The Thermo-Electrical Cooler PWM period has gone under range.

Ensure the ambient room temperature is above -10°C. If this error persists, please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 6: The fan on the Thermo-Electrical Cooler has failed and has shut the cooling off.

Please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 7: The fan in the Power Box has failed.

Please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 8: One of the Cooling Fans for the Camera has failed.

Replace the fan at the earliest convenience. If this error persists, please discontinue use and contact technical support.

Error 9: Both of the Cooling Fans for the Camera have failed.

Please discontinue use and contact technical support immediately.

Error 10: A critical cooling failure has occurred.

Please discontinue use and contact technical support immediately.

Error: A power supply problem has been detected.

If this error persists, please contact technical support.


9 - 4 • Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting

9.2 Failed Focus TroubleshootingWhen a Detector Head fails due to poor focus, a number of questions and tests must be performed to help determine what has gone wrong. This procedure describes many of these questions/tests and explains why they are necessary.

9.2.1 Resolution Description

Answer the following questions and perform the following test procedure to help IDC Service Technicians determine why the focus failed.

9.2.2 Materials and Tools

• Delcano software• High contrast resolution linepair target (preferably more than one)

9.2.3 Work Instructions

9.2.3.1 Typical Test ProcedureThe following procedure is a summary of the High-Contrast Resolution section of the Acceptance Testing Procedure. Ensure that all these steps are being completed correctly when taking resolution images.1. Ensure the Detector Head has thermally stabilized. The lens on the Detector Head takes

many hours to stabilize after being exposed to extreme temperatures. We recommend opening the Detector Head crate but keeping the bag inside sealed for at least half of a day while acclimatizing to the new room temperature.

2. Open Delcano. If Magellan has been opened, exit the application before opening Delcano.

3. Turn off Geometric Correction by unchecking Apply Geometric Correction.

4. Set the Integration Time to 4000 ms.

5. Remove the Grid. Grids must be removed for focus images.

6. Place the line pair at a 45° angle to the edge of the faceplate. If the corner focus is the problem, ensure the line pair is orientated radially outwards. Imagine a line from the centre to the corner and ensure the line pairs are parallel to that line. See Figure 9-1.


Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting • 9 - 5

Figure 9-1

7. Set the Anatomy to Calibration/High Contrast.

8. Ensure the camera temperature has stabilized to -10°C. It is a good idea to wait at least 10 minutes after the camera has reached -10°C before taking images.

9. Expose the linepairs at a technique of 50 kVp, small focal spot, and enough mAs to result in the DNs to be more than about 3000 and less than about 13000. For 180 cm SID, this is generally 40 mAs.

10.Sharpen the image by selecting Enhance. In the Sharpen dialog box, select Box Car Unsharp, and then move the sliders for Sharpening Strength to 10 and Sharpening Kernel to 0. It is important to select the method first with the drop down box and then to set the values with the sliders.

11.View a sharpened image. A linepair is considered resolved if three solid lines can be seen.

9.2.3.2 Additional Test Procedures1. Take a resolution image with the Flat Field and Dark Field corrections turned OFF.

The resolution should be less (about 0.2 lp/mm) than the resolution with the Flat Field and Dark Field corrections turned ON. If there is a significant resolution difference between Flat Fields and Dark Fields being ON or OFF, then this could point to a


9 - 6 • Detector Troubleshooting • Failed Focus Troubleshooting

problem with the Flat Field corrections. If there is no difference, then continue using the Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.

2. Take an uncorrected image (no Flat Field/Dark Field, or geometric correction) of free air, collimated wide open. Save it as "XrayNoCorr" to be uploaded later. Look at the image to see if anything odd occurred.

3. Take note of the corner focus. If the corner focus is out, move the tube (if applicable) to be centered on the corner line pair. If you get a good result, the Detector Head is capable of the correct focus.

4. Turn the TEC off and wait 5 minutes before taking another focus image. The focus should change dramatically. If it doesn't, then there is something wrong with the cooling of the camera.

9.2.3.3 QuestionsThe following questions will help IDC determine why the focus failed. Record all answers/results in an issue on the IDC tracking site.1. What is the Detector Head's serial number? Recording the serial number is essential for

determining when the Detector Head was made, what type of camera is involved, etc.

2. Is this a newly installed Detector Head or a replacement? If it is a replacement, why was the original Detector Head replaced and were there any concerns with the replacement procedure (e.g., was the gain/offset recalibrated)?

3. Specifically, what has failed? The centre focus, the corners, or all? What is the resolution in all 5 locations (centre and 4 corners)?

4. What is the room temperature/humidity? Nominal room temperature is between 15°C and 30°C. A highly humid room may cause concerns due to condensation.

5. What is the software version?

6. What stand/table is the Detector Head installed onto? If applicable, does the focus change between chest and table position?

7. What is the HVL? An abnormally high or low HVL may cause concern. The specification for the Xplorer is a HVL of between 2.5 mm and 2.9 mm Al at 80 kVp.

8. What is the TEC voltage (TECV)? If the voltage is equal to 0 V or above 8 V, this is a concern.


TROUBLESHOOTING

The following information is included:10.1 “Safety Warnings and Notices” 10.2 “Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities” 10.3 “Error Codes” 10.4 “Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality” 10.5 “Resetting the EEPROM (U27)” 10.6 “Inverters Factory Configuration” 10.7 “Anticrushing System” 10.8 “Bearings Gap Check Procedure” 10.9 “Trigger Board Replacement Procedure” 10.10 “Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure” 10.11 “Grid Detect Replacement” 10.12 “Replacement of Height Motor Assembly” 10.13 “Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly” 10.14 “Replacement of Height Potentiometer” 10.15 “Replacement of SID Potentiometer” 10.16 “Replacement of Detector Motor” 10.17 “Replacement of Detector Potentiometer” 10.18 “Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display”


10 - 2 • Troubleshooting •

10.19 “Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board” 10.20 “Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus” 10.21 “Replacement of Steel Cable” 10.22 “Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt” 10.23 “Replacement of the X-Ray Tube” 10.24 “Replacement of the Collimator” 10.25 “Replacement of the High Voltage Cables” 10.26 “Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic)” 10.27 “Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation” 10.28 “Replacement of Limit Switches: Height” 10.29 “Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer” 10.30 “Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer” 10.31 “Adjustment of the Inclinometer” 10.32 “Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position” 10.33 “Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed” 10.34 “Software Update in Control PCB”


Troubleshooting • • 10 - 3






10 - 4 • Troubleshooting • Safety Warnings and Notices


10.1.1 Service Personnel Safety

CAUTION! Ensure that the C-arm’s movements will not collide with any people, or with theceiling, the floor or with any other equipment.

NOTE: In case of a bump or collision of any type, please position the Arm in Horizontalposition and medium height, then turn OFF the Unit. Wait two minutes and turn theUnit ON to allow the system to perform a self test that will apply correct values.

WARNING! Do not immediately touch the dissipator. It could be hot and cause servere burns.

WARNING! Do not touch the lamp, the socket or the lamp socket. They could be very hot andcause severe burns.


CAUTION! Terminal Pins of HV Cables are extremely delicate and are easily damaged.Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in the pins areopen (parallel to sides).


Troubleshooting • Packing Mode - Change of Room or Facilities • 10 - 5

10.2 Packing Mode - Change of Room or FacilitiesIn case this Unit has to be moved or transported it is necessary to position the Column in Transport position, that is, with the Safety Locking Rod inserted. Some Receptors, due to its height, do not allow to position the carriage in the straight position to insert the Safety Locking Rod. If that is the case, proceed as follows. 1. Press and hold (9) during start up to enter in Configuration / Calibration Mode.

2. Simultaneously press “1” and “4” to enable Packing Mode. This mode disables the Software limits of movements or the Gauge limits. The following message appears on the display “Caution movement without software restriction, place the equipment and switch it off.”

CAUTION! Ensure that the Swivel Arm’s movements will not collide with any people, orwith the ceiling, the floor or with any other equipment.

3. If required, position the Unit at a desired height for comfortable dismantling of the Detector Head and Tube Collimator Assembly.

4. Position the Swivel Arm in the horizontal position and at the correct height in order to install the Safety Locking Rod.

5. Install the Safety Locking Rod and Turn the System Off.


10 - 6 • Troubleshooting • Error Codes

10.3 Error CodesError codes indicate the potential cause of a system failure. They appear on the Control Panel Display on the Column and will enable the service personnel to identify and fix the problems.

NOTE: In case of a bump or collision of any type, please position the Arm in Horizontalposition and medium height, then turn OFF the Unit. Wait two minutes and turn theUnit ON to allow the system to perform a self test that will apply correct values.

Table 10-1 Error Codes

Error Description What to do

E01 EEPROM ERROR. Memory error. Failure in Integrated Circuit.

Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains, turn it OFF and replace EEPROM at Control Panel.

E03 MOVEMENT NOT REQUESTED. Motors start motion without software request (virtual error).

Turn Off/On and re-calibrate. If error remains replace Eeprom.

E04 CONFIGURATION ERROR. One of the following messages appear on display:

Room maximum height too short Reconfigure C12 and C16 to a higher value.

Room Maximum height or Detector height Review and if necessary reconfigure C16, C21 and configure/calibrate C32/P12.

Thorax or Under table height too high. Check C13 and C14. If error remains reconfigure/recalibrate all height related configuration and calibration data.

E05 KEYBOARD ERROR. The unit has detected a motion order (button pressed) during power up.

Check that no object or person is pressing a button on the Control Panel or detector handle. If error remains, check Overlay and PCB at Control Panel.

E06 BROKEN CABLE. The unit has detected the steel cable is broken.

Check and replace if broken. If the cable is in good condition, check the microswitch at the Arm carriage.

E07 ANTICRUSHING DISABLED. After power ON, the unit has detected that the JUMPER at anticrushing PCB has been left installed.

The unit is blocked. This error is displayed only in software versions V5R1.1 (for units without motorized detector) and V6R1.1 (for units with motorized detector) and up.

Check that the Jumper in the anticrushing PCB is not installed (refer to section NO TAG). If error remains after removing the Jumper and turning the unit OFF/ON, check the Anticrushing PCB software version is V2.R1.1 or up. If not, update the software. If error remains, replace the anticrushing PCB.


Troubleshooting • Error Codes • 10 - 7

NOTE: E14, E15, E16 are new errors from V6R2.5 (Receptor with Servomotor) andV5R2.5 (Receptor without Servomotor).

E08 HEIGHT CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit has detected wrong calibration value.

Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains, Configure (C03) and Calibrate (P01), Height in horizontal position. If error remains, manually modify the cam position (upper or lower) at column. If error remains, check the microswitches SW3--SW4 functioning and connections.

E09 ROTATION CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit has detected wrong calibration value.

Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains, Configure (C04) and Calibrate (P02), Rotation degrees. If error remains, manually turn up or down the microswitch position. If error remains, check the microswitches SW5--SW6 functioning and connections.

E10 SID CALIBRATION ERROR. The unit has detected wrong calibration value.

Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains, Configure (C05) and Calibrate (P03), SID Position. If error remains, relocate cam for SID 100 and or 180 (the one affected). If error remains, check the microswitches SW1--SW2 functioning and connections.

E11 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Failure in Height potentiometer.

Check the Height Potentiometer and replace if necessary.

E12 ROTATION INCLINOMETER ERROR. Failure in rotation Inclinometer.

Check the Inclinometer and replace if necessary.

E13 SID POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Failure in SID potentiometer.

Check the SID Potentiometer and replace if necessary.

E14 HEIGHT POTENTIOMETER ERROR. Height potentiometer out of calibration range.

Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains, Calibrate (P01). If error remains, replace Height potentiometer.

E15 ROTATION INCLINOMETER ERROR. Rotation Inclinometer out of calibration range.

Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains, Calibrate (P02). If error remains, replace Inclinometer.

E16 SID POTENTIOMETER ERROR. SID potentiometer out of calibration range.

Turn the System OFF/ON. If the error remains, Calibrate (P03). If error remains, replace SID potentiometer.

RAM ERR Turn Off/On and re-calibrate. If error remains replace Eeprom.

Turn the System OFF / ON. If the error remains, turn it OFF and Replace EEPROM.

Table 10-1 Error Codes

Error Description What to do


10 - 8 • Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality

10.4 Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 FunctionalityThe following instructions describes how to check the proper functionality of the Safety Brake assembly and the micro switch that notifies the user of an error E06. Error E06 indicates that the Safety Brake steel cable is broken or loose. To check the proper functionality of the Safety Brake assembly, a failed Safety Brake cable must be simulated. To create this simulation, the Anti-crushing PCB must be disabled. The primary function of the Anti-crushing PCB is to detect a loss of tension in the Safety Brake steel cable during vertical movement. This indicates that there has been a collision with the C-arm and another object. When a collision occurs, the Anti-crushing PCB senses that the tension on the safety brake cable is loose, and it will reverse the direction of the vertical drive upwards to avoid the collision. Disabling the Anti-crushing board will allow a collision of the system to be simulated, without reversion the vertical movement. The collision of the system will continue until the Safety Brake mechanism is engaged because the safety brake cable is now loose. When the Safety Brake mechanism is engaged, error E06 will be displayed on the Control Panel. Verify that error E06 does not clear when you turn the power OFF and then ON.


Chair, stool, or ladderCushion

10.4.2 Safety Considerations

• The C-arm weighs approximately 250 kg. The table or chair used must be able to with-stand 250 kg.

• Ensure no persons are near the area when lowering the C-arm onto the table or chair. • Entering into calibration mode will bypass the safety mechanisms allowing for free move-

ment of the system. Ensure that the system is used in a safe manner.


DANGER! Do not attempt to make any system movement unless instructed to do so.

NOTE: The images used in this procedure are for reference only. The Detector Head andControl panel are not fully representative of IDC products.

1. Turn the system ON.

2. Disable the Anti-Crushing PCB by inserting the jumper across both pins of W3. See Figure 10-1.


Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality • 10 - 9

Figure 10-1

3. Set the C-arm to chest position.See Figure 10-2.

Figure 10-2

4. Place a chair, a foot stool, or a small ladder (capable of holding the 250 kg weight of the C-arm) under the tube end of the C-arm. Place a cushion on the object that will support the weight of the C-arm when the collision occurs. See Figure 10-3.

Figure 10-3

W3


10 - 10 • Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality

NOTE: Ensure the cushion is in place, as this will help to correctly activate the Safety Brakemechanism. If the collision surface is too hard, the Safety Brake mechanism mayshift slightly, making contact with the Safety Brake latch and pin. This will result inthe test being done incorrectly.

5. To create a collision, press the Vertical Down button on the Control Panel to slowly lower the C-arm down onto the cushioned object. The Safety Brake steel cable will loosen, and the Safety Brake will engage. The Safety Brake will cause the Safety Brake micro switch to display an error E06 on the Control Panel. See Figure 10-4. If the E06 error is not displayed on the control panel, verify that all previous steps in the work instructions have been followed. If E06 error is still not displayed on the control panel, discontinue use and contact IDC immediately for further instructions

Figure 10-4

6. Once the collision has been detected, and the loose Safety Brake steel cable has been verified, turn the system OFF.

7. Remove the W3 jumper from the anti-crushing PCB. This will prevent the error that the Anti-Crushing circuit is deactivated from being displayed.

8. Turn the system ON. E06 should continue to display on the Control Panel. If this error code is present, the micro switch is working properly. See Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5


Troubleshooting • Safety Brake Mechanism and E06 Functionality • 10 - 11

9. You will now need to put the system into Packing mode. Turn the system OFF, then back on. While the system is powering up, press the Lock button in the control panel. Press the vertical up (top left) and the SID + (top right) buttons simultaneously. Figure 1-6. Refer to the 1600 Service Manual for more details.

NOTE: Entering Packing mode will bypass the safety mechanisms allowing for freemovement of the system. Ensure the system is used in a safe manner.

Figure 10-6

10. Ensure the Safety Brake steel cable is positioned correctly on the main motor pulley at the top backside of the system. Press the Vertical Up button on the Control Panel to wind the loose steel cable onto the main drive pulley. Ensure this is done slowly because once the cable becomes tight it will pull the safety brake pin out of the latch. When this happens, there may be a slight banging noise and the system may jerk a little as the safety lock brake is disengaged and the arm is lifted completely from its resting position.

11. Turn the system OFF, then back ON. The error E06 should no longer be displayed, and the system should be fully functional for operation. If error E06 continues to be displayed, discontinue use and contact IDC immediately.

SID +Vertical Up

Lock


10 - 12 • Troubleshooting • Resetting the EEPROM (U27)

10.5 Resetting the EEPROM (U27)The EEprom memory (U27) contains all the configuration and calibration data of the unit. If the data needs to be reset for any reason (e.g., E01) perform the following steps:1. Turn on the Unit.

2. Press and hold 9 (Vxx is being displayed on the Angle display) until CAL appears. Release all buttons and wait five seconds until the real angle degree appears on the Angle display.

3. Simultaneously press 1+3+4+6. The display shows the message INI EEP. The memory has been reset.

4. Perform the configuration and calibration process.

5. If the error remains, replace the PCB A8123--XX.

10.5.1 Unit Movements Blocked

If the Unit movements are suddenly stopped, there are two ways to disable the protection Gauges:

• Safety Lock plus any movement button If the Unit remains continuously blocked (button lights up), it can be moved by pressing and holding the Safety Lock button and then pressing the movement button required. See Figure 10-7.

Figure 10-7

• Jumper in the anticrushing PCBThe jumper is located at the back of the Column. All gauges are controlled through the Anticrushing PCB.

To disable the Gauges action and enable movement of the Swivel Arm (see Figure 10-8): 1. Unscrew the four screws of the PCB cover located at the back of the column.

2. Pick up the Black Jumper (not connected to both pins in factory).

3. Insert the Black Jumper in both Pins. The Gauges are now disabled.

4. Remove the jumper after relocating the arm position or Error 07 will be displayed after powering On the Unit.

+ Any Movement Button


Troubleshooting • Resetting the EEPROM (U27) • 10 - 13

Figure 10-8

Black Jumper in PCB Remove Black Jumper Insert Jumper in Both Pins


10 - 14 • Troubleshooting • Inverters Factory Configuration

10.6 Inverters Factory ConfigurationThe Control Box includes three Motor Inverters factory configured. All units are factory tested and configured according to customer electrical requirements (50/60 Hz). See Figure 10-9.

Figure 10-9

Table 10-2 includes the factory configuration data. Due to the weight of the Receptor, sometimes a fine adjustment can be performed to improve the accuracy of the stop position. For example; F8 is the parameter for Slow Speed, F26 is the parameter for Positioning Speed and F27 is the parameter for Precision Speed. To modify a parameter in an Inverter (the process is the same for all inverters) do the following: 1. Turn On the Unit with the On/Off switch on the Control Box door. Wait 30 seconds until

the Inverters are ready. Usually 045 appears on display. If 045 does not appear, set it with up and down arrows. See Figure 10-10.

Figure 10-10

2. Press DSP/FUN, the last configured parameter appears on the Display. For example F26 (or F00 if the Inverter is new).

3. Press UP/DOWN arrows to go to the desired parameter.

4. When the parameter is displayed, press DATA/ENT to check the value related to the parameter, eg., for F27 the value configured in the Height Inverter is 10.

5. If required, modify the value with the UP/DOWN arrows.

6. Press DATA/ENT to save the modified value.

7. Press DSP/FUN to return to running mode.

NOTE: It is not necessary to press on RUN/STOP.

SID Inverter

Height Inverter

Rotation Inverter


Troubleshooting • Inverters Factory Configuration • 10 - 15

(Refer to the Inverter Manual for extended information).Table 10-2 - Inverter Configuration Data

Parameter Height Inverter SID Inverter Rotation InverterF_01 1 0.3 1F_02 0.3 0.3 0.3F_03 0 0 0F_04 0 0 0

F_05 (50/60 Hz)Factory configured to customer

electrical requirements

2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz 2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz 2 for 50 Hz / 5 for 60 Hz

F_06 Hz (50) -- Hz (60) Hz (50) -- Hz (60) Hz (50) -- Hz (60)F_07 0 0 0

F_08(Slow Speed) 20 25 30F_09 6 6 6F_10 1 1 1F_11 0 0 0F_12 10 10 10F_13 10 10 10F_14 0 0 0F_15 0.1 0.1 0.1F_16 1.5 1.5 1.5F_17 10 10 10F_18 100 50 70F_19 2 2 2F_20 6 6 6F_21 1 1 1F_22 0 0 0F_23 1 1 1F_24 0 0 0F_25 0 0 0

F_26 (Positioning Speed) 10 25 10F_27 (Precision Speed) 10 12 30

F_28 1 1 1


10 - 16 • Troubleshooting • Anticrushing System

10.7 Anticrushing SystemThe Unit has

• Light beams installed in the Arm that stop motion if the light beam is cut. • A Safety Device that reacts to any inadvertent bump to the Arm Assembly (Anticrushing

System).The Safety Device is designed to protect the patient or object, should the arm come in contact. In the rare case of a collision with the Arm, it will automatically stop and then reverse (in low speed for 1.5 seconds in rotational movement or for 3 seconds in a vertical movement). The following is an explanation of when the unit stops or reverses.Anticrushing System: If the Anticrushing System is activated when the Arm of the C-arm is moving down or rotating, it will always reverse the movement, to avoid hitting something between the detector and the floor. See Figure 10-11.

Figure 10-11

If the Anticrushing System is activated when the Arm of the C-arm is moving up, it will reverse or stop depending on the following situations.

• The system only reverses down automatically when the Anticrushing System is activated and the angle is between --30º and 50º (the angle interval where the detector could be under the table). In every other case it stops. See Figure 10-12.

Figure 10-12


Troubleshooting • Anticrushing System • 10 - 17

• In the rest of the angle ranges (from 51º - 120º) the system automatically stops. See Figure 10-13.

Figure 10-13

NOTE: If the Unit remains blocked, the lock light comes on continuously. The unit canbe moved by pressing and holding the Safety Lock button and then pressing themovement button required.


10 - 18 • Troubleshooting • Bearings Gap Check Procedure

10.8 Bearings Gap Check ProcedureThere are four bearings on the back of the main carriage that must be properly tightened against the linear guide.1. Check to see if the gap between the bearings and the guide is correct. The gap between any

of the four bearings and the guide must be less than 0.3 mm. Figure 10-14 below.

Figure 10-14

2. The gap must be measured using a Caliper Shim. Figure 10-15 below.

Figure 10-15

0.3 mm


Troubleshooting • Bearings Gap Check Procedure • 10 - 19

3. Using a dynamonetric wrench, check to see that the screws are properly tightened with 15 Nm torque. Use an open wrench to hold the eccentric nut, avoiding any movement of the nut. Figure 10-15 below.

Figure 10-16


10 - 20 • Troubleshooting • Trigger Board Replacement Procedure

10.9 Trigger Board Replacement Procedure1. Detach the cables from the trigger PWB.

• PMT• Cable to Camera

2. Remove the old PWB and mount the new PWB.

3. Attach the cable from PMT (6 pin connector) to PWB J1

4. Attach the trigger cable (3 pin end) to J2.

5. Run the cable to the camera and plug the four pin end into the top PWB, J3 of the camera.

Figure 10-17

Trigger Cable J2

PMT Cable J1

VR2TP1TP4

VR1

TP6 L1 L2


Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure • 10 - 21

10.10 Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure

10.10.1 Issue Description

To troubleshoot image quality service issues that come from the field, a number of images are required. The following procedure describes the techniques and processes that must be followed when gathering images for troubleshooting image quality.

10.10.2 Resolution Description

Most image quality issues cannot be resolved without some basic images. The images that must be gathered in this procedure are:

• uncorrected dark noise image • uncorrected x-ray image • Flat Field and Dark Field corrected image • Flat Field, Dark Field, and geometric corrected x-ray image • a clinical image showing the problem, if applicable

IDC requires the above images in order to diagnose where the problem is occurring. Each of the shots required is a separate component of the final image. Seeing separate images will allow each image to be inspected and enable us to trace the problem back to a particular location. This should allow a faster response time from IDC to help resolve the issue. These images and information are required to ensure a quality response from IDC. Without these images, IDC cannot determine if a Detector Head should be replaced, and we will not issue an RMA number unless all specified images have been obtained.


N/A

10.10.4 Safety Considerations

N/A


10.10.5.1 Create an IssueIf an issue has not already been created for this problem, create one in the Tracking site


10 - 22 • Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure

under the applicable customer/site project, and clearly state the following information: 1. Detector Head serial number

2. System type (e.g., 1600, 1590)

3. The problem or issue

4. All exposure factors including grid, SID, etc.

5. A clinical image showing the problem (if applicable)

10.10.5.2 Saving ImagesCreate a folder titled DH Evaluation in C:\Magellan2\service. This is where all the required images will be saved. This folder can be accessed at a later date, if the images are not received by IDC.

10.10.5.3 Uncorrected Dark Noise ImageAn uncorrected dark noise image is an unprocessed dark noise image, taken without any corrections applied. To take this image:1. Open DelCano, not Magellan. If Magellan has been opened, exit the application before

opening DelCano.

2. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn off Flat Field and Dark Field correction by unchecking Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.


4. Ensure the Integration Time is 4000 ms. If the value is different than what is currently entered, note the original length in the tracking site issue and return the time to the original length after capturing the dark noise image.

5. Select Apply.

6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set the Anatomy/Projection/Level to Calibration/Delcano/HR. Select OK.

7. Select Trigger to capture the image.

8. Save the image as DarkNoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.

10.10.5.4 Uncorrected X-ray ImageAn uncorrected x-ray image is an unprocessed x-ray image of free air (nothing in the field), taken without any corrections applied. This image must be included to assess image quality. To take this image do the following: 1. Remove the grid. If possible, set the SID to 180 cm. If you are unable to set the SID to 180

cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.

2. Open DelCano, not Magellan. If Magellan has been opened, exit the application before opening DelCano.



3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn off Flat Field and Dark field correction by unchecking Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.


5. Select Apply.

6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set the Anatomy/Projection/Level to Calibration/Delcano/HR. Select OK.

7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small focal spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of free air at 50 kVp and 16 mAs.

8. Save the image as XrayNoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.

10.10.5.5 Flat Field and Dark Field Corrected Image A Flat Field and Dark Field corrected image is an unprocessed image of free air (nothing in the field), taken with only Flat Field and Dark Field correction applied. To take this image do the following: 1. Remove the grid. Set the SID to 180 cm, if possible. If you are unable to set the SID to

180 cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.


3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn on Flat Field and Dark Field correction by checking Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.

a. If there is more than one Flat Field file in the Flat Field path frame, write down the location of all the files. You will need these locations later in the procedure.

b. Locate the Flat Field exposure that corresponds to your detector position. This is identifiable by the SID, and detector position. Select the Question Mark but-ton to confirm the information.

c. Remove every Flat Field file that does not apply to the Detector’s orientation/SID. To remove a file, select the filename, then select the minus button.


5. Select Apply.

6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set Anatomy/Projection/Level to Calibration/Delcano/HR. Select OK.

7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small focal spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of free air at 50 kVp and 16 mAs.

8. Save the image as XrayCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.


10 - 24 • Troubleshooting • Image Gathering Troubleshooting Procedure

9. Add the individual Flat Field files. Select the Plus button beside the Flat Field path. Find the Flat Field file that was previously removed by referring back to the list of file locations noted. Repeat until all of the Flat Field files are present.

10.10.5.6 Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric Corrected X-ray ImageA Flat Field, Dark Field, and Geometric corrected x-ray image is an unprocessed image of free air (nothing in the field), taken with Flat Field, Dark Field and Geometric correction applied. To take this image do the following: 1. Remove the grid. If possible, set the SID to 180 cm. If you are unable to set the SID to 180

cm, set to 100 cm. Ensure the collimator is exposing the entire imaging area.


3. Select Xplorer Calibration. Turn on Flat Field and Dark Field correction by checking Apply Flat Field and Dark Field corrections.

a. If there is more than one Flat Field file in the Flat Field path frame, write down the location of all the files. These locations will need used later in the procedure.

b. Locate the Flat Field exposure that corresponds to your detector position. This is identifiable by the SID, and possibly the detector position. Select the Question Mark button to confirm the information.

c. Remove every Flat Field file that does not apply to the detector’s orientation/SID. To remove a file, select the filename, then select the minus button.

4. Turn on Geometric correction by checking Apply Geometric Correction.

5. Select Apply.

6. From the DelCano dialog box, select Anatomy. Set Anatomy/Projection/Level to Calibration/Delcano/HR. Select OK.

7. Take an image of free air (nothing in the field) at 50 kVp and 32 mAs, with a small focal spot, when the SID is set to 180 cm. If the SID is set to 100 cm, take the image of free air at 50 kVp at 16 mAs.

8. Save the image as XrayGeoCorr in the DH Evaluation folder.

9. Add the individual Flat Field files. Select the Plus button beside the Flat Field paths frame. Find the Flat Field file that was removed earlier. Repeat until all of the Flat Field files are present.

10.10.5.7 Uploading ImagesUpload the images (not .jpeg files) onto the tracking site. The images may also be saved to a CD and couriered, with the appropriate tracking site issue number or problem description, to IDC, Attention: Service.

10.10.5.8 Record the InvestigationRecord the outcome of the investigation in the appropriate issue on the Tracking site. If the



issue has been resolved, record what was done to resolve the problem. If the Detector Head needs to be returned to IDC, record the RMA # in the issue.


10 - 26 • Troubleshooting • Grid Detect Replacement

10.11 Grid Detect Replacement Replacement of the Grid Detect board should take one service engineer approximately one hour. The following steps are required to prevent further damage to an existing board or damage to the new board. 1. Move the detector head to an appropriate working height for servicing.

2. Remove the end covers and the front panel skins from the Detector Head.

3. Remove the bolts from the four corners on the back of the face plate and at the end of the support frame and remove the handle.

4. Remove the 4 x M5 bolts holding the faceplate onto the ion chamber support frame. (Be careful not to stress or damage the grid detect cable.)

5. Unplug the grid detect cable from the grid detect board on the face plate.

6. Remove the damaged board from the faceplate.

7. Bend the mounting tabs located on the faceplate for the Grid Detect board 1 or 2 mm toward the front of the faceplate to allow for extra clearance.

8. Replace the Grid Detect board, plug in the cable, and replace the covers.

9. Open the TECCM in Magellan 3 and see if the values correspond to the look up table listed above.


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly • 10 - 27

10.12 Replacement of Height Motor Assembly

10.12.1 Subassembly

Height Motor Assembly at Upper Column

10.12.2 Required Tools

One of the following is required to help support the stand:• Three meter (118 in) length of rope or similar (sling) to prevent the Unit from tilting if

the procedure is performed with the Unit in vertical position• Piece of wood, 30 cm height (12 in) or similar if the procedure is performed with the

Unit resting on a piece of wood on the floor (due to the low ceiling height).

10.12.3 Procedure

WARNING! If the ceiling height in the room is below 280 cm (110 in), perform theprocedure with the unit lying on a piece of wood or similar.

NOTE: If possible, insert the Safety Locking Rod in the carriage to block the carriage. Ifthis is not possible two people are needed to support the carriage when releasingthe Steel Cable.

CAUTION! To prevent damage to the Detector Head and the skins, it is recommended toremove the Detector Head from the unit before performing this procedure.

1. Insert the Safety Locking Rod (if possible).

2. Remove the Detector Head from the stand.

3. Remove the upper back cover of the stand.

4. Unscrew and remove the Upper Stand Support (not the Wall Support) from the Unit.

5. Install a 3m (118”) rope or similar (sling) between the Wall Support and the Carriage (insert the rope in the carriage) to prevent the Unit from tilting or falling.

6. Manually push up the carriage to release the steel cable tension and then remove the fixing screw for the steel cable at the back of the stand. Unroll the cable. If the Safety Locking Rod is not inserted, the Arm (Carriage) will go down. Carefully let it rest on the floor or on a support.

7. Unscrew the six bolts that fix the motor to the stand.

8. Disconnect the cable connections for the potentiometer and motor power.

9. Manually lift the defective motor (the Pulley and the Potentiometer Assembly included) out from the top. See Figure 10-18.


10 - 28 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly

P

S(

P

Figure 10-18

10. Place the Motor Assembly on a working surface and remove the Top Cover of the defective Motor.

Figure 10-19

11.Release the Potentiometer Support Screws and release the Tooth Belt from the Potentiometer Gear (see Figure 10-19 above).

12.Remove one allen screw at the back of the Pulley and remove it (with its shaft) from the defective Motor. (Use a Plastic Head hammer to bump out the shaft).

Motor and Pulley

Rope or similar

ulley

teel Cable ScrewPreviously disassembled)

Upper Column Support

Motor Fixing Screws

Tooth Belt

M17 Fixing Screw forPotentiometer Mounting

Potentiometer Cable

Tooth Belt TensionerPlate


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly • 10 - 29

13.Remove the Potentiometer Assembly screws from the defective Motor and take the Potentiometer Assembly out (cable and connector included).

14.Reinstall the Potentiometer Assembly in the new Motor (leave it loose).

15.Insert the Shaft/Pulley, including the Potentiometer Tooth Belt in the new motor.

16.Reinstall the Top Cover from the defective motor on the new Motor.

17. Install the new Motor in the stand and connect the Motor and Potentiometer Assembly connectors.

18.Wire the Steel Cable around the spiral pulley in a clockwise direction and install the Steel Cable screw. The Unit may need to be powered on and the carriage moved to release the tension in the Steel Cable.

19.Carefully remove the rope and reinstall the Upper Column Support with the Wall Support.

20.Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.

21.Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter (volts) in the Potentiometer Contacts and move the Potentiometer Shaft to 2.5 Volts.

22.Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position. The belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight enough so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be pulled and consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than tight. If you apply a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend around 2 to 3 mm. For fine positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly positioned, tighten the screws.

23.Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration Details” on page 4-19. When calibrating the Potentiometer readout (it appears during the calibration process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the potentiometer readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23) and the maximum height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is well adjusted the value for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not within the limits, repeat step 3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the Potentiometer Shaft to increase or decrease all these values.

24.Reinstall the upper back cover.

NOTE: If the Height Motor has to be replaced on the floor, perform the following steps.At least three persons are needed to lay the Unit on the floor.

CAUTION! To prevent damage to the Detector Head and the skins, it is recommended toremove the Detector Head from the unit before performing this procedure.

1. Remove the Detector Head from the stand.

2. Turn the Arm in the Vertical position and lower the carriage as much as possible to keep the gravity center close to the floor.


10 - 30 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Motor Assembly

3. Power off the Unit.

4. Remove the upper back cover of the Column.

5. Unscrew the Floor anchoring screws and then the Upper Column Support.

6. Carefully, lay the Unit down. Rest the upper part on a piece of wood and the base on the floor. See Figure 10-20.

Figure 10-20

7. Follow from Step 5 of previous procedure.

8. When the new motor is assembled and the Unit is in vertical position, re-install the base anchoring screws.

Motor and Pulley

Upper Back Cover

Wood

Carriage


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly • 10 - 31

10.13 Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly

10.13.1 Required Tools

To comfortably perform this procedure, two working benches should be used to support the Unit.

NOTE: A minimum of two people and a complete working day are needed to performthis task.

10.13.2 Procedure

1. Position the machine to middle height and insert the Safety Locking Rod.

2. Rotating to the Chest position (if possible) greatly facilitates the job.

3. Remove the Tube and the Detector Head.

4. Remove the cover for the rotation gear.

5. Place the working benches below the arm.


7. Remove the arm from the carriage by first removing the three screws located at the lower right side, then the screws at the back of the arm with the exception of the corner screws. These will be removed last, to avoid the arm from bending. See Figure 10-21 and Figure 10-22.

Figure 10-21

Rotation Gear

Arm Fixing Screws(Do not forget to reinstall thescrews in the same position)


10 - 32 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Rotation Motor Assembly

Figure 10-22

8. Remove the arm, resting it on the working benches.

9. Unplug the two connectors and the ground cable from the arm.

10. Separate the arm further from the column.

11. Dismount the rotation motor.

a. First loosen the screws that push the motor to the gear.

CAUTION! Be careful, as this will allow the motor to rotate free.

b. Remove the four fixing screws.

12.Remove the motor and position the new one in place, fix it with the four screws and tighten the screws that push the motor to the main gear.

13.Connect cables J1, J6 and GND.

14.Replace the arm. Ensure the screws around the bearing are the six screws with the small head.

15.Install the covers for the rotation bearing.

16.Install the Tube and Detector Head.

17.Calibrate the maximum and minimum height. See 4.5 “Calibration Details” on page 4-19.

18.Recalibrate the Unit. See “Detector Calibration And Configuration” on page 6-1.

Unscrew first thelower screws


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Potentiometer • 10 - 33

10.14 Replacement of Height Potentiometer

10.14.1 Subassembly

Height motor assembly at upper column.

10.14.2 Procedure

1. Power on the Unit and position the Arm so that the carriage is at the middle height of the total travel (typically 105 cm from the centre of the carriage to the floor).


Figure 10-23

3. Remove the upper back cover of the stand.

4. Release the Tensioner Plate to disengage the Tooth Belt from the Potentiometer Gear and remove both screws of the U shaped Potentiometer Mounting Plate (open Wrench of M17). See Figure 10-23 above.

5. Disconnect the other end of the Potentiometer Cable from its aerial connector, cut the tie wrap and pick up the Potentiometer Assembly.

6. Loosen the two Grub screws (do not totally remove them) inserted in the Gear that fixes the Gear to the potentiometer and remove the Gear.

7. Remove the Potentiometer from the Tensioner Plate. Do not loosen the round and locking washers.

8. Unsolder the Potentiometer wires. Note where each wire is connected so the wires can be re-soldered in the same position for the new Potentiometer.

Tooth Belt

Potentiometer Gear

Potentiometer Cable

Tooth BeltTensioner Plate

M17 Fixing Screwfor PotentiometerMounting Plate


10 - 34 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Height Potentiometer

9. Solder the wires on the new Potentiometer. Take note that the wire marked as number 2 is the one for the cursor.

10.Mount the new Potentiometer in the Tensioner Plate. First insert the round washer, then the locking washer. Position the potentiometer where the previous one was mounted and tighten the screws.

11.Mount the Mounting Plate in the stand, insert the gear in the potentiometer shaft and tighten the two Grub screws.

12.Tighten the two Potentiometer Mounting Plate screws (M17). Place a Tie wrap to route the Potentiometer cable and connect it.

13.Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.

14.Set the Potentiometer shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter (volts) in the potentiometer contacts and move the potentiometer shaft to 2.5 Volts.

15.Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position. The belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight enough so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be pulled and consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than tight. If you apply a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend around 2 to 3 mm. For fine positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly positioned, tighten the screws.

16.Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration Details” on page 4-19. When calibrating the potentiometer readout (it appears during the calibration process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the potentiometer readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23) and the maximum height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is well adjusted the value for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not within the limits, repeat step 3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the potentiometer shaft to increase or decrease all these values.

17.Reinstall the upper back cover.


Troubleshooting • Replacement of SID Potentiometer • 10 - 35

10.15 Replacement of SID Potentiometer

10.15.1 Subassembly

SID Potentiometer at Arm End

10.15.2 Procedure

1. Place the tube carriage in the middle of the total travel of the SID.

2. Power Off the Unit.

3. Remove the Arm Back Cover.

Figure 10-24

4. Unsolder the wires that feed the broken potentiometer. See Figure 10-24.

5. Take the new Potentiometer, solder the wires.

6. Set the Potentiometer in the middle position (five turns) or power up the machine, connect the multimeter and set 2.5 Volts with the Potentiometer’s shaft.

7. Place the Potentiometer support so that the Potentiometer’s gear is in touch with the chain gear. Do not apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Ensure the Potentiometer is kept at its middle position.

8. Tighten the screws fixing the support.

9. Reinstall the Arm Back cover.

10.Power up the Unit and recalibrate the SID. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on page 4-3.

SID Potentiometer Standard Version SID Potentiometers for Systems with Automatic Collimator

Fixing Screw for Potentiometer SupportPot Gear

Chain Gear


10 - 36 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Motor

10.16 Replacement of Detector Motor

10.16.1 Subassembly

Detector Motor at arm end.

10.16.2 Procedure

1. Place the Detector Head in the Chest position and lower it so that it can be cushioned and unable to rotate freely.


3. Remove the Detector Motor Back Cover.

Figure 10-25

4. Release the Potentiometer Support screws to separate the Potentiometer Gear from the Motor Gear. See Figure 10-25 above.

5. Remove the Electrical connections from the Terminal block.

6. Unscrew the Motor Plate support screws (2).

7. Unscrew the Motor Support screws (4).

8. Carefully take out the motor ensuring the Detector Head is supported so it does not rotate.

9. Install the new motor. Be careful with the Motor Gear and the Potentiometer Gear. Do not apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Tighten the Potentiometer Support screws.

Terminal Block

Motor Support Screws (4)

Motor Gear

Motor Plate Support Screws

Fixing Screw for Pot Support


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Motor • 10 - 37

10.Connect the Motor cables to the Terminal Block and Ground.

11.Turn On the unit and position the Detector at --45.

12.Turn the potentiometer clockwise to the maximum and then turn 1/8 counterclockwise.

13.Using a level, check the correct readout of the Detector angle.

14.Power off the Unit and reinstall the Arm Back cover.

15.Power up the Unit and recalibrate the Motor Angle. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on page 4-3.


10 - 38 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Detector Potentiometer

10.17 Replacement of Detector Potentiometer

10.17.1 Subassembly

Detector Motor at arm end

10.17.2 Procedure

1. Place the system in Thorax position.

2. Power off the unit.

3. Remove the Detector Back Cover.

Figure 10-26

4. Release the Potentiometer Support screws to separate the Potentiometer Gear from the Motor Gear. See Figure 10-26 above.

5. Unsolder the wires that feed the broken potentiometer.

6. Replace the broken Potentiometer with the new one and re-solder the wires. Do not apply force to the Motor Gear and the Potentiometer Gear. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Tighten the Potentiometer Support screws.

7. Turn On the Unit and position the Detector at --45º.

8. Turn the Potentiometer clockwise to the maximum and then turn 1/8 counterclockwise.

9. Using a level, check the correct readout of the Detector angle.

10. Power off the UNit and reinstall the Arm Back cover.

11. Power up the Unit and recalibrate the Motor Angle. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on page 4-3.

Motor Gear

Pot Gear Potentiometer

Fixing Screws for Pot Support


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display • 10 - 39

10.18 Replacement of Control PCB and PCB Display

10.18.1 Subassembly

Tube Collimator Assembly

10.18.2 Procedure

1. Place the system in Chest position.

2. Power off the unit.

3. Remove the X-ray Tube Cover (screws at the back of the cover and pull).

Figure 10-27

4. Remove the PCB Support Screws and disconnect all the connectors at the Control PCB. Figure 10-27.

5. Replace the Control PCB or the Display PCB and connect all connectors.

6. Reinstall the cover.

7. Perform the Configuration and Calibration processes. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on page 4-3.

PCB Support Screws

PCB Display

Control PCB


10 - 40 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board

10.19 Replacement of Anticrushing Circuit Board

10.19.1 Subassembly

Column Back

10.19.2 Procedure

1. Place the Detector Head in chest position.


3. Remove the PCB Cover at the back of the column (a small square cover with four screws).

Figure 10-28

4. Disconnect all the connectors at the PCB and remove the PCB Support Nuts. See Figure 10-28 above.

5. Replace the Anticrushing PCB and connect all connectors.

6. Reinstall the cover and power on the Unit.

PCB Support Nuts

PCB AnticrushingConnectors


Troubleshooting • Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus • 10 - 41

10.20 Replacement of PCB Interface X Plus

10.20.1 Subassembly

Control Box X Plus LP

10.20.2 Procedure


2. Open the Control Box.

3. Disconnect all the connectors at the PCB Interface X Plus and remove the PCB Support Nuts.

4. Replace the PCB Interface X Plus and connect all connectors. See Figure 10-29.

Figure 10-29

PCB InterfaceX Plus


10 - 42 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Steel Cable

10.21 Replacement of Steel Cable

10.21.1 Subassembly

Height Motor Assembly at Upper Column and Carriage

10.21.2 Procedure

WARNING! Before releasing the steel cable, insert the safety locking rod in the carriage toblock the carriage. If this is not possible, ensure that the support arm can rest on astrong and reliable support.

1. Remove the Detector Head.

2. Power On the Unit.

3. Move the Carriage up or down and insert the Safety Locking Rod.


5. Press the up or down button to release tension in the Steel cable and then unscrew the fixing screw for the Steel cable at the back of the column. Unroll the cable. If the Safety Locking Rod is not inserted, the support arm will go down. Ensure it is resting on a strong and reliable support.

6. Remove the Safety Washers and the Pin attached to the end of the Steel Cable at the carriage.

7. Install the new Steel Cable by winding the Steel cable around the spiral pulley in clockwise direction and tighten the Steel Cable Screw at the carriage with the Safety Washers. See Figure 10-30.

8. Reinstall the upper back cover.


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Steel Cable • 10 - 43

Figure 10-30

Steel Cable Screw

Pin

Safety Washers


10 - 44 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt

10.22 Replacement of the Pulley / Tooth Belt

10.22.1 Subassembly

Height Motor assembly at upper column and carriage

10.22.2 Procedure

Follow procedure outlined in 10.12 “Replacement of Height Motor Assembly” on page 10-27. It includes the disassembly of both the Pulley and the Tooth Belt.


Troubleshooting • Replacement of the X-Ray Tube • 10 - 45

10.23 Replacement of the X-Ray Tube

10.23.1 Subassembly

Tube-Collimator Assembly

10.23.2 Procedure


2. Remove the Tube-Collimator cover.

3. Carefully disconnect the High Voltage cables from the Tube by first loosing the Grub Screw located at the Ring Nut, then unscrewing Ring Nut and pulling out the Termination Plug of the High Voltage cable.

CAUTION! Terminal Pins of HV Cables are extremely delicate and are easily damaged.Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in thepins are open (parallel to sides).

4. Remove the X-Ray Tube cover and disconnect the Stator / Thermostat cables.

5. Remove the Collimator back cover and disconnect the Collimator Lamp Cable.

6. Remove the four Centering Adjustment Screws of the Collimator and remove the Collimator.

7. Remove the four allen screws of the Collimator Adaptation Ring and remove the X-Ray Tube.

8. Replace the X-Ray Tube and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.

Figure 10-31

Ring Nut

Grub Screw

HV Cable

Terminal of HV Cable


10 - 46 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the X-Ray Tube

Figure 10-32

X-ray Tube Cover

Stator/Thermostat Cable

Collimator CoverCollimator Cable Centering and Safety Screws

of Collimator


Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Collimator • 10 - 47

10.24 Replacement of the Collimator

10.24.1 Subassembly


10.24.2 Procedure

1. Turn the System Off and remove the Tube-Collimator cover.

2. Remove the Collimator back cover and disconnect the Collimator Lamp Cable.

3. Remove the four Centering Adjustment Screws of the Collimator and remove it.

4. Replace the Collimator and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.


10 - 48 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of the High Voltage Cables

10.25 Replacement of the High Voltage Cables

10.25.1 Subassembly


10.25.2 Procedure


2. Remove the Tube-Collimator cover.

3. Carefully disconnect the High Voltage cables from the Tube by first loosing the Grub Screw located at the Ring Nut, then unscrewing by hand the Ring Nut and pulling out the Termination Plug of the High Voltage cable.

CAUTION! Terminal Pins of HV Cables are extremely delicate and are easily damaged.Handle them carefully. Ensure all pins are all straight and the splits in the pins areopen (parallel to sides).

4. Disconnect the High Voltage Cables from the Generator in the same manner.

5. Assemble the mounting accessories of each Termination Plug following the Cable manufacturer instructions.

6. Before installing the cables in the Generator Tank and in the X-Ray Tube, prepare the High Voltage terminals that will be installed in the X-ray Tube(s) receptacles. To do this, apply Silicone Paste over the entire surface of the Plug including the Pins and the Tube receptacle and placing 1cm of oil in the HV Cable receptacle in the Generator.

7. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables into the respective X-ray Tube receptacles (Apply Silicone Paste on the X-Ray Tube Receptacle). Ensure that all connections are made correctly (keep correct Anode and Cathode orientation). Securely hand-tighten the Ring Nut and tighten the Grub Screw located at the Ring Nut.

8. Put approximately 1cm (0.5”) of HV Oil in the HV Transformer receptacles.

9. Carefully connect the Anode and Cathode cables from the X-ray Tube(s) into the respective HV Transformer receptacles. Ensure all connections are made correctly (keep correct Anode and Cathode orientation). Securely hand-tighten the Ring Nut and tighten the Grub Screw located at the Ring Nut.

10.Replace the X-Ray Tube and reinstall the assembly in reverse order.


Troubleshooting • Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic) • 10 - 49

10.26 Replacement of the Collimator Lamp (Manual and Automatic)

10.26.1 Subassembly


10.26.2 Procedure

WARNING! Do not immediately touch the dissipator. It could be hot and cause servereburns.

WARNING! Do not touch the lamp, the socket or the lamp socket. They could be very hotand cause severe burns.


2. Remove the Collimator Back cover.

3. Remove the lamp protection heatsink.

4. Carefully remove the faulty lamp.

5. Replace the lamp with an identical lamp.

6. Ensure that the lamp pins are completely inserted in the lamp-holder.

7. Check on Light Field / X-Ray field correspondence.

8. If necessary remove the lamp, rotate it 180º axially and re-insert.


10 - 50 • Troubleshooting • Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation

10.27 Replacement of Limit Switches: Rotation

10.27.1 Subassembly

Arm

10.27.2 Procedure

1. Power on the Unit and move the Detector Head to the Chest position.


3. Remove the Rotation Gear cover to gain access to the Rotation Limit Switches.

4. Remove the switches and replace.

Figure 10-33


Troubleshooting • Replacement of Limit Switches: Height • 10 - 51

10.28 Replacement of Limit Switches: Height

10.28.1 Subassembly

Carriage

10.28.2 Procedure


2. Remove the small square cover located at the back of the carriage to gain access to the Height Limit Switches. Remove the switches and replace.

Figure 10-34

Carriage

Square Switches Cover


10 - 52 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer

10.29 Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer

10.29.1 Subassembly

Height Motor Assembly (Column Upper Part)

10.29.2 Procedure

1. Power on the Unit and position the Arm so that the carriage is at the middle height of the total travel (typically 105 cm from the centre of the carriage to the floor).


Figure 10-35


4. Release the Tensioner Plate to disengage the Tooth Belt from the Potentiometer Gear.

5. Power on the Unit and place the Carriage at middle travel.

6. Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter (volts) in the Potentiometer Contacts and move the Potentiometer Shaft to 2.5 Volts.

7. Place the Tooth Belt over the gear and place the Mounting Plate in its final position. The belt should be straightened by hand without any pressure. The belt must be straight enough so the teeth remain in place, but loose enough so the potentiometer will not be pulled and consequently damaged. It is better to leave it a little bit loose rather than tight. If you apply a normal finger pressure in the middle of the belt, it should bend around 2 to 3 mm. For fine positioning use the Tensioner Plate Screws. When correctly positioned, tighten the screws.

8. Calibrate maximum, half and minimum height for the stand. See 4.5 “Calibration Details” on page 4-19. When calibrating the Potentiometer readout (it appears during the calibration process after pressing store button), the displays shows OK and then the potentiometer

Tooth Belt

Potentiometer Gear

Potentiometer Cable

Tooth BeltTensioner Plate

M17 Fixing Screwfor PotentiometerMounting Plate


Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Height Potentiometer • 10 - 53

readout. The minimum height should not be lower than 20 (typically 23) and the maximum height should not be higher than 80 (typically 78). If everything is well adjusted the value for half height should be very close to 50. If the values are not within the limits, repeat step 3 in the Calibration procedure and turn the Potentiometer Shaft to increase or decrease all these values.

9. Reinstall the upper back cover.


10 - 54 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer

10.30 Adjustment of the SID Potentiometer

10.30.1 Subassembly

SID Motor Assembly (Arm)

10.30.2 Procedure

1. Place the system so that the tube carriage is at the middle of the total travel of the SID.

2. Power system down.

3. Remove the Arm Back Cover.

Figure 10-36

4. Set the Potentiometer Shaft in its middle position (five turns) or connect a multimeter (volts) in the Potentiometer Contacts and move the Potentiometer Shaft to 2.5 Volts.

5. Place the Potentiometer support so that the Potentiometer’s gear is in touch with the chain gear. Do not apply force. They should be touching just enough for the movement to be transmitted to the Potentiometer. Ensure you keep the Potentiometer at its middle position.

6. Tighten the screws fixing the support.

7. Reinstall the Arm Back cover.

8. Power up the Unit and recalibrate the SID. See 4.1 “Configuration and Calibration” on page 4-3.

Fixing Screw for Pot Support Pot Gear Chain Gear


Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Inclinometer • 10 - 55

10.31 Adjustment of the Inclinometer

10.31.1 Subassemblies

Arm Assembly

10.31.2 Procedure

1. Remove the central back Cover of the Arm.

Figure 10-37

2.Power up the Unit and position the Arm in horizontal position (check with a level).3. Loose the Inclinometer fixing screws.4. Turn the Inclinometer’s position in order to obtain 0°. The photo shows its correct position.5. Tighten the Inclinometer screws.6. Power off the Unit and assemble the Cover.


10 - 56 • Troubleshooting • Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position

10.32 Adjustment of the Swivel Arm Balance in Horizontal Position

10.32.1 Subassemblies

Arm Assembly

10.32.2 Procedure

NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the X-ray Tube or the Collimator has to bereplaced by a different X-ray Tube or Collimator (different weight).

1. Power on the Unit. Place the Swivel Arm in horizontal position and open the SID at maximum meters.

2. Press the Rotation button and check that the Swivel Arm is balanced. The Swivel Arm should not tilt in any direction without force applied at any point.

If the Swivel Arm is incorrectly balanced perform the following steps:a. Remove the end cover of the Arm.

b. Install or remove the Counterweight Plates required to balance the Swivel Arm, such that the Tube-Collimator Assembly end weighs the same as the Detector Assembly end. Re-install the Top Cover.

Figure 10-38

Counterweight Plates


Troubleshooting • Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed • 10 - 57

10.33 Adjustment of Receptor Motor Speed

10.33.1 Subassembly

Receptor Assembly

10.33.2 Procedure

NOTE: This section only applies to systems where the speed of the Receptor must bemodified. The speed may have to be reduced as the Receptor does not stop at 0°or 90° due to the force of inertia.

1. Open the Control Box Door.

2. Identify the PCB Interface X Plus A8124-07, located in the Control Box.

3. Measure the Voltage between GND PWR and TP3 (Figure 10-39). Turn the Potentiometer screw R13 clockwise or counterclockwise to set the voltage higher or lower. The adjustment in voltage will increase or decrease the speed rotation of the detector.

4. Repeat this procedure measuring at GND PWR and TP4 and adjusting the speed with the screwdriver at R16.

Figure 10-39

TP3

TP4

R13

R16

GND PWR

PCB Interface X Plus


10 - 58 • Troubleshooting • Software Update in Control PCB

10.34 Software Update in Control PCB

10.34.1 Subassembly


10.34.2 Tools

Special Serial Cable RS232. PC (Laptop) with RS232 serial port. Program “Flip V2.4.4” (to load software on to the board). URS LP Control Board A8123--04.

10.34.3 Procedure

1. Install the software for microcontrollers ATMEL serial programming in the PC (flip 2.4.4). Save the dll file AtRs232no.dll on C:\Program files\Atmel\bin.

2. Connect the cable to the PC serial port and to the J10 control board connector.

3. To program the microcontroller set the W1 and W2 switches on B position and the supply connected to J6.

a. Select Start > Programs > flipb. Select Device > Select and mark T89C51RD2.

Figure 10-40

c. Select Setting >Communications >RS232. Choose the serial port, the baud rate (38400) and select Connect.


Troubleshooting • Software Update in Control PCB • 10 - 59

Figure 10-41

d. Ensure the Level is 0. If not, choose Level 0 and select SET.e. Select File > Load HEX and choose the new control board software and select Open.f. Select the “SXXXX.hex” file for Motorized detector systems or “SXXXX.hex” for non--motorized systems.g. Press Run.3. After programming the microcontroller return W1 and W2 to A position.VERY IMPORTANT: After the software modification, configure and calibrate the equipment and change the inverter configuration values. See 10-2 “- Inverter Configuration Data” on page 10-15.Take special note of the following:

• F02 was “0.5” for height, SID, and rotation inverter and now it should be 0.3 for all. • F15 was “0.3” for height, SID and rotation inverter and now it should be 0.1 for all.• F27 was “30” for height inverter and now it should be 5.


PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE

This chapter provides guidelines and intervals for the proper preventative maintenance of the system. Included in this chapter is

11.1 “Scheduled Maintenance”


11 - 2 • Preventative Maintenance •



0.1 March 15, 2007 Module created using existing information

1.0 June 6, 2007 First release


Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance • 11 - 3

11.1 Scheduled MaintenanceFilm-based x-ray systems are subject to daily Quality Control to ensure the chemistry is stable, temperatures are correct, film is not fogged and mechanical components such as film transport rollers, are clean and free of contaminants. With digital imaging, Quality Control becomes unnecessary because chemistry is not a factor. Computed Radiography systems still require regular Quality Control because imaging plates wear and the scanning mechanism is subject to dirt and contaminants. Digital Radiography systems, involve solid state x-ray imaging. Digital Radiography exclude moving parts, any chemistry, and consumables. The need for daily Quality Control is removed. IDC systems require preventative maintenance to be performed every six months by qualified service personnel.

IDC is in the process of producing a phantom for regular Quality Control checks; however, it is not required to perform the Quality Control checks more than every six months. Availability of the phantom is expected in late 2006.The remainder of the section defines the scheduled activities that will be carried out as part of an overall maintenance agreement.


IDC does not accept any responsibility for equipment that has not beenserviced and maintained in accordance with the instructions provided,including any instructions that have been altered or modified.

CAUTION! For scheduled departmental power tests, the main power should be turned offuntil testing is complete.

11.1.1 Lock-out Procedures

Emergency stop buttons shall not to be used during maintenance or servicing operations in place of required lock-out procedures. The equipment shall only be serviced by trained service personnel. Service personnel shall be knowledgeable of and follow their organizations required lock-out procedure. This procedure should state that the equipment shall not be serviced without locking the electrical disconnect in the open position.


11 - 4 • Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance

11.1.2 Scanning for Volume Errors

1. In the Start Menu, select My Computer.

Figure 11-1

2. Right-click the disk drive you want to scan. See Figure 11-2 below.

3. Select Properties.



Figure 11-2

4. Select the Tools Tab.

Figure 11-3

5. Select the Check Now... button to scan for volume errors.



6. In the Check Disk Local Disk dialog box, check both boxes labelled “Automatically fix file system errors” and “Scan for and attempt recovery of bad sectors”. See Figure 11-4. Any corrupted sectors or sites will be repaired with the scan.

Figure 11-4

7. Select Start.

NOTE: Scanning for volume errors may take several minutes.

11.1.3 Running the Windows Disk Defragmenter

1. In the Start Menu, go to My Computer. See Figure 11-1.

2. Right-click the disk drive you want to defragment.

3. Select Properties. See Figure 11-2.

4. Select the Tools Tab. See Figure 11-3.

5. Select the Defragment Now... button to run the Disk Defragmenter.

6. Select the disk drive you want to defragment in the top window pane.



Figure 11-5

7. Select the Defragment button. Data will be reorganized on the disk drive to allow for more free space.

NOTE: Defragmenting may take several minutes.

11.1.4 Care and Cleaning

For optimal performance, IDC recommends that the working area be kept clean and that air intake and outflow ports on the Detector Head be kept clear. When cleaning the system:

• Use a non-abrasive, soft cloth. • Never soak the unit or allow cleaning fluids to drip or run. • Exercise care and caution around fan guards, grid door, and Control buttons. Do not

allow foreign material or cleaners to enter openings.• Never use the following cleaning tools or chemicals:

•hard brushes or scrapers•strong acids or alkaloids•acetones (includes lacquer thinner)•hexane



•Dettol®: may diminish the stability of the surface coatingTo perform maintenance on the system:1. Switch the unit OFF.

2. Wipe external surfaces with an approved cleaning liquid from the list below:

• most alcohol and ammonia based cleaners• bleach• mild, non-abrasive cleansers such as Fantastic® or Formula 409®.

3. Wipe the cleaned surface with a cloth lightly moistened with clean water to remove residual cleaner and dirt.


Preventative Maintenance • Preventative Maintenance Checklist • 11 - 9

11.2 Preventative Maintenance ChecklistTo be performed every six months:

Software Maintenance____ Scan for volume errors. See above Section 11.1.2, “Scanning for Volume Errors”.____ Run the Windows Disk Defragmenter. See above Section 11.1.3, “Running the

Windows Disk Defragmenter”.____ Create a backup CD of c://Magellan2/datafolder and c://winnt/Magellan.ini

(Windows 2000) or c://windows/Magellan.ini (Windows XP)____ Perform a High-Contrast Resolution Test. See Section 7.1.6.6, “High-Contrast

Resolution”.

System Maintenance

DANGER! Never attempt to clean the internal parts of the system. Ensure all openingsand doors are shut. System maintenance must be undertaken by a highlyqualified maintenance personnel.

____ Inspect system grids for damage or artifacts.____ Verify proper operation of the grid slide assembly.____ Clean and inspect the two system ventilation fans. These two are located in the

Detector Head.

NOTE: Clean and clear ventilation fans are critical for proper image quality. Usecompressed air to clear fan debris. Do not use a vacuum.

____ Check that all electrical connections are secure and that all cable clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Check that connectors do not have exposed wires and check cable sheaths for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly routed. See above

____Movement components - Check correct operation of the controls, detents, limits and movements in all possible positions.____Steel cable - Verify that the steel cable is in good condition and appearance. Replace the Cable if any steel wire is damaged.____Rails - Clean the Column Rails with a cloth moistened in clean water and lubricate both rails with a cloth moistened with lubricant oil. In case of noise during movement, clean and lubricate again.____Chains / Guides / Bearings - Clean and lubricate these types of components.____Brakes / Locks - Check correct operation of the Brakes / Locks. Replace if necessary.____Functional Checks / Adjustments - Perform a Functional Check of all room equipment. Perform the respective adjustments of the equipment if necessary.


11 - 10 • Preventative Maintenance • Preventative Maintenance Checklist

Computer MaintenanceSee above Section 11.1.4, “Care and Cleaning” for appropriate cleaning products.____ Clean keyboard and mouse.____ Clean and inspect the computer fans and filters.

NOTE: Use compressed air to clear fan and filter debris. Do not use a vacuum.

To be performed every twelve months:____ Complete Acceptance testing procedures. See Section 7.1.2, “Scope” in Magellan System Acceptance.

To be performed every five years:____ Replace the lithium battery on the CPU motherboard.


Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency • 11 - 11

11.3 Scheduled Maintenance FrequencyThis section defines the scheduled activities that will be carried out as part of an overall maintenance agreement.

11.3.1 Purpose

The purpose of this Periodic Maintenance is to guarantee a continued safe performance of the Unit, to increase serviceability, to reduce costs (down time, repairs, etc.) and to assure safety (personal risk).The following checks and maintenance procedures, at the suggested intervals, are the manufacturer’s recommendation for the most effective Periodic Maintenance schedule for this Unit. Service tasks here described must be performed exclusively by service personnel specifically trained on medical X-ray Generators.

11.3.2 Frequency

The recommended preventative maintenance cycle for the system should include four inspections per year, spaced at three month intervals. Two of these preventative maintenance inspections should be a physical, on-site inspection. The other two preventative maintenance inspections should be a remote, diagnostic connection. These on-site and remote preventative maintenance inspections should be alternated.

11.3.2.1 Stand Preventative Maintenance Procedure

WARNING! Never attempt to clean or handle any part of the unit when it is on. Switch itoff and disconnect it from the mains before cleaning or inspecting.

On-Site Preventative Maintenance Service - execute every twelve months:1. Exterior cleaning – Clean exterior covers with a clean cloth moistened with warm

water and a mild soap solution. To rinse, wipe with a cloth moistened with warm water. Inspect all covers and handles for operation concerns, physical damage, and missing hardware. Do not use cleaners or solvents of any kind.

DANGER! Never attempt to clean the internal parts of the unit. The unit must always bekept shut unless a specific renewal part is required. This procedure must beundertaken by a highly qualified maintenance personnel.

2. Electrical Checks – Check that all electrical connections are secure and that all cable clamps and strain reliefs are in place. Check that connectors do not have exposed wires and check cable sheaths for wear and fraying. Check that all cables are correctly routed.

3. Check painted surfaces for scratching and touch up as required.

4. Verify proper operation of all system buttons and doors.


11 - 12 • Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency

5. Inspect system grids for damage or artifacts.

6. Verify proper operation of the grid slide assembly.

7. Clean and inspect the two system ventilation fans. These two are located in the detector head.

8. Measure the power supplies.

9. Check Windows 2000 error log for errors. Clear the log file after complete analysis.

10.Check IDC Magellan 3 errors logs. Clear the log file after complete analysis. Clean keyboard, mouse ball, and mouse interior rollers.

11.Verify monitor has the proper luminance as per procedure.

12.Clean and inspect computer fans, filters and system interior.

13.Make an archive copy of the system settings on a floppy disc.

14.Perform an image quality test as per procedure (Acceptance Test), and compare it to the previous test.

Workstation Preventative Maintenance Service - execute every six months:1. Check the Windows 2000 error log for errors. Clear the log file after complete analysis.

Performed by local IT.

2. Scan the main disc drive for volume errors using Windows system utilities. Performed by local IT.

3. Verify system fragmentation is under 5%. Run Windows disk defragmenter as required. Performed by local IT.

4. Verify antivirus definitions are up to date. Performed weekly by local IT.

5. Check image storage directory for old images. (Make a list and verify with the customer if these images are required and archived before removing.)

6. Download the system settings to the IDC database for backup purposes (Optional) (Automatic if CHUM is activated).

Every 5 years:Replace the lithium battery on CPU motherboard

11.3.2.2 Optional 80 KW Generator Preventative Maintenance Procedure

Every twelve months and whenever a related certifiable X-ray component is replaced:1. Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapor-proof compound.

2. Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main cabinet as needed. See the Operators Manual for detailed cleaning procedures.

3. Perform the X-ray tube auto-calibration routine reference. Refer to the CPI generator manual.


Preventative Maintenance • Scheduled Maintenance Frequency • 11 - 13

4. Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator. Disconnect the tube thermal switch(es) and verify the correct error message. Verify that the X-ray exposures are inhibited.

5. Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this installation.

Every twelve months only:1. Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any damaged components.

a. The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if used, including the membrane switch assembly.

b. The cable between the control console and the generator main cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and generator main cabinet.

c. The handswitch and fluoro foot switch (if used) and the cables connecting these to the console.

2. Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged cables etc.

3. Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation holes or louvers on the generator cabinet.

Every five years:Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console and on the generator CPU board in the main cabinet.


PARTS LIST

The following information is included:12.1 “Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure” 12.2 “Renewal Parts” 12.3 “Detector Head Parts”


12 - 2 • Parts List •






Parts List • Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure • 12 - 3

12.1 Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure

12.1.1 Material Requests

In an effort to ensure the correct and timely fulfillment of your replacement parts orders, IDC requires any material requests be reviewed by our Technical Support Team prior to the placement of your order. This will help to determine if the components requested will actually resolve your specific technical issues.

12.1.2 Placing an Order

Once your request is logged and approved, we will require: 1. An official company purchase order to be sent via fax or e-mail.

Our acceptance of a verbal PO# is solely at the discretion of management, according to the situation. A follow-up hard copy is always required within 24 hours.

2. The part number, description, and quantity.

3. The name of the IDC technical support person who approved the order.

4. Your shipping information and desired shipping method (based on urgency).

5. The model and serial number of the specific component containing the part(s), e.g., generator, table, tubestand, wallstand, collimator, x-ray tube. The serial number ensures the replacement part to be shipped will match the unit’s revision and version, and will update our records.

6. Name and contact information of the person ordering the parts.

7. An e-mail address to receive the tracking information.

8. The original Sales Order number (if available).

12.1.3 Order Processing

NOTE: No warranty replacement parts order will be processed without a PO# and thecomponent serial number.

Once all of the above is received, your order will be processed and shipped. The cutoff time for IDC supplied parts orders is 14:00 MST, Monday through Friday. Orders for other supplied parts will be promptly processed, however due to geographic locations the cutoff times may vary. The RMA number has to be clearly visible on the outside of the packaging.Although some types of parts orders can be hand-processed through our Technical Support Department for an additional hour on weekdays, we will attempt to fulfill the order but can not provide any guarantee. Tracking Numbers will be sent to the specified e-mail address on the purchase order by the morning following shipment. We will extend every effort to provide tracking


12 - 4 • Parts List • Warranty and Spare Parts Procedure

information for materials drop-shipped from the supplier. If an item is unavailable for shipment, an IDC Service Parts Coordinator will contact you with any applicable updates.

12.1.4 Warranty Parts Return Procedure

When the return of an original part or a replacement part is required for analysis or exchange, an RMA (Return Materials Authorization) number and a completed RMA form will be required and included along with the packing list for your return shipment. Any item shipped “Freight Collect” will be refused.Any item not returned within 30 days will be invoiced.IDC will not accept unauthorized returns; we will return these to you at your expense.Protecting the value of returned products by packaging and shipping them correctly is your responsibility. IDC reserves the right to deny warranty coverage for any damage caused by failing to meet the following packaging requirements:

• All parts must be packed securely inside the external shipping carton to prevent mechani-cal damage.

• External packaging must be sufficient to protect the contents from the usual hazards of shipping.

NOTE: An incomplete or inaccurate RMA Form will prevent us from collecting the essentialinformation to help us improve our products and serve our customers moreefficiently.


Parts List • Renewal Parts • 12 - 5

12.2 Renewal PartsFRU 1 = Replacement parts should be in stock.FRU 2 = Not necessary to have it in stock.FRU -- = All parts available in factory stock.

Figure 12-1

Table 1

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksA0 X-Plus Head A8101-01A1 Tube RX Cover 1 2 N 10336-XX Specify colorA2 Hand Brake Handle 1 2 N 54402008A3 Handle 1 2 N 54404106A4 Control PCB URS LP 1 2 N A8123-04A5 PCB Plus LP Display 1 2 N A8141-01A6 Overlay 1 2 N 55801411A7 Display LCD 1 2 N 54207036

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7


12 - 6 • Parts List • Renewal Parts

Table 2

Figure 12-2

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksB0 Swivel Arm A8102-11B1 Motoreducer SID 1 2 N 52402021B2 POT (10 Turns) 2W 10K ohm 1 2 N 52719003B3 Inclinometer 1 2 N 50501016B4 Photo-Sensor 2 2 N 53412101B5 Simple Chain 2250 MM 1 2 N 53930010B6 High Precision Switch (SW1-SW2 for SID) 2 2 N 50605014B7 POT 10K 1 Turn 1 2 N 52719006B8 Motoreducer Detector 1 2 N 52402081B9 High Precision Switch (Receptor) 2 2 N 50605014

B10 Bearing 25X37X7 1 2 N 51501005Handle Maneta Elesa 1 2 N 54402011 (Not Mot Receptor)

B2 B10 B5 B3 B1 B4

B6

B8B9B7



Table 3

Figure 12-3

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksC0 Carriage A8103-01C1 High Precision Switch (SW3 Lower Lock /

SW4 Upper Lock & SW5-SW6 for ROT)4 2 N 50605014

C2 Motoreducer Turn 0.37 kW 1 2 N 52402024C3 Excentric Bearing 8 2 N 51501207C4 Excentric Bearing 4 2 N 10497-02C5 Spring 4 2 N 10372-01C6 PCB Anticrushing 1 1 N A3531-01

C2

C3(8)

C5C1

C6C4 (4)

C1



Table 4

Figure 12-4

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksD0 Column X-Plus 8105-01D1 Tooth Belt 10-T5-340 1 2 N 53940115D2 POT (10 Turns) 2W 10K ohm 1 2 N 52719003D3 Motoreducer Height 1 2 N 52402028

D2D1

D3



Table 5

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksE0 Control Box A8130-05E1 PCB Sedecal X-Plus Interface 1 1 N A8124-07E2 Servo Detector Movement 1 2 N 52403011E3 Input Line Transformer 1 2 N 50509036E4 Converter POT=1.5KW 2 2 N 52403003E5 Converter POT=0.75KW 1 2 N 52403004E6 Fuse SB 10A 250V F1-F2 2 2 N 53801008E7 Fuse SB 2A 250V F3 3 2 N 53801010E8 Fuse SB 4A 250V F4 2 2 N 53801013E9 Fuse SB 8A 250V F5 2 2 N 53801014

E10 Fuse 0.4V 250V SB F6, F7 3 2 N 53801015E11 Relay Shrack K2 1 2 N 51403050E12 Relay 24 VDC K1 1 2 2 51403049E13 Fan 1 2 N 53103008E14 Emergency Switch 1 2 N 53613019E15 Switch Green Lamp 16A, 250 VDC 1 2 N 50613012



Figure 12-5 E1 E2 E11 E12 E7, E8, E9 E3 E13

E4 E10 (2) E5 E6 E4 E14 E15



Table 6

Figure 12-6

Table 7 - Other Renewal Parts

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksF0 Receptor A8117-10F1 Overlay (Receptor Handle) 1 2 N 55801369F2 Emergency Switch 1 2 N 50613016

Item Description QTY FRU REP Reference RemarksToolsCarriage Regulation Tool 1 2 N 15004-01RS232 Cable (Software Update) 1 2 N A7658-01Wheels Kit (Column Positioning Aid) 1 2 N A8176-01Collimator - Manual Short Cables 1 2 N A8172-01Collimator - Manual Long Cables 1 2 N A8173-11Collimator - Automatic Short Cables 1 2 N A8174-31Collimator - Automatic Long Cables 1 2 N A8175-51

F1

F2


12 - 12 • Parts List • Detector Head Parts

12.3 Detector Head PartsTable 12-1 displays available parts for IDC Detector Heads.

Table 12-1

IDC Assembly Part Number

IDC Sub-Assembly Part Number

Manufacturer/Part Number Description

740-008-001 Detector X4C-CK

740-0007-017 Detector X3C-CD

740-0007-18 Detector X3C-ALD

740-000X-00X Detector X3C-ALK

740-0008-009 Detector X3C-CK

740-0008-008 Detector X3G-K

430-0132-000 Camera cooling cable; internal

430-0133-000A Camera cooling cable; external; terminated at one end only

430-0139-000 Cable termination kit for 430-0133-000A includes:

420-0000-033 Molex/39-01-2121 • 12 position connector

410-0013-002 Molex/39-00-0041 • Male pins (12)

430-0130-000 Camera power cable; internal

430-0131-000A Camera power cable; external; terminated at one end only


402-0000-021 Molex/39-01-2081 • 8 position connector

410-0013-002 Molex/39-00-0041 • Male pins (8)

430-0101-001 Fibre optic cable

430-0135-000 TEC and grid detect cable

700-0240-199 Hot link card

740-0007-005 Power Distribution Module Assembly


Parts List • Detector Head Parts • 12 - 13

Table 12-2 displays available options for IDC Detector Heads.

740-0008-005 Camera board set (X3C-CK, X3C-ALK and X3G-K)

700-0501-099 • Camera communication board (X3C-CK, X3C-ALK and X3G-K)

700-0520-099 • Camera driver board (X3C-CK, X3C-ALK and X3G-K)

740-0007-010(R2)

Camera board set (X3C-CD and X3C-ALD)

700-0500-199A • Camera communication board (X3C-CD and X3C-ALD)

700-0510-199 • Camera driver board (X3C-CD and X3C-ALD)

740-0009-001 Camera board set (X4C-CK)

700-501-099 • Camera communication board (X4C-CK)

700-0521-199 • Camera driver board (X4C-CK)

Table 12-2




430-0134-000A Digital grid detect cable


402-0414-003 JST/EHR-3 • 3 position connector

402-0415-001 JST/SEH-001T-PO.6 • Male pins (3)

700-0250-399 Digital grid detect board

Table 12-1





SUPPORT

This chapter explains how to use the IDC’s support network. The sections are as follows:13.1 “Product Support” 13.2 “Service”


13 - 2 • Support •



1.0 August 26, 2005 Revision after Module Creation.

1.1 October 25, 2005 Minor Changes.

4.0 July 31, 2006 Added module part number.

4.1 August 30, 2006 European contact information added.

4.2 October 30, 2006 Minor revision.

4.3 November 15, 2006 Information specific to local service provider added.


Support • Product Support • 13 - 3

13.1 Product Support The primary role of IDC Support is to provide technical support to the local IDC authorized dealer, IDC authorized service organization, or hospital in-house service. For customer support, the customer’s first call should be to you, the local service provider. If a problem is beyond your capability, our call escalation procedure allows you to quickly involve IDC.


13 - 4 • Support • Service

13.2 ServiceThe Detector Heads contain no serviceable parts. When calling for assistance, please have the following information at hand:

• The model and serial number of your system (this information is on the label affixed to the imaging stand).

• Your name and the facility from which you are calling.• The Magellan 2 software release version number.• The Purchase Order Number, if placing a request for service or parts out of warranty.• A detailed description of the problem including the frequency of occurrence and details of

corrective attempts made to date. Please have this manual available for reference during your call.

Alternatively you may log on to the issue tracking site at http://tracking.imagingdynamics.com to select your project and enter the details.

NOTE: Before returning any material directly to IDC, please call the Help Desk to obtain aRMA number (Return Material Authorization). At this time, you will be given anyspecial instructions for shipping such as international waybills, special cratingrequirements, etc.

NOTE: Goods arriving at IDC’s shipping dock without RMA numbers will not be accepted.Goods arriving damaged due to improper packing/crating will not receive warrantyreturn credit and may result in invoicing to recover cost of repairs.

13.2.1 IDC Support and Hours of Coverage

8:00 am–5:00 pm MST Monday to Friday (holidays excluded)Call toll free:

NOTE: Overtime billing may apply. In such cases, a purchase order number is required.

Help Desk 1.866.975.6737 (1.866.XPLORER)

After Hours 1.877.275.9399 and leave a voice message

E-mail [email protected]


SCHEMATICS

The following schematics are included at the end of this manual:• Sedecal X-Plus 54302080• X-Plus/IDC Adaptation IM - 353• Motor Brake Adaptation IM - 358• URS Plus LP Control A8123-04• URS Plus LP Interface A8124-07• URS Plus LP Display A8141-01• Anticrushing A3531-01• Generator Cabinet 54301052• ATP Console A6188-22• PC Serial Console I/F - 036• Room Warning Light Interface I/F - 008• AEC Compatibility IM - 015• 1600 System block diagram


INDEX

Symbols

% symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-64, 8-66

A

AC power source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25Acceptance Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3accession number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44acetones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7acids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Acquisition Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16activating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103active PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-52, 8-59add step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102adding a new printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59AE Title, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47AEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27AEC (Automatic Exposure Control)

density 8-100field left, field center, field right 8-100sensitivity 8-100

air intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7alkaloids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7aluminum filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

anatomyadd new 8-86manage 8-85

anatomy and procedureremove or duplicate step 8-105

anatomy/projection pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92add level 8-94add step 8-102copy parameter values 8-96modify parameter details 8-98

Application Entity Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Arcoma CMT

position parameters 8-99artifact removal procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9artifacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30auto resend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55automatically refresh schedule . . . . . . . . . 8-43autoposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99

B

binned images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22border density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79, 8-99brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7


15 - 2

burn in scale markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63burning in the VOI LUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

C

Camera Communication Cable (Fibre optic) 3-77Camera Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11, 1-12camera temperature . . . . . . . . 6-22, 6-27, 6-30CCD technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4CDD temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5change

password 8-21charge trap removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Chip Defect Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31Class I Type B equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24cleaning liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6collimator x position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101collimator y position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101column, resizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44columns, changing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44compact generator

line powered 3-29component list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Computer Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77computer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62configuring DICOM Annotation Settings 8-63configuring Xporter FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99contrast allergies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44copper filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9crate disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4creating new correction coordinates . . . . . 6-31cropping ROI offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30Current CCD temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

D

dark field correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9, 6-19dark field images paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23date of birth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43DC JPEG send destination . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53deactivating procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103default PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59default send destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

DelCano Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30delete

procedures 8-104despeckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Dettol® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8device options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99diagnostic patient images . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29DICOM (Digital Imaging and Communications inMedicine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28DICOM AE Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-60

E

Ehsan Samei . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6electrical power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3electromagnetic interference . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Electrostatic Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18electrostatic sensitive device . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23empty image density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99equalization

iterations 8-80, 8-100kernel 8-80, 8-100strength 8-80, 8-100

Erasure Thoroughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15EtherNet connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12existing groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17exposure

settings 8-100technique 8-100

F

f# options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50falling-edge trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5film

speed 8-99film destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62film session label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62film size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67flat and dark fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Flat field correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9flat field images paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28flatfield correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23focal spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100


15 - 3

FTP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74FTP Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

G

generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Generator Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6generator workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Geometric correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9geometric correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29, 7-6GND and/or Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99grid requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75group details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17

H

handling and transportation of the detector head 3-48hanging protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Heat sink temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5hexane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7High-Contrast Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13HIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Hospital's Information System . . . . . . . . . 8-36Host Name/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

I

IDC Detector HeadAEC Pre-amp 3-65Emergency stop wires 3-65Installing the Detector Assembly 3-64

Image Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69Image Receptor Dimensions . . . . . .1-11, 1-12import

procedures 8-104inactive PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59inactive send destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52Institution Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76integration time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11ionization chamber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

K

kV value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100kVp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

L

Lab 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25lacquer thinner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7Linearity and Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10lithium battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13loading dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4local building codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4lossless compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50LV-DRAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

M

mA value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Magellan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28magnification type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62mammography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5managing the procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102mAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27mAs value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100maximum density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62Measuring the Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19medical alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44medium type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62minimum density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62mirror image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Modality Performed Procedure Step . . . . 8-36Modality Performed Procedure Steps . . . . 8-38Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7MPPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36, 8-38ms value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100

N

network interface card . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3neutral power supply conductor . . . . . . . . 1-25noise reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80, 8-100

O

Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4operating humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99outflow ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7


15 - 4

P

PACS (Picture Archiving and CommunicationsSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28PACS description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48pad image to fill image box . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63paperwork requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Parameter Manager

anatomies 8-85password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21patient age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43patient ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43patient name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43photometric interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62Physical Inspection/Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 7-4POD (Pixel Optimized Dose) mode . . . . . 8-99polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62port settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Power Distribution Module . . . . . . . 1-6, 1-13Power supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5powering up the Xplorer 1600 . . . . . . . . . 3-78preset position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-101preventive maintenance inspections . . . . 11-11print bit-depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62print demographics on images . . . . . . . . . 8-63print information configuration . . . . . . . . 8-65print priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62printer AE title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60printer description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60printer, changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60procedures

activating or deactivating 8-103change order of steps 8-105create new 8-107delete and import 8-104manage 8-102

processing parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99projection

create new 8-91manage 8-89modifying 8-91

projection/anatomy pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92protective earth ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25protective mask and gloves . . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7proxy server address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74

Q

queued images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

R

Radiographic Stand Dimensions . . . . . . . . 1-10Radiology Information System . . . . . . . . . 8-36RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3Readout Linearity Function . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10receiving dock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4recommended kVp settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28recommended mAs settings . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28referring physician . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44refreshing scheduled studies . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43relative humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4removing a PACS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51removing a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69removing a worklist provider . . . . . . . . . . 8-39removing a worklist server . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39removing additional columns of pixels . . . 6-30removing additional rows of pixels . . . . . . 6-30Requested Procedure Description . . . . . . . 8-44Requested Procedure ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44resampling bit depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50resetting values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30return material authorization . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4RIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36RMA number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4ROI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Room Door Interlock Switch . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Room requirements 1600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100rotation of incoming images . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29

S

Scheduled Performing Physician . . . . . . . 8-40Scheduled Procedure Step Description . . . 8-40Scheduled Procedure Step Location . . . . . 8-40Scheduled Station Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Scheduled Studies - managing . . . . . . . . . 8-41scintillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7Scintillator Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3scrapers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7security group

add 8-16


15 - 5

modify 8-17Sedecal Generator

Back Cover Installation 3-25cabinet covers 3-32cable connections 3-27cable routing 3-28Extended Memory data 5-15Extended Memory Locations 5-15Fastening Bar 3-28Generator Service Mode 5-12Service Menu 5-10X-Ray Tube Data 5-19X-Ray Tube Type Selection 5-18

Sedecal Generator CalibrationDigital mA Loop Open 5-20

Sedecal Generator ConfigurationAuto-Calibration 5-20Generator Service Mode 5-12Test Switches 5-6

Send Destination, removing . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51Send Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46send destinations, changing order . . . . . . 8-53Send Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Send Manager Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Sending Preferences, configuring . . . . . . 8-54Serial Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4server description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38sex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43sharpening

amount 8-80, 8-99kernel 8-80, 8-99

Shell Diala Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31shutter, shuttering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100Shutting Down Magellan 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9SID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99Site Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4smoothing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62SPS Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43SPS Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44SPS ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Storage and Shipping Conditions . . . . . . . . 2-4storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4straightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-79, 8-99structural strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

T

TCP/IP port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38, 8-49TEC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77TEC Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32TEC set-point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32TECCM temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Temperature and Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4testing a printer’s connection . . . . . . . . . . 8-71testing the connection to a Worklist Provider 8-41testing the FTP connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74Testing the Send Destination Connection . 8-51thallium doped cesium iodide . . . . . . 1-19, 3-7Thermo Electric Cooler (TEC) Controller . 6-3transportation temperature range . . . . . . . . 2-4trigger cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62True Size Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63true size print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63tube auto-calibration routine . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

U

unbinned images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22universal symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17use DICOM annotation box . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63user list

configure 8-19modify 8-20

using a proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-74using different series UID . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

V

vapor-proof compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12video card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12, 8-3Virtual Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34voltage levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Voltage on the TEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

W

Windows 2000 operating system . . . . . . . 2-12Worklist Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Worklist Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Worklist Provider - adding . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Worklist Provider - changing . . . . . . . . . . 8-37


15 - 6

Worklist Provider - query conditions . . . . 8-40Worklist Scheduled Station AE Title . . . . 8-40workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

X

X co-ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31XMap locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29Xplorer 1600

Adjustments 4-25Anchoring the Column Base 3-22Brake Power Cable 3-41Calibration Mode 4-19Calibration of P11 - Minimum Height 4-20Calibration of P12 - Maximum Height 4-20Calibration of P13 - Half Way Height 4-20Calibration of P21 - Minimum Angle 4-21Calibration of P22 - Vertical Angle 4-21Calibration of P23 - Horizontal Angle 4-21Calibration of P24 - Minimum Angle 4-21Calibration of P31 - Minimum SID 4-22Calibration of P32 - Maximum SID 4-22Calibration of P41- Minimum Detector Angle

4-22Calibration of P42 - 0° Detector Angle 4-23Calibration of P43 - Maximum Detector Angle

4-23Collimator installation 3-44configuration 4-5, 4-7, 4-9Configuration Mode 4-10Configuration of C11 - Inches / CM 4-10Configuration of C12 - Maximum Height 4-10Configuration of C13 - Thorax Height 4-11Configuration of C14 - Undertable Height 4-

11Configuration of C15 - Table Height 4-11Configuration of C16 - Detector Height 4-11Configuration of C17 - Detector Width Left 4-

12Configuration of C18 - Detector Width Right

4-13Configuration of C19 - SID Point 4-13Configuration of C21 - Safety Height 4-14Configuration of C31 - Minimum Horizontal

Position 4-14

Configuration of C32 - Maximum HorizontalPosition 4-15

Configuration of C33 - Half Way Height 4-15Configuration of C61 - Minimum Angle 4-15Configuration of C62 - Detector Detent at 0°

4-15Configuration of C63 - Maximum Angle 4-16control box 3-16Control Box Inverters 3-40HV Cables connections 3-46installation 3-19Light Field Alignment 4-28perpendicularity adjustment 4-31Power cables 3-42pre-installation requirements 3-18safety locking rod 3-19Safety Locking Rod removal 3-46stand control box installation 3-24Swivel Arm balance test 4-25Trigger Board Adjustments 3-79Trigger Board Electronics 3-79Trigger Settings 3-80unpacking the column 3-16unpacking the generator 3-17wiring the stand 3-40X-ray Tube Installation 3-44

Xplorer 1600 Plus positioning . . . . . . . . 8-101Xplorer1600

wall support 3-22X-ray generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9X-ray radiation exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18X-ray Tube

Safety Thermostat 3-34x-ray tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6, 6-27X-ray tube connection

Anode cables 3-32fans 3-33high voltage cables 3-32LV-DRAC 3-33Stator cable 3-33

Y

Y co-ordinate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31YMap locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29


SEDECAL X-PLUS_1

SEDECAL X-PLUS_2

ROOM WARNING LIGHT INTERFACE

PC SERIAL INTERFACE

AEC COMPATIBILITY

X-PLUS IDC ADAPTATION

GENERATOR CABINET

A3531-01_Anti Crushing

ATP CONSOLE

1.1 X1600 Series (X3C and X4C) System Block Diagram

idc_1600servicemanual901-0005-026v1.0jun0607

Documents